JP2020115962A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine performing an appropriate control on corresponding relationship between decorative identification information and specific identification information.SOLUTION: In a low probability/non-KT state (normal state), while a variable display of a first special symbol that is a main symbol and a variable display of a second special symbol that is a sub symbol are parallelly being performed, if a displayed result of the variable display of the second special symbol that is not corresponding to decorative symbols becomes a "big win", an occurrence of the big win is notified by displaying characters of "FEVER" without performing a presentation of stopping and displaying a combination of the decorative symbols that becomes the big win.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-14

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player. There is one configured in. Further, a variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “variation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result, the predetermined game value is obtained. There is one configured to give the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The prize value is to pay out a prize ball or give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball in the prize area. In addition, the game value is that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes a state advantageous for the player who easily hits the ball when the specific display result is obtained, and That is, the right to generate an advantageous state is generated, and the condition for paying out a prize ball is easily established.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information), which is started in the variable display means based on the fact that the game ball has won the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. When it is done, "big hit (advantageous state)" occurs. The derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win is entered. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are won, the winning holes are closed. The number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and the special winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

As such a gaming machine, as shown in Patent Document 1, two special symbols (specific identification information) are variably displayed at the same time, while the decoration identification information corresponding to one special symbol is variably displayed, the other special symbol. When the variable display result of is a big hit, the special symbol corresponding to the decoration identification information is switched from one special symbol to the other special symbol, and the big hit symbol is the variable display result of the decoration identification information corresponding to the other special symbol. Displayed gaming machines have been proposed.

JP-A-2013-138737 (FIG. 65)

As shown in Patent Document 1, when two pieces of specific identification information are variably displayed at the same time, the specific identification information corresponding to the decoration identification information is switched from one specific identification information to the other specific identification information. When the configuration is applied, it is unclear which display result of the decoration identification information corresponds to the display result of the specific identification information, and since the player may misidentify it, the decoration identification information and the specific identification information It is necessary to perform appropriate control regarding the correspondence.

The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately controls the correspondence relationship between decoration identification information and specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel with specific identification information variable display means ( A game control microcomputer 100),
Depending on the gaming state (non-KT state, KT state), the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) Decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decoration pattern) corresponding to either one of
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol) When the advantageous state (big hit game state) is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to (), as shown in (A1) to (A4) of FIG. When the display result of the variable display of the special symbol is "big hit"), a notification effect for notifying the variable display result of the decoration identification information (as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4), a combination of decorative symbols that is a big hit) (In this example, an effect for stopping and displaying "222") is provided, and a notification effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control) is provided,
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the specific identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information. When it is controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display ((B1) to (B4) in FIG. 10-14, the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is "big hit") When it becomes), the notification effect is not executed (as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B1), the effect of stopping and displaying the combination of the decorative patterns that is a big hit is not executed, and the characters “FEVER” are displayed. Is displayed to notify the occurrence of a big hit),
further,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The end effect selecting unit that selects a longer period in the first advantageous state as a finish effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate than in the second advantageous state ( For example, a game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 11-10, FIG. 11-11),
End time effect executing means capable of executing end time effects (for example, ending effect) during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, FIGS. 11-23 to 11-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Reception means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting may be used. Step S752A in FIG. 11-19, step in FIG. 11-20, step in FIG. 11-21. S784: The period in which the selection can be accepted may be the first half of the end effect period or the second half of the jackpot round. Specifically, in the 16R jackpot, a 13R start command is received. It may be a period from when the 16R end command is received).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to the decoration identification information, by not performing the notification effect, based on the variable display of any specific identification information. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing whether or not it has been controlled to the advantageous state. Further, since the period of time controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the gaming value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel with specific identification information variable display means ( A game control microcomputer 100),
Depending on the gaming state (non-KT state, KT state), the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) Decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decoration pattern) corresponding to either one of
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol) When the advantageous state (big hit game state) is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to (), as shown in (A1) to (A4) of FIG. When the display result of the variable display of the special symbol is "big hit"), a notification effect for notifying the variable display result of the decoration identification information (as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4), a combination of decorative symbols that is a big hit) (In this example, an effect for stopping and displaying "222") is provided, and a notification effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control) is provided,
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the specific identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information. When it is controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display ((B1) to (B4) in FIG. 10-14, the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is "big hit") When it becomes), the notification effect is not executed (as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B1), the effect of stopping and displaying the combination of the decorative patterns that is a big hit is not executed, and the characters “FEVER” are displayed. Is displayed to notify the occurrence of a big hit),
further,
A normal state (for example, a normal state), a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state (for example, a probable variation state, a time saving state, a high base state), and the advantageous state as a first advantageous state (for example, 16-round big hit, probability variation big hit) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round big hit, normal big hit), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, and is capable of controlling game state control means (for example, a big jackpot). , A game control microcomputer 100),
A case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than a case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called big hit big hit) (For example, in the case of a big hit of so-called consecutive chan), an end time effect selecting unit (for example, an end effect selecting unit that selects a long period at a high rate as an end effect time period at the end of the advantageous state (for example, ending effect time)). The game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 11-10, and FIG. 11-11),
End time effect executing means capable of executing end time effects (for example, ending effect) during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, FIGS. 11-23 to 11-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect capable of accepting from the player a selection of an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end time effect period in the first advantageous state. Reception means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting may be used. Step S752A in FIG. 11-19, step in FIG. 11-20, step in FIG. 11-21. S784.),
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to the decoration identification information, by not performing the notification effect, based on the variable display of any specific identification information. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing whether or not it has been controlled to the advantageous state. Further, since the period of time controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the gaming value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

The game machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the specific identification information corresponding to the variable display of the decoration identification information When it is controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display ((A1) to (A4) in FIG. 10-14, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is "big hit") A movable body that uses a movable body (a movable body motion production that moves the movable body 06TM100 from the tilted position to the standing position as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A3)). The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is provided,
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the specific identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information. When it is controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display ((B1) to (B4) in FIG. 10-14, the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is "big hit". The moving body effect is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (B3) and (B4), the moving body motion effect is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the movable body effect is executed at an irregular timing that is not expected by the player who is paying attention to the variable display of the decoration identification information, and thus the movable state that is controlled in the advantageous state is highly movable. Prevents a decrease in the entertainment of body production.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C1 to means C3,
The first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, in the second special symbol). Variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) based on that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first number of reserved memories is not 0) (Variation display)
The second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied (the start prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B) (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the second special symbol). Variable of the second specific identification information (the second special symbol) based on the fact that it is not controlled in any of the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variation display result, and the second reserved memory number is not 0) Display (variable display),
It is possible to control in a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, It is controlled to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of 2 special symbols (YES in step S06TM1000A), as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, in the variable display result of the 1st special symbol. It is controlled to the big hit game state based on (YES in step S06TM1000B),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when being controlled to the special state (small hitting game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, When the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000A), the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and as shown in FIG. 10-4, In the 2 special symbol normal process, when the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the variable display of the second special symbol is not started)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the start condition cannot be satisfied while being controlled to the advantageous state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state. In addition, since the start condition cannot be satisfied while being controlled to the special state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
A gaming machine of means C4,
A gaming machine characterized by being able to be controlled to a special state (KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hitting game state).
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming state which is different from the advantageous state as the advantageous game state for the player.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C1 to means C5,
Regardless of the gaming state, variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) corresponding to the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) visibility is lower than the first special identification information variable display is executed. Possible (variable display of the first small symbol can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol), and decoration identification corresponding to the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) It is possible to execute the variable display of the second special identification information whose visibility is lower than the information (decorative pattern) (the variable display of the second small symbol can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol). And a gaming machine.
With such a configuration, the player can grasp the variable display status of the specific identification information by checking the variable display status of the special identification information.

The gaming machine of means C7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to C6,
A game control section (main board 11) having the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100);
Special decoration (first demo display, second demo display) is executed when the decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) and the decoration identification information variable display (variable display of decoration pattern) are not executed. And a production control unit (production control board 12) having possible special production execution means (production control CPU 120),
In the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A) (FIG. 10-3). As shown, in the first special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0) The variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed based on, and the second start condition is satisfied (the start winning is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). Established (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, is not controlled to both the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol and the second Variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed based on the fact that the number of reserved memories is not 0),
The game control unit (main board 11) does not meet the first start condition (starting winning is not generated in the winning ball apparatus 6A) and the variable display of the first specific identification information is executed. Not corresponding (variable display of the first special symbol is not executed) and the first special command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) and the second start condition are not satisfied (variable winning) The second special command corresponding to the fact that the starting winning prize has not occurred to the ball device 6B) and the variable display of the second specific identification information has not been executed (the variable display of the first special symbol has not been executed). And (the second customer waiting demo display designation command) can be sent,
The effect control unit (effect control board 12) can execute the first special effect by the special effect executing means in response to being in the first game state when the first special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in −38, when the production control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4701), based on the non-KT state (YES in step 026IWS4702), 1 demo display is started (step 026IWS4711), and when the second special command is received, the second special effect can be executed by the special effect executing means according to the second game state (FIG. 9). As shown in −39, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demo display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4801), based on the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4802), the second Start demo display (step 026IWS4811))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the special effect can be started only when the command corresponding to the current game state is received, and the special effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the game state. ..

The gaming machine of means C8 is
A gaming machine of means C7,
While executing the first special effect (first demo display), the start condition corresponding to the first specific identification information (first special symbol) is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first In the special symbol normal processing, the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol are not controlled, and the first reserved memory number is not 0) in response to the first The special effect is ended (as shown in FIG. 9-38, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first demo display is ended (step 026IWS4716)),
While executing the second special effect (second demo display), the start condition corresponding to the second specific identification information (second special symbol) is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, the second In the special symbol normal processing, the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol are not controlled, and the second reserved memory number is not 0) In response to the second The special effect is ended (as shown in FIG. 9-39, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demonstration display is made (step 026IWS4816)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the execution status of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means C9 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C1 to means C8,
In the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A) (FIG. 10-3). As shown, in the first special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0) The variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed based on, and the second start condition is satisfied (the start winning is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). Established (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, is not controlled to both the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol and the second Variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed based on the fact that the number of reserved memories is not 0),
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), when the first start condition can be satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A). It is possible to display, in the first mode, the number of reserved storages corresponding to the establishment of one start condition (when the first number of reserved storages is 4, as shown in FIG. 10A, 4 is displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011. It is possible to display the first reserved display 06TM010 of each piece),
During the execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), the first start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, in the variable display result of the second special symbol Based on the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on), it corresponds to the establishment of the first start condition in response to the establishment of the first start condition (the occurrence of the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6A). The number of reserved storages can be displayed in a second mode having lower visibility than that of the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the first number of reserved storages is 1, the first number of reserved storages is special. "1" can be displayed in the display area 06TM015),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), when the second start condition can be satisfied, the second start condition is satisfied (start win is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). It is possible to display the number of pending storages corresponding to the establishment of the second starting condition in the first mode (when the number of second pending storages is 4, as shown in FIG. 10-1, in the second pending display area 06TM021. It is possible to display four second hold indications 06TM020),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, in the variable display result of the first special symbol When it is controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state based on the above, the second start condition is satisfied in accordance with the establishment of the second start condition (the occurrence of the start prize for the variable winning ball device 6B). The retained storage count can be displayed in the second mode, which has a lower visibility than the first mode (when the second reserved memory count is 0, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the second reserved storage count). "0" can be displayed in the special display area 06TM025)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the number of pending storages can be appropriately notified by displaying the number of pending storages in the second mode, which has lower visibility than the first mode.

The gaming machine of means C10 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C1 to means C9,
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) During variable display of the specific identification information (first During the variable display of the special symbol), different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display result of the other specific identification information (the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit") When controlled to a special state (small hitting game state), a variable display interrupting means (game control microcomputer 100) for interrupting variable display of one specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol),
An end effect (an effect that is executed in response to the reception of a small hit end designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4), when the special state (small hit game state) ends. After closing the special variable winning ball device 17, the character and "30pt" are displayed on the image display device 5.
GET! End effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect of displaying the character "."
The non-special state (first KT state) is shown in the end effect (FIG. 10-12 (B3)) rather than the special state (second KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hitting game state). As described above, after closing the opened special variable winning ball device 17, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display region 06TM031 of the image display device 5 and the four display items displayed in the second reserved display region 06TM021 are displayed. The execution period of the effect of erasing the second hold display 06TM020 is short (as shown in FIG. 10-11(A), in the second KT state, the small hit ending period is 3 seconds, while in FIG. As shown in (B), the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds in the first KT state.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in the non-special state, it is possible to shorten the period for interrupting the variable display of the one specific identification information, corresponding to the variable display status of the one specific effect information and the one specific identification information. Inconsistency with the production can be suppressed.

As a gaming machine, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-0866690 (FIG. 22), a gaming machine that performs a demo display (special effect) according to the execution status of variable display has been proposed. Further, as shown in JP-A-2015-156952 (paragraph 0050), a gaming machine in which the first special symbol (first specific identification information) and the second special symbol (second specific identification information) are variably displayed simultaneously Proposed. Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-0886690 (FIG. 22) is disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-0886690 (FIG. 22) for a game machine capable of concurrently performing variable display of two pieces of specific identification information as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. When the configuration for executing the described special effect is applied, it is necessary to appropriately perform effect control regarding the special effect. The inventions relating to the means A1 to A9 are made in view of the above situation, and appropriately perform effect control related to special effects in a gaming machine capable of concurrently performing variable display of two pieces of specific identification information. Especially.

The game machine of means A1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A) is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, in the second special symbol). Variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) based on that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first number of reserved memories is not 0) The second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition (start prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B) is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process. , The second specific identification information (second is not controlled in neither the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol and the second reserved storage number is 0) Variable display of the special symbol) is performed, and the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. Executable specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100),
Depending on the gaming state (non-KT state, KT state), the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) Decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decoration pattern) corresponding to either one of
Special effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing special effect (first demo display, second demo display) when variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative pattern) is not executed. Prepare,
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), when the first start condition and the second start condition can be satisfied, either of the first start condition and the second start condition. It is possible to end the special effect based on the establishment of one or the other (as shown in FIG. 9-38, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), 1 demo display ends (step 026IWS4716), and as shown in FIG. 9-39, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demo display ends (step 026IWS4816). ),
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), the first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first special symbol normal processing In, in the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol When the small hitting game state is controlled based on the variation display result (YES in step S06TM1000B)), regardless of whether or not one of the first starting condition and the second starting condition is satisfied. It is possible to continue the special effect (as shown in FIG. 9-38, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714), and is controlled in the small hitting game state ( (NO in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display is not ended, and as shown in FIG. 9-39, the variable display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814), and the small hit game state is controlled. (YES in step 026IWS4815), the second demo display does not end)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the situation of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The game machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
The decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) corresponds to the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) when being controlled to the first gaming state (non-KT state). Then, the variable display of the decoration identification information (variable display of the decorative pattern) can be executed, and the variable display of the second specific identification information (of the second special symbol) when being controlled to the second game state (KT state) It is possible to execute variable display of decorative identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) in response to variable display).
When the first game state (non-KT state) is controlled during execution of the special effect (first demo display), the first start condition is satisfied when the first start condition can be satisfied. The special effect is ended in response to the establishment (starting winning to the winning ball device 6A) (as shown in FIG. 9-38, when the starting winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the first special symbol). Display is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), and the first demo display is ended (step 026IWS4716)), while the special effect is continued when the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 9-38). In, when the start winning to the variable winning ball device 6B occurs, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, but the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714), and the jackpot gaming state is set. Since it is not controlled (NO in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display is not finished (step 026IWS4716),
When the second game state (KT state) is controlled during execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition is satisfied when the second start condition can be satisfied. The special effect is ended according to what is done (as shown in FIG. 9-39, when the start winning is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B, the variable display of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814). , The second demo display ends (step 026IWS4816), while the special effect is continued when the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 9-39, a start winning for the winning ball device 6A occurs). Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is started, but the variable display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814), and is controlled to the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4815), the second. The demo display does not end (step 026IWS4816)),
During the execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), the first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, first special symbol normal processing In, in the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, of the first special symbol While being controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variation display result (YES in step S06TM1000B), the special effect is continued regardless of whether the first starting condition is satisfied (see FIG. 9-38). As shown, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714), and because it is controlled to the small hitting game state (NO in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display is not terminated, and As shown in FIG. 9-39, the variable display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814), and the small hitting game state is controlled (YES in step 026IWS4815), so the second demo display is ended. Do not let), continue the special effect regardless of whether or not the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 9-38, when the start winning to the variable winning ball device 6B occurs, the first special symbol No variable display is started (NO in step 026IWS4714), and because the small hitting game state is controlled (NO in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display is not ended, and as shown in FIG. 9-39. , The fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814), because it is controlled to the small hit game state (YES in step 026IWS4815), the second demo display is not ended)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the situation of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The game machine of means A3,
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
It is possible to control in a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, It is controlled to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of 2 special symbols (YES in step S06TM1000A), as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, in the variable display result of the 1st special symbol. It is controlled to the big hit game state based on (YES in step S06TM1000B),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when being controlled to the special state (small hitting game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, When the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000A), the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and as shown in FIG. 10-4, In the 2 special symbol normal process, when the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the variable display of the second special symbol is not started)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the start condition cannot be satisfied while being controlled to the advantageous state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state. In addition, since the start condition cannot be satisfied while being controlled to the special state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state.

The game machine of means A4,
A gaming machine of means A3,
A gaming machine characterized by being able to be controlled to a special state (KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hitting game state).
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming state which is different from the advantageous state as the advantageous game state for the player.

The game machine of means A5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A4,
Regardless of the gaming state, variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) corresponding to the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) visibility is lower than the first special identification information variable display is executed. Possible (variable display of the first small symbol can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol), and decoration identification corresponding to the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) It is possible to execute the variable display of the second special identification information whose visibility is lower than the information (decorative pattern) (the variable display of the second small symbol can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol). And a gaming machine.
With such a configuration, the player can grasp the variable display status of the specific identification information by checking the variable display status of the special identification information.

The game machine of means A6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A5,
A game control section (main board 11) having the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100);
An effect control unit (effect control board 12) including the decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) and the special effect executing means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control unit (main board 11) does not satisfy the first start condition (a start winning for the winning ball apparatus 6A has not occurred) and the variable display of the first specific identification information is executed. Not corresponding (variable display of the first special symbol is not executed) and the first special command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) and the second start condition are not satisfied (variable winning) The second special command corresponding to the fact that the starting winning prize has not occurred to the ball device 6B) and the variable display of the second specific identification information has not been executed (the variable display of the first special symbol has not been executed). (2nd customer waiting demo display designation command) can be sent,
The effect control unit (effect control board 12) can execute the first special effect by the special effect executing means in response to being in the first game state when the first special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in −38, when the production control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4701), based on the non-KT state (YES in step 026IWS4702), 1 demo display is started (step 026IWS4711), and when the second special command is received, the second special effect can be executed by the special effect executing means according to the second game state (FIG. 9). As shown in −39, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demo display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4801), based on the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4802), the second Start demo display (step 026IWS4811))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the special effect can be started only when the command corresponding to the current game state is received, and the special effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the game state. ..

The game machine of means A7 is
A gaming machine of means A6,
When the first special effect (first demo display) is being executed, the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the second special symbol The first special effect is ended (not shown in FIG. 9-38) in response to the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variation display result is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0). As shown, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first demo display is ended (step 026IWS4716)),
When the second special effect (second demo display) is being executed, the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol The second special effect is ended in response to the fact that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result is controlled and the second reserved memory number is not 0) (in FIG. 9-39). As shown, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demo display is displayed (step 026IWS4816)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the execution status of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The game machine of means A8,
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A7,
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), when the first start condition can be satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A). It is possible to display, in the first mode, the number of reserved storages corresponding to the establishment of one start condition (when the first number of reserved storages is 4, as shown in FIG. 10A, 4 is displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011. It is possible to display the first reserved display 06TM010 of each piece),
During the execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), the first start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, in the variable display result of the second special symbol Based on the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on), it corresponds to the establishment of the first start condition in response to the establishment of the first start condition (the occurrence of the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6A). The number of reserved storages can be displayed in a second mode having lower visibility than that of the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the first number of reserved storages is 1, the first number of reserved storages is special. "1" can be displayed in the display area 06TM015),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), when the second start condition can be satisfied, the second start condition is satisfied (start win is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). It is possible to display the number of pending storages corresponding to the establishment of the second starting condition in the first mode (when the number of second pending storages is 4, as shown in FIG. 10-1, in the second pending display area 06TM021. It is possible to display four second hold indications 06TM020),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, in the variable display result of the first special symbol When it is controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state based on the above, the second start condition is satisfied in accordance with the establishment of the second start condition (the occurrence of the start prize for the variable winning ball device 6B). The retained storage count can be displayed in the second mode, which has a lower visibility than the first mode (when the second reserved memory count is 0, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the second reserved storage count). "0" can be displayed in the special display area 06TM025)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the number of pending storages can be appropriately notified by displaying the number of pending storages in the second mode, which has lower visibility than the first mode.

The game machine of means A9,
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A8,
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) During variable display of the specific identification information (first During the variable display of the special symbol), different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display result of the other specific identification information (the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit") When controlled to a special state (small hitting game state), a variable display interrupting means (game control microcomputer 100) for interrupting variable display of one specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol),
An end effect (an effect that is executed in response to the reception of a small hit end designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4), when the special state (small hit game state) ends. After closing the special variable winning ball device 17, the character and "30pt" are displayed on the image display device 5.
GET! End effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect of displaying the character "."
The non-special state (first KT state) is shown in the end effect (FIG. 10-12 (B3)) rather than the special state (second KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hitting game state). As described above, after closing the opened special variable winning ball device 17, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display region 06TM031 of the image display device 5 and the four display items displayed in the second reserved display region 06TM021 are displayed. The execution period of the effect of erasing the second hold display 06TM020 is short (as shown in FIG. 10-11(A), in the second KT state, the small hit ending period is 3 seconds, while in FIG. As shown in (B), the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds in the first KT state.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in the non-special state, it is possible to shorten the period for interrupting the variable display of the one specific identification information, corresponding to the variable display status of the one specific effect information and the one specific identification information. Inconsistency with the production can be suppressed.

As a gaming machine, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-0866690 (FIG. 22), a gaming machine that performs a demo display (special effect) according to the execution status of variable display has been proposed. Further, as shown in JP-A-2015-156952 (paragraph 0050), a gaming machine in which the first special symbol (first specific identification information) and the second special symbol (second specific identification information) are variably displayed simultaneously Proposed. Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-0886690 (FIG. 22) is disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-0886690 (FIG. 22) for a game machine capable of concurrently performing variable display of two pieces of specific identification information as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. When the configuration for executing the described special effect is applied, it is necessary to appropriately perform effect control regarding the special effect. The inventions relating to the means B1 to B9 are made in view of the above situation, and appropriately perform effect control regarding special effects in a gaming machine capable of concurrently performing variable display of two pieces of specific identification information. Especially.

The game machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A) is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, in the second special symbol). Variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) based on that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first number of reserved memories is not 0) The second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition (start prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B) is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process. , The second specific identification information (second is not controlled in neither the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol and the second reserved storage number is 0) Variable display of the special symbol) is performed, and the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. Executable specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100),
Depending on the gaming state (non-KT state, KT state), the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) Decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decoration pattern) corresponding to either one of
Special effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing special effect (first demo display, second demo display) when variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative pattern) is not executed. Prepare,
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied regardless of whether the first start condition and the second start condition can be satisfied. The special effect is terminated based on the fact that either one of the two starting conditions is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-21, a starting winning is generated for the winning ball apparatus 6A, and the first reserved memory number is 1). Then (NO in step S06TM1400), the first demo display is terminated, and as shown in FIG. 10-22, when the winning prize for starting the variable winning ball device 6B occurs and the second reserved memory count becomes 1 (step S06TM1500). NO), end the second demo display)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control according to the establishment status of the start condition of the specific identification information.

The game machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) corresponds to the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) when being controlled to the first gaming state (non-KT state). Then, the variable display of the decoration identification information (variable display of the decorative pattern) can be executed, and the variable display of the second specific identification information (of the second special symbol) when being controlled to the second game state (KT state) It is possible to execute variable display of decorative identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) in response to variable display).
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), the first start condition or the second start condition can be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, first special symbol normal processing In the big hit game state or the small hit game state is not controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the first reserved memory number is not 0, or, as shown in FIG. In the special symbol normal processing, the big hit game state or the small hit game state is not controlled based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, and the second reserved memory number is not 0), when the first starting condition The special effect is ended according to the establishment (starting winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs) (as shown in FIG. 10-21, when the starting winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the variation of the first special symbol). The display is started (YES in 026IWS4714), the first demo display is ended), and the special effect is ended in response to the establishment of the second start condition (as shown in FIG. When the start winning a prize occurs, the variable display of the second special symbol is started (YES in 026IWS4814), and the second demo display is ended),
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), the first start condition or the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, first special symbol normal processing In, the second special symbol is controlled in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, or, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol is the big hit game state or small. When the winning game state is controlled), the special effect is ended in response to the establishment of the first starting condition (as shown in FIG. 10-21, a start winning is generated in the winning ball device 6A). Also, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714), but the first number of reserved memories is 1 (NO in step S06TM1400), and the first demo display is ended), and the second start condition is set. The special effect is ended according to the establishment (as shown in FIG. 10-22, even if the start winning is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B, the variable display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814). ), the number of second reserved memories becomes 1 (NO in step S06TM1500), and the second demo display is ended)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control according to the establishment status of the start condition of the specific identification information.

The game machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1 or means B2,
It is possible to control in a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, It is controlled to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of 2 special symbols (YES in step S06TM1000A), as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, in the variable display result of the 1st special symbol. It is controlled to the big hit game state based on (YES in step S06TM1000B),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when being controlled to the special state (small hitting game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, When the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000A), the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and as shown in FIG. 10-4, In the 2 special symbol normal process, when the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the variable display of the second special symbol is not started)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the start condition cannot be satisfied while being controlled to the advantageous state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state. In addition, since the start condition cannot be satisfied while being controlled to the special state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state.

The game machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine of means B3,
A gaming machine characterized by being able to be controlled to a special state (KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hitting game state).
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming state which is different from the advantageous state as the advantageous game state for the player.

The game machine of means B5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B4,
Regardless of the gaming state, variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) corresponding to the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) visibility is lower than the first special identification information variable display is executed. Possible (variable display of the first small symbol can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol), and decoration identification corresponding to the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) It is possible to execute the variable display of the second special identification information whose visibility is lower than the information (decorative pattern) (the variable display of the second small symbol can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol). And a gaming machine.
With such a configuration, the player can grasp the variable display status of the specific identification information by checking the variable display status of the special identification information.

The game machine of means B6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B5,
A game control section (main board 11) having the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100);
An effect control unit (effect control board 12) including the decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) and the special effect executing means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control unit (main board 11) does not satisfy the first start condition (a start winning for the winning ball apparatus 6A has not occurred) and the variable display of the first specific identification information is executed. Not corresponding (variable display of the first special symbol is not executed) and the first special command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) and the second start condition are not satisfied (variable winning) The second special command corresponding to the fact that the starting winning prize has not occurred to the ball device 6B) and the variable display of the second specific identification information has not been executed (the variable display of the first special symbol has not been executed). (2nd customer waiting demo display designation command) can be sent,
The effect control unit (effect control board 12) can execute the first special effect by the special effect executing means in response to being in the first game state when the first special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in −38, when the production control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4701), based on the non-KT state (YES in step 026IWS4702), 1 demo display is started (step 026IWS4711), and when the second special command is received, the second special effect can be executed by the special effect executing means according to the second game state (FIG. 9). As shown in −39, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demo display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4801), based on the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4802), the second Start demo display (step 026IWS4811))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the special effect can be started only when the command corresponding to the current game state is received, and the special effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the game state. ..

The game machine of means B7 is
A gaming machine of means B6,
When the first special effect (first demo display) is being executed, the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the second special symbol The first special effect is ended (not shown in FIG. 9-38) in response to the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variation display result is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0). As shown, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first demo display is ended (step 026IWS4716)),
When the second special effect (second demo display) is being executed, the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol The second special effect is ended in response to the fact that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result is controlled and the second reserved memory number is not 0) (in FIG. 9-39). As shown, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demo display is displayed (step 026IWS4816)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the execution status of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The game machine of means B8 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B7,
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), when the first start condition can be satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A). It is possible to display, in the first mode, the number of reserved storages corresponding to the establishment of one start condition (when the first number of reserved storages is 4, as shown in FIG. 10A, 4 is displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011. It is possible to display the first reserved display 06TM010 of each piece),
During the execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), the first start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, in the variable display result of the second special symbol Based on the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on), it corresponds to the establishment of the first start condition in response to the establishment of the first start condition (the occurrence of the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6A). The number of reserved storages can be displayed in a second mode having lower visibility than that of the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the first number of reserved storages is 1, the first number of reserved storages is special. "1" can be displayed in the display area 06TM015),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), when the second start condition can be satisfied, the second start condition is satisfied (start win is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). It is possible to display the number of pending storages corresponding to the establishment of the second starting condition in the first mode (when the number of second pending storages is 4, as shown in FIG. 10-1, in the second pending display area 06TM021. It is possible to display four second hold indications 06TM020),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, in the variable display result of the first special symbol When it is controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state based on the above, the second start condition is satisfied in accordance with the establishment of the second start condition (the occurrence of the start prize for the variable winning ball device 6B). The retained storage count can be displayed in the second mode, which has a lower visibility than the first mode (when the second reserved memory count is 0, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the second reserved storage count). "0" can be displayed in the special display area 06TM025)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the number of pending storages can be appropriately notified by displaying the number of pending storages in the second mode, which has lower visibility than the first mode.

The game machine of means B9 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B8,
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) During variable display of the specific identification information (first During the variable display of the special symbol), different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display result of the other specific identification information (the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit") When controlled to a special state (small hitting game state), a variable display interrupting means (game control microcomputer 100) for interrupting variable display of one specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol),
An end effect (an effect that is executed in response to the reception of a small hit end designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4), when the special state (small hit game state) ends. After closing the special variable winning ball device 17, the character and "30pt" are displayed on the image display device 5.
GET! End effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect of displaying the character "."
The non-special state (first KT state) is shown in the end effect (FIG. 10-12 (B3)) rather than the special state (second KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hitting game state). As described above, after closing the opened special variable winning ball device 17, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display region 06TM031 of the image display device 5 and the four display items displayed in the second reserved display region 06TM021 are displayed. The execution period of the effect of erasing the second hold display 06TM020 is short (as shown in FIG. 10-11(A), in the second KT state, the small hit ending period is 3 seconds, while in FIG. As shown in (B), the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds in the first KT state.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in the non-special state, it is possible to shorten the period for interrupting the variable display of the one specific identification information, corresponding to the variable display status of the one specific effect information and the one specific identification information. Inconsistency with the production can be suppressed.

As a gaming machine, as shown in JP-A-2016-187523 (FIG. 73), when power failure occurs and the power is restored, power is restored based on the image control unit receiving a power restoration designation command. There has been proposed a game machine that performs a power recovery effect to notify that. In the gaming machine shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-187523 (FIG. 73), when the power is restored, it is necessary to give an appropriate notification in accordance with the variable display status of the specific identification information when the power is cut off. is there. The invention according to means D1 to means D10 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately notifies according to a variable display status of specific identification information when an electric power interruption occurs. It is in.

The game machine of means D1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel with specific identification information variable display means ( Game control means (main board 11) having a game control microcomputer 100),
Depending on the gaming state (non-KT state, KT state), the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) Effect control means (effect control board 12) having decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative pattern) corresponding to either one of Prepare,
The game control means (main board 11), the first information (variable display of the first special symbol) first information (first customer waiting demo display designation command, display corresponding to the first special symbol) regarding the variable display of the first specific identification information Result designation command, variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol), and second information (variable display of the second special symbol) second display (variable display of the second special symbol) (second customer waiting demonstration display designation command, second) Display result designation command corresponding to the special symbol, variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol), and game state information related to the game state (low probability/non-KT background designation command, low probability/first KT background designation command, high accuracy) /First KT background designating command, high accuracy/second KT background designating command) can be transmitted to the production control means (production control board 12),
The production control means (production control board 12) can execute the restoration notification in different modes according to the first information, the second information, and the game state information when the power is restored. There is (as shown in “Situation 2” in FIG. 10-15, the game state is low/non-KT state based on the reception of the low-probability/non-KT background designation command and the second customer waiting demo display designation command. (Normal state), it is possible to specify that the variable display of the first special symbol that is the main symbol is being executed, and that the variable display of the second special symbol that is the sub symbol is not being executed. The word "Power off recovery is in progress" is displayed on the entire screen of the display device 5, and as shown in "Situation 4" in FIG. 10-15, the low accuracy/non-KT background designation command and the first customer waiting demo display designation command. Based on the fact that the game state is low probability/non-KT state (normal state), the variable display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol is not executed, and the second special symbol which is the sub symbol Since it is possible to specify that the variable display of is being executed, the word "restoring" is displayed in the display range (upper right part of the screen) of the second small symbol that is a sub symbol, and the other parts are Design for design (decorative design and first small design) and background image (sunny image) are displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, in the gaming machine capable of executing the variable display of the first specific identification information and the second specific identification information in parallel, it is possible to perform an appropriate notification regarding the recovery from the power failure.

The game machine of means D2 is
A gaming machine of means D1,
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol) Corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to ), variable display of the special identification information whose visibility is lower than the decoration identification information (variable display of the first small symbol, variable display of the second small symbol) can be executed. A gaming machine characterized by being.
With such a configuration, the player can confirm the variable display status of the specific identification information by confirming the variable display status of the special identification information.

The game machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine of means D1 or means D2,
When the production control means (production control CPU 120) recovers from power interruption,
The first information (first customer waiting demo display designation command, display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol) and the second information (second customer waiting demo display designation Command, display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol, variable pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol), variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative pattern) (For example, variable display of the first special symbol) Information (first customer waiting demonstration display designation command, display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol) is received. When there is not, execute the restoration notification of the first mode (the restoration screen shown in FIG. 10-16(B), in which the characters “Recovery from power failure” is displayed on the entire screen),
Of the first information and the second information, information (variable display of the second special symbol) regarding variable display of specific identification information that does not correspond to variable display of decoration identification information (second customer waiting demonstration display designation command, When the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol, the variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol) is not received, the recovery notification of the second mode (shown in FIG. 10-16(A), the sub symbol) In the display range (upper right part of the screen) of the second small design corresponding to, the character "restoring" is displayed, and in the other parts, each production design (decorative design and first small design) and background image (clear image) ) Is displayed), and then information regarding variable display of specific identification information that does not correspond to variable display of decoration identification information (second customer waiting demonstration display designation command, display result corresponding to second special symbol) When the designated command, the variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol) is received, the recovery notification of the second mode is finished (each production symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background. Only the image (clear image) is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the restoration process is notified in an appropriate manner according to the variable display status of the specific identification information corresponding to the decoration identification information and the variable display status of the specific identification information not corresponding to the decoration identification information. Is possible.

The game machine of means D4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D3,
The first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, in the second special symbol). Variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) based on that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first number of reserved memories is not 0) (Variation display)
The second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied (the start prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B) (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the second special symbol). Variable of the second specific identification information (the second special symbol) based on the fact that it is not controlled in any of the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variation display result, and the second reserved memory number is not 0) Display (variable display),
It is possible to control in a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, It is controlled to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of 2 special symbols (YES in step S06TM1000A), as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, in the variable display result of the 1st special symbol. It is controlled to the big hit game state based on (YES in step S06TM1000B),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when being controlled to the special state (small hitting game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, When the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000A), the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and as shown in FIG. 10-4, In the 2 special symbol normal process, when the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the variable display of the second special symbol is not started)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the start condition cannot be satisfied while being controlled to the advantageous state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state. In addition, since the start condition cannot be satisfied while being controlled to the special state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state.

The game machine of means D5 is
A gaming machine of means D4,
A gaming machine characterized by being able to be controlled to a special state (KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hitting game state).
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming state which is different from the advantageous state as the advantageous game state for the player.

The game machine of means D6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D5,
Regardless of the gaming state, variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) corresponding to the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) visibility is lower than the first special identification information variable display is executed. Possible (variable display of the first small symbol can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol), and decoration identification corresponding to the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) It is possible to execute the variable display of the second special identification information whose visibility is lower than the information (decorative pattern) (the variable display of the second small symbol can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol). And a gaming machine.
With such a configuration, the player can grasp the variable display status of the specific identification information by checking the variable display status of the special identification information.

The game machine of means D7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D6,
A game control section (main board 11) having the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100);
Special decoration (first demo display, second demo display) is executed when the decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) and the decoration identification information variable display (variable display of decoration pattern) are not executed. And a production control unit (production control board 12) having possible special production execution means (production control CPU 120),
In the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A) (FIG. 10-3). As shown, in the first special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0) The variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed based on, and the second start condition is satisfied (the start winning is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). Established (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, is not controlled to both the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol and the second Variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed based on the fact that the number of reserved memories is not 0),
The game control unit (main board 11) does not satisfy the first start condition (a start winning for the winning ball apparatus 6A has not occurred) and the variable display of the first specific identification information is executed. Not corresponding (variable display of the first special symbol is not executed) and the first special command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) and the second start condition are not satisfied (variable winning) The second special command corresponding to the fact that the starting winning prize has not occurred to the ball device 6B) and the variable display of the second specific identification information has not been executed (the variable display of the first special symbol has not been executed). (2nd customer waiting demo display designation command) can be sent,
The effect control unit (effect control board 12) can execute the first special effect by the special effect executing means in response to being in the first game state when the first special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in −38, when the production control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4701), based on the non-KT state (YES in step 026IWS4702), 1 demo display is started (step 026IWS4711), and when the second special command is received, the second special effect can be executed by the special effect executing means according to the second game state (FIG. 9). As shown in −39, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demo display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4801), based on the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4802), the second Start demo display (step 026IWS4811))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the special effect can be started only when the command corresponding to the current game state is received, and the special effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the game state. ..

The game machine of means D8 is
A gaming machine of means D7,
When the first special effect (first demo display) is being executed, the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the second special symbol The first special effect is ended (not shown in FIG. 9-38) in response to the fact that neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state based on the variation display result is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0). As shown, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first demo display is ended (step 026IWS4716)),
When the second special effect (second demo display) is being executed, the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol The second special effect is ended in response to the fact that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result is controlled and the second reserved memory number is not 0) (in FIG. 9-39). As shown, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demo display is displayed (step 026IWS4816)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the execution status of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The game machine of means D9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D8,
In the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A) (FIG. 10-3). As shown, in the first special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0) The variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed based on, and the second start condition is satisfied (the start winning is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). Established (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, is not controlled to both the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol and the second Variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed based on the fact that the number of reserved memories is not 0),
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), when the first start condition can be satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A). It is possible to display, in the first mode, the number of reserved storages corresponding to the establishment of one start condition (when the first number of reserved storages is 4, as shown in FIG. 10A, 4 is displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011. It is possible to display the first reserved display 06TM010 of each piece),
During the execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), the first start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, in the variable display result of the second special symbol Based on the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on), it corresponds to the establishment of the first start condition in response to the establishment of the first start condition (the occurrence of the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6A). The number of reserved storages can be displayed in a second mode having lower visibility than that of the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the first number of reserved storages is 1, the first number of reserved storages is special. "1" can be displayed in the display area 06TM015),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), when the second start condition can be satisfied, the second start condition is satisfied (start win is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). It is possible to display the number of pending storages corresponding to the establishment of the second starting condition in the first mode (when the number of second pending storages is 4, as shown in FIG. 10-1, in the second pending display area 06TM021. It is possible to display four second hold indications 06TM020),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, in the variable display result of the first special symbol When it is controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state based on the above, the second start condition is satisfied in accordance with the establishment of the second start condition (the occurrence of the start prize for the variable winning ball device 6B). The retained storage count can be displayed in the second mode, which has a lower visibility than the first mode (when the second reserved memory count is 0, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the second reserved storage count). "0" can be displayed in the special display area 06TM025)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the number of pending storages can be appropriately notified by displaying the number of pending storages in the second mode, which has lower visibility than the first mode.

The game machine of means D10 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D9,
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) During variable display of the specific identification information (first During the variable display of the special symbol), different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display result of the other specific identification information (the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit") When controlled to a special state (small hitting game state), a variable display interrupting means (game control microcomputer 100) for interrupting variable display of one specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol),
An end effect (an effect that is executed in response to the reception of a small hit end designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4), when the special state (small hit game state) ends. After closing the special variable winning ball device 17, the character and "30pt" are displayed on the image display device 5.
GET! End effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect of displaying the character "."
The non-special state (first KT state) is shown in the end effect (FIG. 10-12 (B3)) rather than the special state (second KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hitting game state). As described above, after closing the opened special variable winning ball device 17, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display region 06TM031 of the image display device 5 and the four display items displayed in the second reserved display region 06TM021 are displayed. The execution period of the effect of erasing the second hold display 06TM020 is short (as shown in FIG. 10-11(A), in the second KT state, the small hit ending period is 3 seconds, while in FIG. As shown in (B), the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds in the first KT state.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in the non-special state, it is possible to shorten the period for interrupting the variable display of the one specific identification information, corresponding to the variable display status of the one specific effect information and the one specific identification information. Inconsistency with the production can be suppressed.

As a gaming machine, a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information can be executed, and the variable means is provided so that a game medium moving on a specific route of the movement route can be entered and a game on the specific route is played. Some are configured to be able to execute a specific notification for promoting the ejection of the medium. For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148127 (paragraph 0044) describes that when a big hit or a small hit occurs, a second game state display unit that lights up and notifies that it is right-handed is provided. ing. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148127 (paragraph 0044), there is no distinction between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The specific notification is being executed. Therefore, it is not always possible to provide appropriate notification regarding promotion of the launch of the game medium. Therefore, an object of the invention according to means E1 to E7 is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying the promotion of the ejection of the game medium.

(Means E1) A game machine according to the present invention is a game machine capable of playing a game, and a game medium (for example, a game ball) has entered a first starting area (for example, a first starting winning opening). Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) can be executed based on the second identification based on that the game medium has entered the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). Information (for example, the second special symbol) Variable display execution means capable of executing variable display (for example, the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100, steps S110A to S113A and the second special symbol) (Processing part (step S25B) that corresponds to steps S110A to S113A), a first state in which the game medium can enter (for example, an open state), and a second state in which the game medium is difficult or inaccessible After the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 17) that can be changed to the state (for example, the closed state) and the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, State control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to either an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) or a special state having a lower degree of advantage than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) The first special symbol process process (step S25A) in steps S115A to S121A of 100 and the second special symbol process process (step S25B) corresponding to steps S115A to S121A of the process) and the special state are controlled. Variable means control means for controlling the variable means to the first state when it is (for example, steps S119A to S121A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) and the second special symbol process process (step S25A in the game control microcomputer 100) S25B) and a portion for executing the processing corresponding to steps S119A to S121A), and the first starting area moves on a predetermined path (for example, the area on the left of the game area) of the moving path on which the game medium can move. The game medium is provided so that it can enter, and the variable means is provided so that the game medium that moves on a specific path (for example, the right side area of the game area) of the moving path can enter and that the game medium is launched to the specific path. Specific notification executing means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a specific notification (for example, right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 9-48 (1) and (2)) for promoting The part that executes steps 026IWS2012A, S2021B, and S2027B. For example, the portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 026IWS624 and S634. ), the specific notification execution means does not execute the specific notification when the first identification information is variably displayed and then controlled to a special state (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 returns Y in step 026IWS2024A). In the case of step 026IWS2027B, the same processing as step 026IWS2027B is not executed.For example, when the effect control CPU 120 is Y in step 026IWS629, it does not execute the same processing as step 026IWS624 (see FIG. 9-48(3)). To do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

(Means E2) In the means E1, information relating to the variable display of the first identification information is stored as first storage means (for example, a first storage buffer) that can store the information as variable storage, and information relating to the variable display of the second identification information. And a second holding storage means (for example, a second holding storage buffer) capable of storing as the holding storage, and the state control means displays the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. When a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state), and the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information. When a special display result (for example, a small hit pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hit game state), and a display result of the variable display of the second identification information. Can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state) with an increased frequency of being a special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute steps 026IWS2208A, S2213A, SS14A, S2219A, S2220A, S2208B, S2213B, SS14B). , S2219B, S2220B), and the variable display execution means, when performing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel, displays the display result of one variable display. Based on the special display result being derived and displayed, as a display result of the other variable display, a specific display result and a predetermined display result different from the special display result (for example, a deviating pattern) are derived and displayed (for example, for production control). When the CPU 120 receives the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command, in step 026IWS9703, the control for causing the deviation symbol to be confirmed and displayed may be performed). With such a configuration, the variable display can be forcibly ended, and the pending storage can be smoothly consumed.

(Means E3) In the means E1 or the means E2, a predetermined value can be added when controlled to a special state (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on winning of a game ball into a special winning opening). , Value adding means capable of giving a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled in an advantageous state (for example, paying out 15 prize balls based on winning of a game ball to a special winning opening) (for example, payout control) Specific notification executing means, the specific notification executing means includes a first specific notification (for example, the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 9-48 (1) and (2)). Lighting) and a second specific notification having higher visibility than the first specific notification (for example, the right-handed display 026IW007 shown in (1) of FIG. 9-48) can be executed and controlled to the advantageous state. When performing, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 026IWS2021A, S2022A, S2021B, S2022B, and the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 026IWS624, S634. 9-48(1).) When the variable display of the second identification information is executed and the special state is controlled, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (for example, , The game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 026IWS2027B and S2028B, and the effect control CPU 120 executes step 026IWS634 (see FIG. 9-48(2)). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize notification corresponding to the value that can be added.

(Means E4) In any one of the means E1 to E3, the state control means can control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C) and execute variable display of the first identification information. When the special state is controlled after being displayed, the special state of the type having a low advantage due to a high ratio is higher than that when the variable display of the second identification information is performed and then the special state is controlled (for example, small The winning notification A) is performed, and the specific notification execution means executes the specific notification when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and the special state is controlled ((2), (3) in FIG. 9-48). ) Reference). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the advantage of the player.

(Means E5) In any one of the means E1 to E4, a variable display effect executing means capable of executing a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information ( For example, the effect control CPU 120 includes a portion for executing steps S171 to S173), and the variable display effect execution means executes the variable display effect in a common mode when the special state is controlled and when the special state is not controlled. It is possible (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 026IWS920 to S922, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the non-reach miss symbol is forcibly displayed as a stop. ) May be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the recognizability to the player of being controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed.

(Means E6) In any one of the means E1 to E5, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific path (for example, a regulation provided in the variable winning ball device 6B). It may be configured to include a piece). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent aiming at the timing at which the control to the special state is performed after the variable display of the second identification information is normally performed.

(Means E7) In any one of the means E1 to means E6, the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) for controlling the progress of the game and the game control means Equipped with effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that controls effect based on information, and the game control means controls execution of notification by notification means (for example, right-handed indicator 26) for performing predetermined notification. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 026IWS2021A, S2021B, S2027B), the effect control means includes a specific notification execution means, and the specific notification execution means specifies in response to the notification by the notification means. The notification (for example, turning on the LED 37 for right-handed notification) may be configured to be performed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 026IWS634 when Y in step 026IWS633). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control unit.

Further, modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions relating to gaming machines of means C11 to means 22 described below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, there are a big hit with a long ending period and a short big hit in which an ending effect of a big hit is executed, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-7165. There was a time choice. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the advantageous big hits occur consecutively, the ending period is shortened, the interval between the big hit and the next big hit is shortened, and the speed at which the prize ball is obtained is increased. Due to this, there is a possibility that the gambling property becomes too high, and in view of this point, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

The game machine of means C11 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The end effect selecting unit that selects a longer period in the first advantageous state as a finish effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate than in the second advantageous state ( For example, a game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 11-10, FIG. 11-11),
End time effect executing means capable of executing end time effects (for example, ending effect) during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, FIGS. 11-23 to 11-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 11-19, step in FIG. 11-20, step in FIG. 11-21. S784: The period in which the selection can be accepted may be the first half of the end effect period or the second half of the jackpot round, specifically, the 13R start command is received in the 16R jackpot. It may be a period from when the completion command of 16R is received to when the completion command of 16R is received.).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

The game machine of means C12 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a probability variation state, a time saving state, a high base state) different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Normal state (for example, normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit), and a second disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds of big hits, a normal big hit),
A case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than a case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called big hit big hit) (For example, in the case of a big hit of so-called consecutive chan), an end time effect selecting unit (for example, an end effect selecting unit that selects a long period at a high rate as an end effect time period at the end of the advantageous state (for example, ending effect time)). The game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 11-10, and FIG. 11-11),
End time effect executing means capable of executing end time effects (for example, ending effect) during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, FIGS. 11-23 to 11-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Reception means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting may be used. Step S752A in FIG. 11-19, step in FIG. 11-20, step in FIG. 11-21. S784.) is further provided.

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

The game machine of means C13 is
First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information (for example, second special symbol) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information Variable display can be executed and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probability change state, a time saving state). , A high-base state) controllable gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 11-4) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second suspended storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first suspended storage information. End effect selecting means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 11-10, FIG. 11- 11) and
End time effect executing means capable of executing end time effects (for example, ending effect) during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, FIGS. 11-23 to 11-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Reception means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting may be used. Step S752A in FIG. 11-19, step in FIG. 11-20, step in FIG. 11-21. S784.) is further provided.

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

The game machine of means C14 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C11 to means C13,
An operation detecting means for detecting an operation by the player (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, step 069FS158 of FIG. 11-23) is further provided,
The end-time effect execution means executes any of a plurality of types of end-time effects in an effect mode that requires the motion detection means to detect an operation during the execution period (for example, effect pattern). All of A to effect pattern E are effect modes that accept the operation of the player).
According to such a configuration, since there is an intervention element by the player, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of extension.

The game machine of means C15 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C11 to means C13,
An operation detecting means for detecting an operation by the player (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, step 069FS158 of FIG. 11-23) is further provided,
The end time effect executing means executes the end time effect in one of an effect mode that requires detection of a motion by the motion detecting means and an effect mode that does not require detection during the execution period (for example, effect pattern A ~ Any one of the effect patterns E may be an effect mode in which the operation of the player is not accepted).
According to such a configuration, since there is an intervention element by the player, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of extension.

The game machine of means C16 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C11 to means C15,
A plurality of types of end effects are selected by the end effect reception means a predetermined number of times (for example, once or a plurality of times) until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a so-called continuous channel). (While still ending), it includes an end-time production in which selection cannot be accepted (for example, production pattern B is not selectable during continuous chanting when all songs are released). ..
With such a configuration, a variety of effects can be created, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

The game machine of means C17 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C11 to means C15,
For a plurality of types of end effects, when the effect result is a specific result (for example, success), the selection is not accepted until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until so-called consecutive chan ends). It includes an end effect that is disabled (for example, when the setting suggestion is executed, the effect pattern C is not selectable during continuous chanting).
With such a configuration, a variety of effects can be created, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

The game machine of means C18 is
A gaming machine of means C16 or means C17,
The plurality of types of end-time effects include end-time effects that allow new selections instead of end-time effects that make it impossible to accept selections (for example, effect pattern E is effect pattern B or When the effect pattern C is not selectable, it is made selectable).
With such a configuration, a variety of effects can be created, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

The gaming machine of means C19 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C11 to means C18,
It is possible to accept the selection of a plurality of types of end effects, based on the fact that a release condition (for example, a condition that another effect pattern cannot be selected, a condition that a continuous change has been completed) is satisfied. Includes end effects. It should be noted that before or during the selection period in which the selection of the end effect can be accepted is started or during the selection period, the player performs a special operation (for example, a back button operation or command input, specifically, a cross). The release condition may be established according to the operation of the keys in a predetermined order, the continuous push of the push button, the input of the password, etc.).
With such a configuration, a variety of effects can be created, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

The game machine of means C20 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C11 to means C19,
Further comprising setting means (for example, refer to FIG. 12-1 to FIG. 14-3) capable of setting any of the setting values of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player,
The plurality of types of end-time effects include effects that suggest the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-26(H), the effect pattern C suggests a set value). It is a production).
With such a configuration, a variety of effects can be created, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

The game machine of means C21 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C11 to means C20,
The plurality of types of end effects include end effects having different lengths (for example, effect patterns A to effect patterns E have different lengths),
After the execution of the end production is completed, the next variable is changed so that the period from the execution of the end production by the end production execution means to the start of the next variable display is the same. The period adjustment effect is executed until the display is started (for example, the ending effect period is a time longer than the effect patterns A to E, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the extra time).
According to such a configuration, there is no need to adjust the period from the start of execution of the ending effect to the start of the next variable display, and the game control can be easily executed.

The game machine of means C22 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C11 to means C21,
The ending production period includes at least a first period and a second period after the first period has elapsed,
In the first period, a related effect (for example, introduction effect, explanation effect, effect mode selection effect) related to the effect executed in the second period is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27, ending. An effect pattern selection period for selecting an effect pattern to be executed thereafter may be provided during the effect time).
With such a configuration, a variety of effects can be created, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of a first special symbol process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (1)-(3) is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of setting suggestion production, (4) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the production mode of setting suggestion production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power-on. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power-on. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power-on. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a notification when the setting change flag is set at the time of power activation. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power-on. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power failure occurs before the setting value is determined, and (2) is a control when a power failure occurs after the setting value is determined. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for each set value. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for each set value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning a prize ball device and a special variable winning a prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning a prize ball device and a special variable winning a prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning a prize ball device and a special variable winning a prize ball device in a KT state. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st gate passage waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st small hit end processing. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd gate passage waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd small hit end processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining how to transition the gaming state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an external output signal. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2. It is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric auditors product pre-opening process. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows demonstration display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows demonstration display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of a set value suggestive effect determination table. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of setting value suggestive production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the right-handed notification. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the decoration design and the small design which correspond to the game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game flow at the time of being controlled by each game state. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the start winning is achieved during the first demo display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each production|presentation at the time of winning a start prize during 1st demonstration display. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st small hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd small hit end processing. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when controlled to the small hitting gaming state during the high accuracy/second KT state, and (B) is a small hit during the low accuracy/first KT state. It is the time chart which shows the execution timing of each production when it is controlled to game state. (A1)-(A5) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of each effect when controlled to the small hitting game state during the high-accuracy/second KT state, and (B1)-(B4) are low-probability. / It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of each effect when controlled to the small hitting game state during the first KT state. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative pattern is a big hit, (B) is a second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative pattern is a big hit It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production at this time. (A1) ~ (A4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of each effect when the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative pattern is a big hit, (B1) ~ (B4) does not correspond to the decorative pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of each effect when the second special symbol is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the transmission command according to the situation at the time of power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a power recovery timing and a power recovery state. 7 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each display control when the power is cut off and the power is restored in the low probability/non-KT state. 7 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each display control when the power is cut off and the power is restored in the low probability/non-KT state. 7 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each display control when the power is cut off in the high-accuracy/second KT state and the power is restored. 7 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each display control when the power is cut off in the high-accuracy/second KT state and the power is restored. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of demonstration display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of demonstration display control processing. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the start winning is achieved during the first demo display. It is an explanatory view showing a production mode of each production when a start winning is made during the first demo display. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a special figure display result etc. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a figure which shows a fanfare time table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during big hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening post-process. It is a figure which shows an ending time table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of fanfare production execution processing. It is a timing chart showing an example of fanfare production. It is a screen transition diagram showing a flow of fanfare production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during a round. It is the flowchart which shows ending production selection 1st processing and 2nd processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of post-round processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing after the end of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ending production execution processing. It is a screen transition diagram showing a flow of selecting the type of ending effect. It is a timing chart showing an example of an ending effect. It is a screen transition diagram showing a flow of ending production. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the ending production in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value change processing in the characteristic part 10F. 7 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process in the characteristic unit 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the game stop start processing in characteristic part 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the game stop end processing in characteristic part 10F. It is the figure which illustrates the production control command in feature section 40F. It is the flowchart which shows the production control main processing in the feature section 40F. It is a flow chart which shows sub side game stop processing in characteristic part 40F.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The change includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variation.

The special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed indicator 26 is provided for urging a right-handed operation of performing a firing operation aiming at the right side of the game area. There is. The right-handed indicator 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). The special figure game and the variable display of the decorative design which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a display area for displaying a suspension display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. Area 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handing notification LED 37 for urging a right-handing operation is provided. It should be noted that the right-handing notification LED 37 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays that are suspended is also referred to as the suspended storage number. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first reserved memory number is displayed by, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning port is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

In addition, a row 19 of nails is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that a game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. Has been done. Thus, the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering is provided, so that the game ball is operated to shoot toward the left side of the game area (so-called left hitting). The game ball can be won in the first start winning port only when the operation is performed.

In this example, the row of nails 19 is provided, so that the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the player performs a left-handed operation. I can't stop. For example, the game ball may be configured to be able to win in the first starting prize hole only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the first starting prize hole on the left side of the game area, or the first starting prize. The mouth may be provided on the left side of the game area, and the row of nails 19 may also be provided to allow the game ball to enter the first starting winning opening only when a left hit operation is performed.

A pass gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a special winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction to move the bottom surface. The game ball is changed to an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can be won at a special winning opening located below the member and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot be won. Special variable winning ball device 7, in the jackpot gaming state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the bottom member is moved forward. From the closed state, which is moved forward toward the bottom, the bottom member is moved backward, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening, which is the winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning hole for a small hit, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction. By moving the ball back and forth, a special winning opening or a second starting winning opening located below the bottom member allows the game ball to win a prize (also referred to as an open state) and the game ball cannot win a prize. Say). The special variable winning ball device 17, in the small hitting game state that occurs when the predetermined display result (small hitting pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the bottom member, From the closed state in which the forward movement is performed forward, the bottom member is moved backward in the backward direction, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening, which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B, when the normal symbol display 20 hits and displays the symbol, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front, The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so that the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is moved from the upper left to the lower right, and drops onto the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed such that the bottom members are slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 does not win the special winning ball device 6B. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning port is in the open state, the gaming ball dropped to the second starting winning port is a special variable winning ball. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning hole is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided to the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning opening, the gaming ball wins the special winning opening. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and drops to the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of restriction pieces for reducing the flow-down speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In the present example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with the restriction pieces, so that the game flows downward from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-rear direction component, and the time required for the flow is delayed compared with the case without the restriction piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is the special variable winning ball device. Since the game balls are configured to flow toward 17, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side in this sense. Can be said.

Inside the special winning opening, there is provided a switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the special winning opening. You will be at a disadvantage.

Inside the special winning opening, a switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting the game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than when the gaming ball wins the big winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) other prize holes such as the first start prize hole 1 and the second start prize hole. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the special winning opening. You will be at a disadvantage.

In addition, inside the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball that has won in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole). Is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in the big hit game or in the KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area (so-called right hitting operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, the winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays the normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of ordinary figure games that are pending to be executed, by the number of LEDs that have been lit.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the variable display of the normal symbol is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even if the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, since the big hit game state is entered based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the pass gate 41, the pass gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper and left positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect frame LED 9 is provided in the periphery of the game area. ..

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so that it can be supplied to a ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and can be tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B which allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a shooting operation (so-called left hitting operation) aiming at the left side of the game area. When the player makes a left-hand hitting operation by rotating the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player, and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol display The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state to be described later (starting winning occurs, In the case where the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol varies depending on the jackpot type described later) as a fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "big hit". .. Further, if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and the small hit symbol may be configured as a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of a lapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and a timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

The type of big hit is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, probability variation state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) are prepared. The jackpot type is set according to these. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

After the big hit game state ends, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a certain variation state, a KT state, or a high base state.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), the probability variation control is performed so that the probability that the display result is a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which it is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to improving the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, the KT control that is more likely to make a small hit than in the normal state is executed. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hitting game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hitting game state, but it is in an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special map change time (the period during which the special map changes) is shortened compared to the normal state (time saving state) is executed, and "Public hit" is given in the normal figure game. By increasing the probability of becoming higher than in the normal state and the like, the control (high opening control, high base control) in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening is also executed. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

The probability change state, the KT state, and the high base state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. To do. The condition that the end condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (variable number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a probability variation state, a KT state, a high base state, etc., and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability of becoming the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset, when the predetermined recovery process is not executed after the power is turned on) It is in a state of being.

When the big hit game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right hitting operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player makes a right-hand hitting operation by rotating the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player and the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The general-university game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol loss symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol defect". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, "big hit", If a predetermined special symbol different from the big hit symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, the "small hit" symbol is given. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" will occur.

After the display result in the second special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed).

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or in place of the display, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the point of the frame LED 9 is used. It may be performed by turning on/off the light, moving the movable body 32, or the like.

In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the image display device 5, as the effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the first special figure game. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative pattern which is not stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination described later. Is an aspect in which is continuing.

Further, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" and the like) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" which is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-determination variation pattern (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probabilistic variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is "small hit", the fixed decorative pattern (for example, "" which is a predetermined small hit combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of a part of big hit type (big hit type of big hit game state similar to small hit game state) and when "small hit" A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be displayed as a stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the variable display is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit medium effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting medium production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state high accuracy state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch (first counting switch 23 and second counting switch 24). )) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 by taking in a detection signal (a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on due to a game ball passing or entering). The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 for the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the special winning opening door. The information is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the special winning opening solenoid 83.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), a game status (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening of big winning opening, winning of prize, number of reserved memories, game status), command for designating error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The production control CPU 120 displays the execution of production based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further outputs a sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image, and turns on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37. Therefore, the sound control signal (a signal that specifies a sound to be output) is voice-controlled. The LED signal is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal designating an ON/OFF state of the LED) is supplied to the LED control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and in a mode specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-hand strike notification LED 37 are turned on/off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and turning on/off of the LED.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on/off the LED (supply of a sound designation signal or LED signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal) and an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, for example. And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the LED control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that power recovery has been performed or that power recovery is in progress. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After completing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, and the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). The CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the first special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and controlling the game state. (See below for details). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). The CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the second special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and controlling the game state. It In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the execution and suspension management of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold indicator 25C is turned on to display the number of held ordinary figure symbols.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt processing, a test terminal is a processing for outputting a test signal for making it possible to confirm the control status of the gaming machine outside the gaming machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that the period is a right-handed operation. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not perform the control of outputting the right hitting test signal during the small hitting game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process processing. In the first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning a prize determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning to the first starting prize hole, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start winning to the first starting winning opening occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information in the first holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. To be done. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the first hold storage number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the winning a prize set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S121A in accordance with the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the first special symbol process process (steps S110A to S121A), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In the first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether to start the first special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for display result determination, whether the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" In this case, the jackpot type is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set in correspondence with the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process of step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In this first variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It includes a process for determining which one. In the first fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the first fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether there is reach, etc.), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". In this first special symbol variation process, a process for setting for varying the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to vary is measured. It includes processing to do. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation process ends. To do.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A), the first While the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, it may be a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol and be controlled to a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is the second small hit). Pre-opening process-determines whether or not the value corresponding to the second small hit end processing), if the small hit game is during, the value of the first special symbol process flag corresponds to the first special symbol variation process Do not change from the value, and if it is not in the small hit game, it is possible to update the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Control to do so. Not only such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol is interrupted (of the timer The update may be interrupted).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the gaming state. For example, in a normal state, if configured to suspend the variable display of the first special symbol, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the swing of the decorative pattern and the like, which results in a feeling of strangeness to the player. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable that the small hit ending period be shorter than that in the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hitting ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, while the small hitting ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, since the game ball is practically difficult to win in the small hit control and no special effect is produced, the small hit ending period is shorter than that in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and an effect for emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be made longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, while the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pre-processing period, the length of the period may be changed depending on the game state, like the small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". In this first special symbol stop processing, to stop the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, to stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol It includes the process of setting. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "9". If the display result is "miss", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state is updated when the probability variation state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is satisfied. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The first gate passage waiting process of step S114A is executed when the value of the fourth special process flag is "4". In the first gate passage waiting process, control for waiting passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is performed. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The first jackpot opening preprocessing in step S115A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "5". In this first jackpot opening pre-processing, processing for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the jackpot opening state based on that the display result is "jackpot", etc. It is included. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, in accordance with which the big hit type is, the upper limit opening period for opening the special winning opening and the upper limit number of times of round execution are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the first jackpot opening preprocessing is completed.

The first big hit opening process of step S116A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "6". This first big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the special winning opening, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. , And processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "7". Then, the process during the opening of the first big hit ends.

The first jackpot opening post-processing of step S117A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "7". The first big hit post-opening process is a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the special winning opening is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and a big hit when the upper limit number of executions has been reached. It includes processing for making settings for ending the gaming state. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “6”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the first special feature process flag is updated. The value of the figure process flag is updated to "8". When the value of the first special figure process flag is updated, the first jackpot opening post-process is ended.

The first jackpot ending process of step S118A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "8". This first big hit ending process corresponds to the process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or the end of the big hit game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting the probability variation control, the KT control, and the high base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first jackpot ending process ends.

The first small hit opening pre-processing of step S119A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "9". The first small hitting opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the special winning opening to be opened in the small hitting game state based on the display result of "small hitting". .. At this time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the first small hit opening pretreatment is ended.

The process for opening the first small hit in step S120A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "10". The process for measuring the elapsed time after opening the special winning opening and the timing for returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the like are included in the first small hit opening process. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state to reach the end timing of the small hitting game state, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "11", and the first small hitting opening process is ended.

The first small hitting end process of step S121A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "11". The first small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first small hitting end processing ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be described. In addition, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process shifts to the second special symbol variation process to change the second special symbol. While being displayed, it may be a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol and may be controlled to a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is the first small hit). Pre-opening process to determine whether the value is equivalent to the first small hit end process), if the small hit game is during, the value of the second special figure process flag corresponds to the second special symbol variation process Do not change from the value, and if it is not a small hit game, it is possible to update the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Control to do so. Incidentally, not only such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted (of the timer The update may be interrupted).

Incidentally, with regard to the small hit control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period or the small hit ending period may be varied depending on the game state.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register setting etc. of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 may be stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an operation of displaying an effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, an operation of outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a decorative light-emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and driving of the movable body 32. Controls for operating various effect devices such as actions are performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the production operation using various production devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed in accordance with the production control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes prefetching advance notice setting processing (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various types The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voices or sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the sound control board 13, and sending commands (lighting signals) to the LED control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what is done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect display processing during variable display ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving the command designating to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command designating to end the small winning game state from the main board 11, for example. The value is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit medium effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid production processing, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the production contents in the big hit gaming state, and executes various production controls in the big hit gaming state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

Also, the game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, a hardware resource on the side of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like may be directly used. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

[Explanation on Characteristic Part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic part 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, a production control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 8-1. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, on the main board 11, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. Various parts are connected, and various effect devices such as the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame LED 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 8-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 8-3, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in the board case 21TM201, and the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advanced. Various circuits for controlling are installed. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 or the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11, the first special symbol and the second special symbol by performing lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) that configures the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by turning on/off/coloring the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 displays various winning information regarding winning. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed over by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to the detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting a game ball, for example. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 transmitting to 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 8-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a display monitor 21TM029 is provided at the center of the main substrate 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 8-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the rear surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is provided with respective winning openings (big winning openings, second starting winning openings, first starting winning openings, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter referred to as "entry area". (Also referred to as) the total number of game balls entering the game ball, and various prize information such as continuous ratio and winning combination ratio is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these prize information are displayed. By doing so, various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios after installation at the game hall can be confirmed. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming balls enter the general winning opening (pass the test) at a predetermined frequency. Further, when performing the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening as often as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment was made after the installation in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and set values such as a winning probability (ball-out rate) of a big hit, which will be described later, are changed on the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 that functions as a setting switch for power supply and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. A clerk at the game hall operates the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the main board 11, the performance control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, and the like are predetermined. Operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Executed. By disposing the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Therefore, only a store clerk who possesses a predetermined key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only a clerk of the game shop who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can operate it. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but the switching operation can be executed and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) is executed. It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if the force is not applied by the clerk or the like in the game arcade. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to recover the key, so that the store clerk or the like in the game arcade leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. You can prevent it from happening.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-3, in the lower portion of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for discharging the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (exhaust port) is provided, and an outlet switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a game ball that has been launched) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the frame LED 9 and the decoration. It includes an LED control command used to control the lighting operation and the like of the application LED.

FIG. 8-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 8-2, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I/O port, and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Further, the I/O port may be incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the out-of-ball switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and then output to the main board 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, on the payout control board 21TM037, as shown in FIG. 8-2, a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and the front surface of the gaming board 2 can be opened and closed. A gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 including a door frame opening sensor that detects opening of the glass door frame 3a that is covered with is connected, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby the payout control microcomputer The 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball burnout switch 21TM187 indicates the ball burnout state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launching device. Output full signal. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). Which is a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting a full signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting/outputting (transmitting/receiving) a signal through serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. For confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted/received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (the prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the award ball request signal from the game controlling microcomputer 100, sends a signal (reception ACK signal) to that effect to the game controlling microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are transmitted at the timing of transmitting/receiving the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with. For example, when a prize is generated, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of a prize ball request signal, and the prize having the setting is made. A ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the prize ball payout operation ends, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and sets the received ACK signal to the game. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as lending a ball, full tank, running out of ball, etc.) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is made. The received ACK signal thus made is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives, through the output port 21TM372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lent balls on a terminal board (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board). (Including and) output to 21TM160. Although the driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, it is omitted in FIG. 8-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on/off is output to the award ball LED 21TM053 and the ball out LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 8-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending possible LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given according to the operation of the player. .. In addition, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lendability display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( The PRDY signal) is transmitted/received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 8-2.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected state/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit controlling microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point in time, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give the player a predetermined number of lent balls. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is changed. .. The set value is made up of 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value becomes smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage becomes gradually lower.

8A to 8F are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 8-4(A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of variable display. If the set value is "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", there is a lower probability (1/300) to win the jackpot. ing. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. There is a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases to win the jackpot. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The chances of winning the jackpot are higher than the case of "2" (1/280). Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8D, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4(E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4(F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of “2”, “3”, “4”, and “5”. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 8-4(A) to (F). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the jackpot win is determined with a probability according to the set value. In addition, "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-4(A) to (F) indicates a probability (ratio) of being a big hit. In addition, determining whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control in a big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 8A to 8F. It is provided separately, and the determination of the big hit is performed by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Good.

In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of six setting values 1 to 6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The settable values that can be set to 2 may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit game state ends, according to the specified setting value. FIGS. 8-5(1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestive effects. 8-5(1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the big hit ending screen, and in FIG. 8-5(2), the ending screen in the "cloudy" form is selected on the big hit ending screen. For example, FIG. 8-5(3) shows an example in which the ending image in the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. FIG. 8-5(4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestive effect based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot gaming state is over, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command for executing an ending production in the image display device 5 to the production control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the aspect of the ending effect based on the stored setting value by storing the setting value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot gaming state is finished, the image display device 5 is stored together with a character (character of “BONUS end”) informing that the jackpot gaming state is ended. It is possible to display an ending image in a mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 8-5(4), the setting values designated by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , When setting the mode of the setting suggestive effect to the "clear" mode shown in FIG. 8-5(1), when determining to the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 8-5(2), and in FIG. In the case of determining the “rain” mode shown in 5(3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests a "fine" mode setting shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It was decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and it was decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate of 40% (for example, 40%). When the setting value designated by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 has a low rate (for example, 20%) of the “clear” mode shown in (1). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), and the medium degree. It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate (for example, 30%). When the setting value designated by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high rate (for example, 50%) of the "clear" mode shown in (1). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%), and the medium degree. It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate (for example, 30%).

In this way, by varying the determination rate of each mode of the setting suggestion effect depending on the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is performed. The interest of the production can be improved. In this example, the player is interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state is finished is executed, and particularly, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect to be done.

(Process at power-on)
Next, the power-on process will be described.
8-6 to 8-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the CPU 103 of the game controlling microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). In this process, a parity check is performed as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, 0-5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the set values stored in the set value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are normal values, and six-stage set values with different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 8-4 described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 8-4 described above. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 8-4 described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 8-4 described above, and the setting value 4 in this example is described above. 8-4 and so on, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 and shown in FIG. 8-4.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine maker (before being installed in the gaming hall), the value with the lowest jackpot probability among the above-mentioned regular values is set in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a normal value. If the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting change flag is set when the mode is changed to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580) and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM4720).

If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not the RAM clear (initialization of the game state) is determined to be executed, and when the value is 1, the RAM clear is determined to be executed. It has been done. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the process related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area in which the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and the value of the RAM clear flag at power restoration is 0 (initial value is not set). The notification that the gaming state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, Upon recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects to the game control microcomputer 100 a detection signal indicating that the game machine frame 3 is open, and the glass door frame 3a is open. When the detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 determines By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to step S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 8-7. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change ( If NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the setting value is changed and/or Or, it becomes possible to confirm. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), which one of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is set? Without being controlled by the mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later.

In the present embodiment, in order to bring the setting value into a state in which the setting value is not permitted to be changed (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required: the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are both satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070, the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value (setting confirmation). Mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the fact that (3) it is determined that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As described below, it is possible to shift to a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode) on condition that the setting has been performed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. Even if the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated means that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is abnormal or some illegal operation. There is a possibility that the means is about to confirm or change the set value. In such a state, it is inappropriate to permit the confirmation or change of the set value, so in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the confirmation mode. Also, the control is not performed in any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, in step S21TM4060, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), the mode is not controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760 described later is performed. Move on to (send setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 determines that , And proceeds to step S21TM4120. In addition, in the setting change flag check (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Will be controlled by the mode. Further, in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. If the setting change mode was controlled when the power was cut off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 8-7 is executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a In the closed state, in step S21TM4130, when the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), in the step S21TM4140, when the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state In (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing in step S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode. The indicated set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

Upon receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, a message "Setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, in the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily turns off the power (turns off the power switch 21TM055) and then shifts to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). The user is informed that an operation for changing the set value is performed (the set value is confirmed). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after turning off the power" is displayed. It should be noted that similar notification may be given by voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repeating steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, the CPU 103 performs a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4200) and then displays the character “E” on the display monitor 21TM029. Despite that there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (all of which are determined to be YES in step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the setting change mode has not been entered." Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information of a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit or a calling lamp device provided corresponding to the gaming machine). To be done.

During the loop processing period, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display included in the display monitor 21TM029. A weight of 4 ms is provided to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. The security signal is continuously output during the loop processing. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0-5 It is possible to specify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not established and the setting change mode has not been entered)).

The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 will be continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and the power is cut off during the setting change ( That is, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when YES is determined in step S21TM4030), in any of the cases, the game should not be played in this state, Before shifting to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to set the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state in order to bring the setting value into a changeable state (setting change mode). (3) Three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, it is possible to change the set value ( It is possible to switch to the setting change mode).

If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value in the set value storage area can be set to a regular value. Without, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) described above.

Once the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the game player cannot shift to the normal game process. Therefore, a game hall clerk or the like must turn off the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then turn it on again. It won't. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the power is temporarily turned off so that all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied at the next power-on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the set value in the set value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 presets the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

In the present embodiment, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) although the setting value change is not permitted. , (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), two conditions are required.

However, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even if the two conditions that are (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even if the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stopped state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8. In the processing of FIG. 8-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (one of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). When a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores the regular value in the set value storage area as "0", which has the lowest jackpot probability. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 performs a power-off process after performing a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power-off process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power failure or the like is input. Immediately before the power supply stops operating due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. That is, in the power-off process, the check data is stored in the predetermined backup area.

Thereby, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (when the repeated processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620, or the repeated processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is performed). When the disconnection occurs, the data check is appropriately executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display a value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area. The clerk at the amusement hall normally recognizes the range of the set values as 1 to 6, so if the value stored in the set value storage area is directly displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk at the amusement hall will actually There is a risk that the setting value of will be erroneously recognized. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area+1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode is controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. Based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, when the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 changes the set value. A setting change flag indicating that there is a possibility of being present is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off. For this reason, if the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting change flag is 1 (set state) at the next power-on.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that the setting change mode is controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4680. When the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and then proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Every time the clerk at the game arcade operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off last time) is 3 If there is, the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated in the order of 3→4→5→0→1→2→3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the display monitor 21TM029 responds. The displayed information is updated in the order of 4→5→6→1→2→3→4.

Here, it is possible to display the current set value (step S21TM4550), output the security signal (step S21TM4560), and send the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650), but send the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Remains 0).

In addition, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550) and output the security signal (step S21TM4560), and to send the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and update the setting value (step S21TM4620). This state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined that the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting change mode command, it can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and set the setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage at power off. The setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, CPU 103 confirms whether lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processes of step S21TM4540 and subsequent steps are repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

If the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). Since the predetermined time is set as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the process shifts to the normal game process thereafter. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode is ended or the setting confirmation mode is ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 8-9(1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation are confirmed. Corresponding to the end of control of any of the modes, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (determines which mode is controlled. It is executed as a common process (without (without). Further, the processing for setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is also performed regardless of whether the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (determine which mode is controlled. It is executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and the output end control between the setting change mode control and the setting confirmation mode control. The control load can be reduced.

Also, output of the security signal is started in response to the start of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is output in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the common value (1000 ms) is set for the security signal when the setting change mode is controlled and the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The timer is set. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case of being controlled to the setting change mode and the case of being controlled to the setting change mode, which mode is set on the external device side. It becomes difficult to know whether it was controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-9(2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is temporarily sent in step S21TM4710. After setting 1000 ms as the value of the timer, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later, in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM, reset (overwrite) 30000 ms as the value of the security signal timer. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control described above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode ends. 1 sec has passed, and when the setting change mode has been controlled, 30 sec has passed from the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM clear is not performed and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt permission is given. In the process (for example, the information output process), the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (when the RAM is cleared, When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30000 ms to 0 ms. The security signal will continue to be output until. In addition, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt process. ) To 0 ms, the security signal may be continuously output, and the game control timer interruption process may be performed after the security signal is output.

As described above, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control in the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control in the setting change mode is finished, and the control is changed to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse after the control of the setting change mode is completed. With such a configuration, the output period of the security signal can be made different between when the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the setting change mode is controlled, while the output control of the security signal is made common.

As a result, in the external device, it is possible to know whether the initialization processing is executed and the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or the initialization processing is executed and the setting change mode is controlled. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial state can be specified. It is possible to presume that the conversion processing has been executed and the setting change mode may have been controlled.

The security signal is output even when the game stop target error such as the magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the game machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets the abnormality detection flag in the backup area of the RAM 102 (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) based on the abnormality detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the abnormality detection flag being set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed, and therefore the value of the abnormality detection flag remains set without being initialized in the signal output process. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to prevent the output period of the security signal from being limited to the period from the end of the control in the setting confirmation mode until 1 second has elapsed. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear will be executed, and the error detection flag will be cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power failure occurs). At some time, it is unclear whether or not an abnormality has been detected.) As a result, the security signal output period is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds elapse (depending on the execution of RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 8-7, the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second. The value of the security signal timer set to 1 may be at least a period during which the external device can recognize that the security signal is output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, the common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the processing of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM4720). Here, when the power is cut off after that because the setting change flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any one of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are not controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed and the setting command is transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes the range of setting values as 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is directly displayed as an image on the CPU 120 side for effect control. If it is displayed on the display device 5, the player may erroneously understand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, a value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command is recognized as the setting value (1 to 6), and the setting value 1 to 6 is set. The effect that suggests the set value is executed in the range.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area to the setting command to perform the effect control. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of the setting value designated by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the CPU 120 side for effect control, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed on the image display device 5 as it is, or an effect that suggests the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it becomes unnecessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing on the set value designated by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value designated by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit game state ends, according to the specified setting value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM4010). It is determined to be YES in S21TM4020, the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4040). ), it is sufficient to execute the processing at the time of power interruption recovery without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after the interrupt permission, the game control timer interrupt process (special (Including pattern process processing). That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, the CPU 103 determines that the RAM clear flag is 0, Without executing the clear, the backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power-off recovery, and the normal game process is started.

In the production control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), recovery from power interruption was performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed. Be recognized). When the production control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 has been restored from the power failure based on the data when the power supply was stopped. It is possible to notify that (RAM clear has not been performed).

On the other hand, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute the processing at the time of turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes the process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer and the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal at power-on. , After permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process) may be performed.

As shown in FIG. 8-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear processing based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is set. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, winning combination, and base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated for each set value. The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is.

The reason why the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clearing process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a normal value is set in the setting value storage area when the power is turned on. If it has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) the setting change mode is controlled, whether the value in the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or the setting change mode is in progress. This is because the normal value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 to the pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table to the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a normal symbol per determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag such as a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The initial value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the setting value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the production control CPU 120, the initialization processing is performed based on the reception of the initialization command (the RAM is cleared without recovery from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize (have been broken). When the production control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 has initialized the game state and the like (data when power supply is stopped). Based on the above, it is possible to notify that the RAM clear has been performed without recovery from power failure.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. become. When the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Value), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in this step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, a security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt permission (information output process), After that, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, the connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103, for example, executes a process in accordance with a random number circuit setting program to make settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is taken periodically at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 2 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number updating process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. It is set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the process shifts to the normal game process capable of executing the game control timer interrupt process. In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when not a big hit or a random number for determining whether to reach when not a big hit, for display The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value is the initial value of the count value of the counter (normal symbol per determination random number generation counter) for generating the random number for determining whether or not to win the normal symbol. It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game display device, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In the process of, or the process of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the random number per ordinary symbol is one round (ordinary random number per symbol is determined) If the number of steps between the minimum and maximum possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to that counter.

In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the power-off recovery process, but the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4770. When it is determined to be 0 (YES), both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in a closed state (depending on the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. ), and the process at the time of recovery from power failure may be performed.

Further, in this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process proceeds to the process at power-on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (the gaming machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process when the power is turned on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

As described above, the clerk or the like in the game hall puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state and the like. Can be prevented from being initialized (NO in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 to set the RAM clear flag to 1). In this way, the clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state or the like. There is.

As mentioned above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting value was unstable because it was controlled in the setting change mode when the power was cut off. There is a possibility that the set value that the game hall is trying to confirm is not stored in the set value storage area. In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 determines that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), and does not shift to the normal game processing, and the game is stopped (step). S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 are controllable, and a security signal is output in response to control to the game stopped state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, the game is prevented from being started (the game control timer interrupt process is executed) in the state where the set value is unstable, and the power is supplied when the power is turned on. It is possible to notify the external device that it was in the setting change mode when the disconnection occurred.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 sets the condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030) ( When all of the steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are YES), the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) and the display monitor is displayed in the game stopped state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the letter "E" is displayed on 21TM029 (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10, each 7-segment display 21TM029A to 21TM029D forming the display monitor 21TM029 displays the letter “E”, thereby causing an abnormality in the clerk at the amusement hall (in the setting change mode. There is a possibility that the power supply may have been cut off while it was under control). In addition, the production control CPU 120, which has received the setting value error command, causes the image display device 5 to display a message “Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after the power is turned off”. After turning off the power (turning off the power switch 21TM055), the store clerk, etc., shifts to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on), and changes the set value. Perform a notification prompting to perform (confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is It is in the opened state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If it is determined to be YES), the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side (“power is turned off and then turned on again”). Please switch to the setting change mode”) will not be performed.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has been controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052. ), it is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, a message “in the setting change mode” or a message “Please perform the setting change operation to change the set value” can be displayed on the image display device 5. With this, the clerk at the amusement arcade can understand that the setting change mode is controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area By changing the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing the set value to the preset set value, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among (i) to (iii) above. If any of the conditions is not satisfied, the setting change mode is not controlled, and the game is stopped (the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) after the setting value error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190). .. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side (“power is turned on again after power is turned off”). Please change to the setting change mode").

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side (“power is turned on again after power is turned off”). Please change to the setting change mode") is also performed, but as a state of the gaming machine, even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the condition for changing to the setting change mode after the power is restored is It will be notified that it is not established. In this case, the clerk at the game hall understands that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stopped state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is once turned off, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the transition conditions (i) to (iii) to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error is displayed (step S21TM4210: “E” is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) on the main board 11 side. This automatically shifts to the setting change mode without prompting the user to avoid unnecessary error display and promptly change the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied at the time of power restoration (b), it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode at the time of power restoration even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stopped state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on display monitor 21TM029). Will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state where the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for transitioning to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i ) To (iii) are not satisfied, different commands may be transmitted as commands indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal, and the setting change mode is entered (or the transition condition is established). The CPU 120 for effect control which has transmitted this command and has received this command displays the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "It is automatically controlled in the setting change mode" It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, when the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to transmit the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended and the process is shifted to the normal game process, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. In response to the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 has switched from the OFF state to the ON state, the lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) In response to the operation of 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

Then, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is controlled in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and/or the setting change switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and notify that effect, even though it is not present. For example, on the basis of the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification for displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." is executed. As a result, the clerk at the amusement hall clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value is performed even though the operation is not controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and illegal It is possible to check whether or not

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process moves to the normal game process, and The lock switch operation command and the setting change switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modification of power-on process)
In the example shown in FIG. 8-6, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it is confirmed that the RAM clear flag is set, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode is changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 8-11, when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the setting change mode may be entered (NO in step S21TM4570) without checking whether or not the condition is satisfied.

In the process shown in FIG. 8-11, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the setting value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change flag is set. If YES (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The process is controlled (NO in step S21TM4570) and is not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), which is different from the process shown in FIG. 8-6. Other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8.

Even in such a case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the setting change flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-11, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. Based on the fact that there are three conditions, that is, (iii) the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON, the setting change mode is controlled (NO in step S21TM4570). However, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) are set. Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

As described above, when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are based on the setting change flag being set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is satisfied, it is possible to improve workability for fixing the set value.

Here, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is performed even if the condition (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled in the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state. (Step S21TM4610 to step S21TM4620 in FIG. 8-7).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode, the store clerk who has performed the operation of changing the set value once turns the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

As described above, the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode is set depending on whether the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) and the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). While making different, the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the condition for ending the control of the setting change mode, It is arranged to appropriately shift to the normal game processing.

Here, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030) and the setting change mode is controlled, a notification prompting the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned on may be given. good. For example, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits the setting value error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). The CPU 120 for effect control, which has received the setting value error command (step S21TM4110), says, "Please turn on the lock switch once and then turn it off after changing the setting value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processing shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8 and 8-11, it is impossible to shift to the normal game processing when the setting change flag is set. Therefore, when the gaming machine maker sets the setting change flag in advance before shipping the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the gaming hall), the gaming machine side then goes through the setting change mode. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be performed. Accordingly, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and to take a measure to fix the set value.

(Set value storage control when power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when the power is cut off during the change of the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 8-7, in the setting change mode, the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated to change the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area.

First, regarding the control in the case where the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by changing the setting value in the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described using -12(1).

As shown in the order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. In this example, when the power is turned on, “0” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, with the start of the setting change mode, the set value “0” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read set value is set to 1 "1", which is obtained by adding, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “0” based on the first operation of the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed to "1", and "2" obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state. Further, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “1” based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed to “2”, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the power is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the setting value storage area is in a state in which the setting value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored. In the power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on), and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value “2” is the value stored in the set value storage area when the power supply was cut off in the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1 "3", which is obtained by adding "," is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Since the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on in the order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 8-11 is applied, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically controlled. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be in the OFF state.

In this way, when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off (without terminating the setting change mode), the power is restored when the power is restored. The set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the preset setting value may have already been set, and in this case, the clerk at the amusement arcade terminates the setting change mode without performing the operation to change the setting value again. Since it is only necessary to shift the game machine to the normal game processing, workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control in the case where a power-off occurs after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode) by changing the setting value in the setting change mode, This will be described with reference to FIG.

The order 1 to the order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is determined as the final set value. At this time, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the confirmed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that an operation for turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value “2” is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1 "3", which is obtained by adding "," is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled to the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control of the setting change mode is finished. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is cut off, , Valid setting values (setting values stored in the setting storage area when power is restored).

It is not limited to the storage control of the set values shown in FIGS. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area when the setting change mode is controlled, and the setting change switch (clear switch) is set when the setting change mode is controlled. When the 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area and the setting change mode is ended (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area (overwritten) to confirm the setting value based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state). May be. In this case, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 becomes a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting information temporary storage area The set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes in response to the change of the set value stored in.

With such a configuration, even if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is changed. When the power is cut off without completing the operation for ending the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is set to the power supply. It has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stopped state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the previous power-on. It becomes a value according to the set value.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when the power is cut off while the setting change mode is being controlled. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

For the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and for a gaming machine having a different jackpot probability depending on the setting values. Although applicable, the present invention is not limited to this, and although a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the setting values (for example, for all of the setting values 0 to 5). It is also applicable to a gaming machine (the jackpot probability is 1/300).

Further, the present invention disclosed in the following is disclosed in the characteristic part 21TM.

As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the side of the external device when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. is there. The invention relating to means O1 to means O4 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying a control state related to setting to the outside of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 with different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
Setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650),
Specific signal output means for outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the game control microcomputer 100 which outputs the security signal in step S21TM4560), ,
And a setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting a value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (value of the security signal timer) relating to a period during which the specific signal is output,
The setting means can set a predetermined value that is common in the case of being controlled to the setting change mode and the case of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal at least until a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in the setting confirmation mode). The security signal is continuously output until 1 second has passed from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have passed from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode. Do)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
A gaming machine of means O1,
Equipped with initialization means for initializing the game state (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes the game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting change mode),
After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode until the period corresponding to the specific value elapses (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode. The security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by
According to this, the specific signal is output at least during the period corresponding to the predetermined value regardless of whether the control in the setting change mode ends or the control in the setting confirmation mode ends. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the setting process by the setting unit is made common and different outputs are set in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set the period.

The game machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing a specific operation (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680) for ending the setting change mode In the backup area of the RAM 102, which stores the specific information (setting changing flag), the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting changing mode, and the setting changing mode ends. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 is provided,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode not being satisfied). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means O1 to means O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process),
And a production control unit (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029),
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
In the setting change mode, power is not supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means that stores specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on step S21TM4720, the game control microcomputer 100 which clears the setting change flag),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case, it is possible to execute an error notification on the display means and also to send an error command to the effect control means (a setting value abnormality error command is sent at step S21TM4190, and a display monitor is displayed at the error display at step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on 21TM029),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the user of an operation for changing the set value (the image display device 5 is set to “return power on after power off to enter setting change mode”). Please move." message is displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the clerk of the game hall of the state of the gaming machine and to prompt the operation for changing the set value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The inventions relating to the means P1 to means P4 are made in view of the above situation, and a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. To provide.

The game machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 with different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
Setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) which clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case), an error notification means capable of executing error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied) is further provided. ..
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The game machine of means P2 is
A gaming machine of the means P1,
The setting change mode control means is such that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting It is possible to control the setting change mode based on the changeover switch) 21TM052 being in the ON state),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case, it is possible to control to the setting change mode without executing the error notification on the basis of the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied (at the time of power-on, in step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, step S21TM4140). Based on the determination of YES, shift to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220).
It is characterized by
According to this, when the condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided and the set value is appropriately set. Can prompt change.

The game machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case, it is possible to carry out the error notification and put the game in a stopped state (when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is turned on (one of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140). (If NO in step S21), the process proceeds to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 without transitioning to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in the state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The game machine of means P4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means P1 to means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process),
And a production control unit (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029),
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
The specific information storage means,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification on the display means and to send an error command to the effect control means (a setting value abnormality error command is sent at step S21TM4190, and is displayed in the error display at step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the user of an operation for changing the set value (the image display device 5 is set to “return power on after power off to enter setting change mode”). Please move." message is displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the clerk of the game hall of the state of the gaming machine and to prompt the operation for changing the set value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention according to means Q1 to means Q5 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. To do.

The gaming machine of means Q1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 with different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
Setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) which clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
The setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the power is restored, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030). When it is determined that it has been set), the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch is set. (Setting switch) Automatically controls the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that the 21TM052 is ON is satisfied.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode involving the initialization of the gaming state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined.
It should be noted that the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state corresponding to the control of the setting change mode (for example, RAM based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150). The game control microcomputer 100 for executing clear (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
A gaming machine of means Q1,
The setting change mode control means is based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Yes, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). If the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied. Control to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied. (Automatically controls the setting change mode)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting information is stored in the setting change mode even when the setting change condition is not satisfied, when the power is restored. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means, when the power supply to the game machine is started, the transition operation (when the setting change flag is not set at power-on (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 Is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. Is executed), the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied), and the setting change mode can be controlled based on It is possible to end the setting change mode based on a specific operation (confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680),
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when controlled to the setting change mode (sets a setting change flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. Based on the above, the specific information is erased when the setting change mode ends (the setting change flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends),
The setting change mode control means, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the shift operation is performed, When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the condition for changing to the setting change mode is satisfied, The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is ended based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is ended based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Let)
It is characterized by
According to this, the condition for ending the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The game machine of means Q4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to Q3,
A setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the setting value) for storing the setting value (six stages of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process),
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means ends the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (in step S21TM4680, it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off). End the setting change mode based on
The set value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed when the setting change mode is controlled. The set value after the setting is continuously stored (the set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the set value storage area is stored. The set value stored in will be changed, so the set value after being changed by the change operation is retained even if the power is cut off in the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponding to the set value is stored. Since control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to Q3,
A setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the setting value) for storing the setting value (six stages of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process),
The setting change mode control means stores the change operation under the control of the setting change mode and the setting value storage area when the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode. Change only the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the existing set value), and change the set value stored in the set value storage means based on the specific operation after the changing operation. The setting change mode is terminated (the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode. To confirm it as a valid setting value and exit the setting change mode)
The set value storage means performs the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value before being stored is stored (even when the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, unless the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area itself is stored. Is not changed, so if the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled in the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 026IW)
Next, the characteristic unit 026IW will be described. First, the game state in the characteristic unit 026IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the present characteristic unit 026IW has a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this feature section 026IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state). In the case of being controlled, in the case of being controlled to the low probability and the first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and in the case of being controlled to the high probability and the first KT state (high probability/first KT state). In some cases, it is controlled to a high probability and the second KT state (high probability/second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is easily opened, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long and the small hit. Even if occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball is won in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 changes). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a high base state so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a long time. As will be described later, the second KT state in the KT state has a short opening time of the upstream side variable winning ball device 6B, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is placed in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

Also, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in the characteristic unit 026IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state at the time of a normal drawing is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while the proportion determined as a small hit when the first special symbol changes is low, the proportion determined as a small hit becomes high when the second special symbol changes (however, it will be described later. (Except for the case of forced disengagement), the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by changing the second special symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that the configuration for setting the KT state in the gaming state in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state is the same as that in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the variation time of the selected variation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the KT state has a higher ratio of the number of variations to a certain time than the normal state, and the KT state is in the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

In addition, the feature portion 026IW is configured such that the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the group of nails forming the downflow path of the game ball. As will be described later in detail, in the present feature unit 026IW, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to be in the open state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. In the first KT state described later, the game ball passes. The time from the passage of the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41. Since it is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, when one gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. The game balls can be won as they are in the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
9-1 and 9-2 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Among these, FIG. 9-1 has shown the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of a 1st special symbol is performed. In addition, FIG. 9-2 shows a big hit probability and a small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in six stages of setting values “1” to “6”. It is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, and for example, the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps or the setting can be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, with reference to FIG. 9-1, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, in the non-probable variation state (low probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “247/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-1(B), in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times larger than that in the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the highest jackpot probability “2470/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, as for small hits, as shown in FIGS. The small hit probability is constant as “6298/65536” regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability change state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is also common to the non-probability variation state and the probability variation state. Even when the big hit probability is made different according to the set value, while the small hit probability is made constant, as shown in FIGS. By making the setting values "1" to "6" different, the number of determination values for each setting value may be matched.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9-2, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 9-2(A), in the non-probable variation state (low probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “247/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-2(B), in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times larger than that in the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the highest jackpot probability “2470/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with regard to the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B), regardless of whether the setting value is “1” to “6”, the uncertain variation state (low probability The small hit probability is constant as “62986/65536” regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability change state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is also common to the non-probability variation state and the probability variation state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 9-2), compared with the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9-1), the small hit The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for the small hit determination when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). Even when the big hit probability is made different according to the set value, while the small hit probability is made constant, as shown in FIGS. By making the setting values "1" to "6" different, the number of determination values for each setting value may be matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the judgment value corresponding to the deviation is included in the judgment values corresponding to all the set values “1” to “6” (FIG. 9). -1 and FIG. 9-2, there is no set value that causes the outlier probability to be 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the deviation is different according to the set value (depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). , The outliers are different).

Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, the deviation probability may be 0 (that is, a set value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the deviation). For example, at the setting value “6” having the highest advantage (the highest jackpot probability), the outfall probability is 0, and the determination value corresponding to the outfall may not be included.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, the small hit probability may be 0 (that is, the judgment value does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (FIG. 9-1), the small hit probability is uniformly set to 0, and the determination value for the small hit may not be included. Good.

In addition, in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and (B) and FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B), the small hit probability is the same in the probability variation state (high probability state) and the non-variance probability state (low probability state). The probability of deviation is different, but in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the big hit probability rises with respect to the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). It is also possible to reduce and match the outlier probabilities. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values of "1" and "2", for example, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the number of steps that can be set is less than 6 steps, or in a gaming machine in which there is no difference in the degree of advantage due to the setting change function, a type of gaming machine having a 6-step setting change function and a hardware/software configuration The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type determination table)
9-3(A) and 9(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is "2R normal jackpot", "2R certainty variation jackpot", "based on a random number for jackpot type determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of "6R regular big hit", "6R certainty big hit", "9R certainty big hit", or "16R certainty big hit".

As shown in FIG. 9-3(A), in the feature unit 026IW, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", when performing variable display of the first special symbol, There is a 9% probability of being determined as a "16R probability variation jackpot", a 56% probability of being determined as a "6R probability variation jackpot," and a 35% probability of being determined as a "6R regular jackpot." Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3(B), in the feature unit 026IW, regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6”, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Has a probability of 10%, is determined to be a “16R probability variation jackpot”, has a 50% probability to be determined to be a “9R probability variation jackpot”, has a 5% probability to be determined to be a “2R probability variation jackpot”, and has a 35% probability to be determined. 2R normal big hit” is decided.

The "16R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 16 rounds and is shifted to a high-probability state after the jackpot gaming state is finished. Further, the "9R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 9 rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "6R probability variation big hit" is a big hit which is controlled to a big hit game state of 6 rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "2R probability variation big hit" is a big hit which is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state.

The "6R normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 6 rounds and is shifted to a low probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, "2R normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the big hit game state.

In this characteristic part 026IW, when "16R certainty variation jackpot", "9R certainty variation jackpot", "6R certainty variation jackpot", and "6R regular jackpot", a predetermined period (in this example, in each round of the jackpot game) The special winning opening is controlled to be open until 30 seconds have elapsed or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and it is possible to win a maximum of 10 special winning openings in each round. Is. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the special winning opening is controlled to be in an open state only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of prizes that can be won in each round is about two to three.

Further, in this characteristic unit 026IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to any of the first KT state, the second KT state or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type, How to transition the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIG. 9-28).

(Small hit type determination table)
9-4(A) and 9(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit pattern, based on the random number for the small hit type determination, the type of small hit is "small hit A", "small hit B" , Or “Small hits C”.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(A), in the feature unit 026IW, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", when performing variable display of the first special symbol, With 100% probability, it is decided as "Small hit A". Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), in the feature unit 026IW, regardless of which of the setting values "1" to "6", the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Is determined to be a “small hit B” with a probability of 70%, and is determined to be a “small hit C” with a probability of 30%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds during the small hit game (see FIGS. 9-9), and the small hit game You can hardly expect to win a game ball into the special prize hole. Also, in the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 9-10), and the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 9-11), and the game ball is won into the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be most expected.

(Variation pattern table)
9-5 to FIG. 9-7 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the characteristic part 026IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 9-5 to 9-7 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-5 to 9-7, nine types of first variation patterns #01 to #09 for the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decorative symbol. 34 types of #01 to #34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the variation pattern #n (n=01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 9-5(A) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5(A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #01 to #06.

When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state), in FIG. 9-5(B) The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #07 to #09.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 9-6(C) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #01 to #03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out, the second variation pattern #01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined that the small hit, the second variation pattern #02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern #03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this characteristic part 026IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed even in the non-KT state and a small hit occurs, a situation in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the prize of the game ball to the special winning opening occurs. Will end up. Therefore, in this characteristic unit 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-6(C), even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variable time is extremely lengthened and the frequency of execution of the variable display is increased. The number of small hits is reduced by lowering the number of hits, thereby preventing a situation in which the small hit is aimed at to obtain a prize ball even in the non-KT state. In the characteristic part 026IW, the "frequency of occurrence of small hits" is, for example, the occurrence rate of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. Is higher than in the normal state.

In this characteristic part 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-6(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is obtained even in the case of a big hit. By relatively lengthening to 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of unreasonably aiming at the prize ball due to winning in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to take a long time to digest the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of low probability/first KT state, the big hit game based on 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state is ended. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the low probability/first KT shown in FIG. 9-6(D) and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6(D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #04 to #06. Is decided.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(D), when it is determined that there is a deviation as the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, the variation time is shortened to 5 seconds and the second variation pattern #04 of the shortened variation is set. It is determined. Further, when it is determined that a small hit is the first change in the low probability/first KT state, the second change pattern #05 (the second start winning opening is opened) is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds for the small hit. (Variation pattern for preparation). As described above, in the characteristic part 026IW, when the first KT state is controlled, although the frequency of small wins increases, the variable winning ball device 6B is actually opened to increase the opening time of the special winning ball. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in a state immediately after shifting to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that some game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, a considerable number of game balls may win the special winning opening. Therefore, in the characteristic part 026IW, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 can be operated before shifting to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning award ball device 17 to an open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member are allowed to enter the special winning opening, This prevents the situation where a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when it is determined that the big hit as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern #06 is determined, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

In the case of executing the variable display of 2 to 49 fluctuations after finishing the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state, FIG. 9-6 ( The low probability/first KT shown in E) and the 2nd to 49th variation second special symbol variation pattern table are selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-6(E), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation patterns #07 to #13 It is decided to either. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-6(E), when it is determined that the low probability/the second KT state of the first KT state is the second to 49th variation, the second variation pattern # of the shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds # In some cases, the second fluctuation pattern #08 having a shortened fluctuation of 07 or a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the low probability/the 1st KT state is the 2nd to 49th fluctuations and the deviation, the second fluctuation pattern #09 with reach may be determined. Further, when it is determined that the small hit is the second to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern #10 of the shortened fluctuation or the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern #11 of the shortened fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #07 and #10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #08 and #11 are stored when one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a fluctuation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the storage capacity is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. Further, when it is determined that the big hit is the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

In addition, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state, the 50th change display (that is, the low probability/final change in the first KT state) is executed. If yes, the low probability/first KT time and the 50th variation second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-6(F) are selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6(F), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #14 to #16. Is decided.

In the characteristic unit 026IW, when the low probability/first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as “during chance time” is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 9-6(F), when it is decided that the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a deviation or a small hit, a character display such as "end of chance time!!" is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern #14 or the second variation pattern #15 accompanied by the end display for performing is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6(F), when it is determined that the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a big hit, a character display such as “end of chance time!” is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern #16 with a predetermined revival display after the end display to be performed is determined.

In addition, in this characteristic part 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5, when it is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern #07 with a variation time of 10 seconds is displayed. Is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a long change time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is a forced outfall, the forced outfall frequently occurs and the player is a small hit even in the second KT state. You will not be able to receive any profit from. Therefore, in this characteristic unit 026IW, by changing the variation time of the big hit variation of the first special symbol to a short variation time, the big hit game state based on the variation of the first special symbol is generated before the frequent occurrence of forced deviation. It is configured.

Note that, unlike the feature unit 026IW, even when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is not forced to fall off (for example, the first Special symbol big hit symbol When the second special symbol is changing at the time of stop, if it is a gaming machine of the second special symbol forced disengagement), the variation time of the first special symbol big hit in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit is the same short change time as the deviation, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from the small hit. Therefore, if the variation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long variation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that at least a plurality of small hits can occur. (For example, 1 minute) is ensured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability/first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot or the 9R certainty variation jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state is finished. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the high probability/first KT shown in FIG. 9-7(G) and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7(G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #17 to #21. Is decided.

As in the case of the first change in the low probability/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7(G), the change time is also determined when the deviation is determined as the first change in the high probability/first KT state. In some cases, the second variation pattern #17 having a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation of the high probability/first KT state is the deviation, the second variation pattern #18 with reach may be determined. Also, when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, the variation pattern for the second starting winning opening opening preparation (second variation pattern #19) may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7(G), when it is determined that the first change of the high probability/first KT state is a big hit, the second change pattern #21 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot and the 9R certainty variation jackpot that have triggered the high probability/first KT state, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation, FIG. 9-7 (H ) High probability / at the time of the first KT and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the second fluctuation and thereafter is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7(H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second variation after the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #22 to #28. Will be decided.

Note that, as in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7(H), when it is determined that there is a deviation after the second fluctuation of the high probability/first KT state, In some cases, the second variation pattern #22 of shortening variation with a variation time of as short as 5 seconds or the second variation pattern #23 of shortening variation with a variation time of as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a deviation after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #24 with reach may be determined. In addition, when it is determined that the small hit is the second variation after the high probability/first KT state, the variation time is shortened to 5 seconds and the second variation pattern #25 of variation, or the variation time is shortened to 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern #26 of fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as the small hit after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #27 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #22 and #25 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #23 and #26 are stored when one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a fluctuation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the storage capacity is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. In addition, when it is determined that the big hit is the second variation after the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #28 with reach is determined.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if the high probability / second KT state, the high probability / second KT variation pattern table for the second probability at the time of the second KT shown in FIG. 9-7 (I) The variation pattern is selected and determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7(I), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #29 to #34. ..

As shown in FIG. 9-7(I), when it is determined that there is a deviation in the high-probability/second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern #29 with a short variation of 1.5 seconds. In some cases, the second fluctuation pattern #30 of normal fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, when the high probability/second KT state is determined to be a deviation, the second variation pattern #31 with reach may be determined. In addition, when it is determined as a small hit in the high probability/second KT state, when the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern #32 of a short variation of 1.5 seconds, or when the variation time is 5 seconds, it is normal. The second fluctuation pattern #33 of fluctuation may be determined. Further, when it is determined that the big hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, depending on which variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current game state, and the variable display result. Using the fluctuation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on the random number for judging the fluctuation pattern, and which fluctuation pattern is to be determined. 9-8, in order to determine the variation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability/second KT time shown in FIG. 9-7(I) It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, in the feature unit 026IW, when performing variable display of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state, when performing variable display that is a small hit, Regardless of which of the set values is "1" to "6", the second variation pattern #32 is determined with a probability of 70% and the second variation pattern #33 with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the 1.5 second shortening fluctuation will be selected.

In addition, in FIG. 9-8, as an example, a variation pattern table when executing a small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state is shown, but in FIG. 9-5 to FIG. 9-7. The other variation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values is "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and the shortening fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high in the case of the second KT state. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a shortened fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and a shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. 9-9 to 9-11 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 9-9 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of the small hit A. 9-10 shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. 9-11 shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. Further, FIGS. 9-9(1) to 9-11(1) respectively show open patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, and FIG. 9-9(2). 9-11(2) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-9(1) to 9-11(1). As shown in FIGS. 9-9(1) to 9-11(1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 is normally displayed. The variable display of the symbols is executed, and when it is determined to be a normal symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when it is determined to be out, the deviating symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. To be done. In this characteristic unit 026IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-9(1) to 9-11(1), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the deviating symbol is determined. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 9-9(1) to 9-11(1), after the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning opening is opened. After the pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has passed, the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port.

When the game ball is won in the second start winning port when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 9-9(1). In the case of small hit B, as shown in FIG. 9-10(1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of small hit C, FIG. As shown in -11 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of the small hit A. , The special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, so almost no winning can be expected. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-9(1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball is won in the special winning opening (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 variable displays).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 9-9(1) to 9-11(1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. After the lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the following variation time of the ordinary symbol of 0.2 seconds, symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds, and second starting winning opening opening pretreatment time of 0.1 seconds is there. Therefore, in the characteristic part 026IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as the interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the present characteristic unit 026IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state. After 0.5 seconds which is the sum of the variation time of the normal symbol 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, the game ball is The time required for the variable winning ball apparatus 6B to reach the variable winning ball apparatus 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state in the state where the normal symbol is not changed, Normally, the variable winning ball device 6B is already opened because it is shorter than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B while being controlled to the state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are easy to win in the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-9(2) to 9-11(2). As shown in FIGS. 9-9(2) to 9-11(2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 is normally displayed. The variable display of the symbols is executed, and when it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when it is determined that it is out, the deviating symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. To be done. In this characteristic unit 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-9(2) to FIG. 9-11(2), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 1.0 second, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the winning symbol or the deviating symbol is determined. The time is 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 9-9(2) to 9-11(2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds elapses, the second starting winning opening is opened. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds elapses, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port.

When the game ball is won in the second start winning port when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 9-9(2). In the case of small hit B, as shown in FIG. 9-10(2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of small hit C, FIG. As shown in -11 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short at 0.2 seconds. Further, in the characteristic part 026IW, in the second KT state, at least 3.8 seconds as an interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened (ordinary symbol variation time 1.0 seconds + symbol determination time 0). A relatively long period of 2 seconds + the time before the second starting winning opening opening process is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 9-9(2) to 9-11(2), the open time of the upstream variable winning ball apparatus 6B is short and the interval period (closed period) is long. As compared with the first KT state, the game ball easily enters the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. However, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 opens for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, so that the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening can hardly be expected even in the second KT state.

In the second KT state, the game balls are likely to enter the special winning opening and the award balls are easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also referred to as "small hit RUSH". In the second KT state, "small hit RUSH" Characters such as “” are displayed.

In this example, the opening time of the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 (special winning opening) is changed depending on whether the small hit type is the small hits A to C. I can't stop. For example, the number of times of opening the special variable winning ball device 17 may be changed depending on which of the small hit types A to C. In this case, for example, in the case of small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of small hit B or small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is somewhat short, by opening the special variable winning ball device 17 for 0.4 seconds four times, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening ) May be provided with a small hit type in which a game ball can be won to some extent, and various modes are conceivable. Further, in this example, the case where the small hit types are three kinds of small hits A to C is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, it is configured to provide four or more small hit types. Good.

Further, in the characteristic part 026IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state. After the total of 3.8 seconds, which is the total of the variation time of the normal symbol of 1.0 seconds, the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds, and the second starting winning opening opening pretreatment time of 2.6 seconds, the game ball is The time required to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, Normally, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the variation of the symbol is not performed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled to. Therefore, in the second KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are difficult to win in the variable winning ball device 6B.

In this characteristic unit 026IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is a normal symbol process process by the game controlling microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). This is performed by executing (see step S26). Further, the game control microcomputer 100, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, whether the game state is a probability change state (high probability state), whether in the non-KT state, the first KT state or the second KT state. Regardless of whether there is a big hit game state or not, it is determined with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%) whether or not the common figure is hit.

In the characteristic part 026IW, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol determination time are the same at 0.2 seconds each in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time is the second. A case has been shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is made different by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning a prize ball device 6B may be different by changing the variation time and the symbol determination time between the first KT state and the second KT state. In addition, for example, the second start winning opening opening processing time after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and if the second starting winning opening opening processing time is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The variable winning a prize ball device 6B may be configured to have different closing periods (interval periods). In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress the winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. ..

As will be described later, in the characteristic part 026IW, in the first KT state, by controlling the high base state by setting the high base flag indicating the high base state, the characteristics shown in FIGS. As shown in 9-11(1), the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is controlled to be opened for a long time. Further, in the second KT state, the variable baseball device 6B is opened by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIGS. 9-9(2) to 9-11(2). It is controlled to shorten the time.

In addition, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, it is shown in FIGS. The variable winning a prize ball device 6B as shown in 11(1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, it is shown in FIGS. 9-9(2) to 9-11. The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be configured to be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) that opens for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and in other states including the big hit game state, the special flag may not be set.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the low-probability/last variation display in the first KT state is executed. For example, in the low-probability/first KT state 50 times of the shortened variation period of the special symbol, the special flag may be deleted in accordance with the 49th variation stop of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the long open of the variable winning ball device 6B when performing the left-handed notification after the low probability/first KT state ends. be able to.

As described above, in the case of configuring the variable winning ball device 6B by using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 6B, a flag for shortening variation of the variable display of the special symbol is further used. The variable display of the special symbol may be controlled in this case, and in this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be separately managed and controlled.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be opened short-circuited during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 6B is high in the low probability/non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are operated for firing. Thus, it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning, and it is possible to prevent the right-handing operation from being performed during the low probability/non-KT state.

In this characteristic part 026IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, in the case where the variable display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state in which the normal symbol is in a variation stop and the normal symbol is not stored. This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture the target of the variation stop timing of the second special symbol (in the case of a small hit, if the variation time of the normal symbol is long, the passage gate). The variable winning ball device 6B does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17 and the special winning opening can be won. On the other hand, in this characteristic portion 026IW, by shortening the variation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened before the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Since it is set to be started, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the firing operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

9-12 and 9-13 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 9-12, commands 8000(H) to 8009(H) and 8011(H) to 8032(H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of special symbols. It is a production control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the display control variable display on the image display device 5 is started. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 designation command) (deletion designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is to be dislocated. Command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 16R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 3 designation command (9R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 9R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit. .. The command 9005 (H) is a production control command (display result 5 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 6 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9007 (H) is a production control command (display result 7 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 8 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this characteristic unit 026IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display result designation command received by the production control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is It is possible to determine that it is a display result designation command for the first special symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the second special symbol, so the display result Although the designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be different.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but each of 15R probability variation big hit/9R probability variation big hit/6R probability variation big hit/6R normal big hit/2R probability variation big hit/2R normal big hit/small hit/out The variation pattern command may be determined in accordance with, and the production control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

Command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that specifies that the right-handed indicator 26 has finished lighting. Command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that specifies that the right-handed indicator 26 has started lighting.

Command A000 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. Command A003 (H) is a production control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

Command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is a production control command sent from the big hit game start to the big hit game end. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designating command) that designates the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is a production control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) that designates the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is a production control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare design command) that designates the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) that designates the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

Command B1XX (H) is a production control command (display command during big winning opening opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the special winning opening) that specifies the display after the round during the big hit game (display of the interval between the rounds).

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a special winning opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning prize winning designation command) that specifies that the game ball has won in the special winning prize.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second effective start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

Command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first reserved memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is a production control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000(H) is an effect control command (low probability/non-KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability/non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is a production control command (low probability/first KT background designating command) that designates background display when the gaming state is low probability/first KT state. The command E002(H) is a production control command (high accuracy/first KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability/first KT state. The command E003 (H) is a production control command (high-accuracy/second KT background designating command) that designates background display when the gaming state is high probability/second KT state.

Command E1XX (H) is a production control command (setting value command) that specifies the setting value that is currently set. The set value is set to "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101(H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106(H) is transmitted as the set value command.

When the production control CPU 120 (specifically, the production control CPU 120) mounted on the production control board 12 receives the above-mentioned production control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, 9-12 and the display state of the image display device 5 are changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 9-13, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. Note that production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, a more detailed production control command regarding a big hit game and a production control command indicating a game state (for example, a production control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

9-14 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state where the first special symbol normal process is executed is the case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S110A. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A, in a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not made in the first special symbol display device 4A, and, This is the case when neither the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is being played.

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 026IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is confirmed.

If the number of first reserved memories is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52A).

If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM102, and the RAM102. In the first random number buffer area (step 026IWS53A), decrement the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (decrement the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 026IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first reserved memory number=n− Stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are always consistent with the order of the first reserved storage numbers=1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the first reserved storage number and the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The extraction order is also saved so that it can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 026IWS55A). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 026IWS55A. The set value command is also sent when is executed.

Note that the timing of transmitting the set value command is not limited to that shown in this example. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, the low probability/non-KT state is determined and the low probability/non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, the low probability/first KT state is determined, and the low probability/first KT background designation command is set. When the certainty variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, the high probability/first KT state is When the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability/second KT background designation command is determined to be the high probability/second KT background determination command. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is changing (step 026IWS57A). Specifically, when the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is based on the variation display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. When it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating, the process proceeds to step 026IWS69A without performing the processing after step 026IWS58A. As a result, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the variation of the big hit of the second special symbol, the big hit determination value is stored forcibly regardless of whether it is stored or not.

The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit variation of the second special symbol is in step 026IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as a hitting random number is performed, and the process proceeds to step 026IWS59A, so that the start winning is achieved. It may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 026IWS57A, the random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as the hit determination random number without performing the processing in steps 026IWS58A to S63A, and the small value is set. By performing the hit determination, the hit determination may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the big hit of the second special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit judgment random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 026IWS58A) and executes the big hit judgment module (step 026IWS59A). The big hit determination module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the random number for hit determination coincides with a predetermined big hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 026IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 026IWS61A). .. Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 16R certainty big hit, a 6R certainty big hit, or a 6R regular big hit (step 026IWS62A), and the big hit type is stored (step 026IWS63A), step 026IWS69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not made in step 026IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 026IWS64A). The small hitting determination module is a program that decides to make a small hit if the random number for hitting determination (or a random number for small hitting determination) matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 026IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 026IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 judges the small hit type based on the random number for judging the hit type (step 026IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 026IWS68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined as the small hit A (see FIG. 9-4(A)). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times of the high base state is "0" (step 026IWS69A), and if it is "0", step 026IWS75A. Move to. When the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, when it is in the low probability/first KT state, the gaming control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 026IWS70A), It is determined whether or not it has become “0” (step 026IWS71A). When the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 026IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 026IWS72A), and shortens the variable display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 026IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended to the end of fluctuation (step 026IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS75A.

In this characteristic part 026IW, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of times of execution of the variable display in the high base state is managed, because it is a low probability at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / It is a case where it is controlled to a high base state (low probability/first KT state) and variable display is executed 50 times. In the case of the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), when the 50th variation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps 026IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 026IWS72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps 026IWS73A and S73B, and the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered.

In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right hitting state by continuing the right hitting notification, and as the gaming state, the high base state is finished, but the variation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for setting the state and making it a production background common to the first KT state.

Then, in step 026IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting processing (step 026IWS75A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 026IWS75A.

In addition, in step 026IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability variation big hit determination table or the probability variation big hit determination table in consideration of the game state.

FIG. 9-15 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not the special symbol time saving flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened is set. It is confirmed (step 026IWS1700A). In this example, the special symbol time saving flag is set and the shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol is performed, which makes it advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (Fig. 9-5). (See FIGS. 9-7), since a small hit is likely to occur, the KT state is controlled. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern, which is not shown in FIG. 9-5(A). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT time is selected (step 026IWS1701A). If the special drawing time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100, as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, KT shown in FIG. 9-5(B). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected (step 026IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100, based on the variation pattern table determined in step 026IWS1701A, S1702A, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, Which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 9-5 is to be determined is determined (step 026IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1704A).

In addition, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 026IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer and the variation time. While starting the measurement of (step 026IWS1705A), the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 026IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 026IWS1707A).

9-16 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first, if not yet transmitted, based on the determination result of whether to be a big hit, and the determination result of the big hit type, one of the display result designation command (display result 1 control command, display result 2 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 5 designation command) are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1120A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (step 026IWS1121A), and when the first variation time timer times out (step 026IWS1122A), performs control to transmit the first symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 026IWS1123A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 026IWS1127A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 026IWS1124A). Whether or not the big hit symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 026IWS1125A). Whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the second small hit flag that indicates a small hit is set on the basis of the variable display of the second special symbol.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 026IWS1124A) or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 026IWS1125A), the CPU 103 causes the effect control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is performed (step 026IWS1126A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 026IWS1127A).

By performing the processing of step 026IWS1124A, S1125A, in this characteristic portion 026IW, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol The variable display of is forcibly stopped so that a situation in which a big hit or a small hit occurs simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol does not occur. In this case, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, when the variable display of the first special symbol is forced to be off, the variable display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step 026IWS1124A. As for, the control is forcibly disengaged so that the symbols are stopped and displayed.

If neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (N in step 026IWS1124A, N in step 026IWS1125A), the process is ended as it is.

FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 026IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 026IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 026IWS2012A) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2013A).

In this example, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is provided on the right side of the game area, so if the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who has made a right-handed operation Is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in the present example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on during the low probability/first KT state, but the processing of steps 026IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B is executed to display the 50th variation display. The low-probability/first KT state is ended at the start, the state is shifted to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processing of steps 026IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed to end the 50th variation display. The right-handed indicator 26 is turned off when the operation is performed.

Then, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 026IWS2014A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step 026IWS2015A). When the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 indicates that the big hit signal 1 (a signal indicating that the big hit game is being performed) and the big hit signal 2 (a signal indicating that the player is in a long game) are externally output. The big hit signal output flag is set (step 026IWS2017A). In the feature part 026IW, based on the big hit signal output flag being set in step 026IWS2017A, the information output process (step S23) is executed, the big output signal 1 is started to be output to the hall computer, and the big hit signal 2 is output. If it is not being output to the hall computer, the jackpot signal 2 is started to be output to the hall computer.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a big winning opening pre-opening timer (step 026IWS2018A), sets open pattern data for round 1 according to the type of big hit (step 026IWS2019A), and sets "1" to a round number counter indicating the number of big hits. Is set (step 026IWS2020A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 026IWS2021A) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2022A).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step 026IWS2023A).

By executing the processing of step 026IWS2021A, S2022A, in this example, when the big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. And the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

In the present example, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, so the right hit is made at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 026IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether the first small hit flag is set (step 026IWS2024A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2025A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first small hit opening preprocessing (step 026IWS2029A).

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is originally advantageous for the player to perform a right-handing operation during the small hit game. However, as already explained, when the small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol is only the small hit type is the small hit A, the prize of the game ball to the special winning opening can hardly be expected. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is not turned on and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

If the first small hit flag is not set (N in step 026IWS2024A), the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 026IWS2030A).

In this example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, the right-hand hitting information that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, as a right hit notification, it is possible to execute a launch promotion alert that prompts the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41. It may be.

In addition, in the state where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, right-handing notification and launch promotion information are not executed, and in that state when the game ball wins the first starting winning opening, right-handing notification and launch promotion information (In this case, because it is in the gate passage waiting state, even if the game ball wins the first starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol is not immediately started, and the first reserved memory is stored) You may comprise.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the degree of recognition is low (for example, small volume sound output or small screen display). Thus, it may be configured to perform a left-hand hit notification that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), when the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected, a mode in which the degree of recognition is high (for example, a loud sound output or A left-handed notification may be provided by a large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, for the player who accidentally shoots the game ball to the right of the game area, while performing a mild left-handing notification while the recognition degree to the surroundings of the game machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, left-handed notification may be performed in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handing operation to return to the left-handing operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, in the passage gate 41, when a game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening are more than a predetermined number. Even if a small number (eg, one) of game balls is detected, a left-hand hit notification may be performed.

Further, for example, the external gate is not output when the game ball is detected at the passage gate 41, while the external signal is output when the game ball is detected at the second start winning opening or the special winning opening. May be.

Although the characteristic part 026IW displays the demo when a specific condition is satisfied, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is displayed when the demo is displayed in the normal state. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be performed.

9-18 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S114A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input (step 026IWS2501A). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103, if set, resets the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the high base flag, and the special drawing time saving flag, and the high base number counter. Is cleared to 0 (step 026IWS2504A). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a first big hit start designation command (step 026IWS2505A), and sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first big hit opening preprocessing (step 026IWS2506A).

In this characteristic unit 026IW, the first gate passage waiting process is executed, so that the big hit game is not started immediately when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the first special symbol, but the passage gate 41 The game ball has passed, and is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that it is detected by the gate switch 21.

9-19 and FIG. 9-20 are flowcharts showing the first jackpot end process (step S118A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first big hit ending process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 026IWS2200A), and when the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step 026IWS2204A. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the first big hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2201A), and control for transmitting the first big hit end designation command is performed (step 026IWS2202A). Then, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) (step 026IWS2203A), and the process is ended.

In step 026IWS2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 026IWS2204A). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2205A). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS2205A), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is the 16R certainty variation jackpot (step 026IWS2206A). Whether or not the 16R probability variation big hit can be determined by, for example, confirming the big hit type stored in step 026IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process. If the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag indicating that it is a probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 026IWS2207A), and is under the control of shortening the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that is set and the state shifts to the KT state (step 026IWS2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223A. In the case of the 16R probability variation big hit, since the high base flag is not set, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is controlled.

If it is not the 16R certainty variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot finished this time is the 6R certainty variation jackpot (step 026IWS2209A). Whether or not the 6R certainty variation big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the big hit type stored in step 026IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing. If the 6R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 026IWS2212A), and sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step 026IWS2213A), Further, the special drawing time saving flag is set to shift to the KT state (step 026IWS2214A). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223A. Therefore, in the case of the 6R certainty variation jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (see step 026IWS2504A of the first gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the variable display thereafter, It is determined as Y in step 026IWS2010A of the first special symbol stop processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 026IWS2011A is not performed. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not the 6R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is the 6R normal big hit), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step 026IWS2219A), and sets the special figure time saving flag to the KT state. The process moves (step 026IWS2220A). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 026IWS2221A). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223A. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal big hit, it is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) (step 026IWS2223A).

9-21 is a flowchart showing a first small hitting end process (step S121A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first small hit completion processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit completion display timer is set (step 026IWS2300A), and when the small hit completion display timer is set, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 026IWS2304A. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the first small hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2301A), and control for transmitting the small hit end designation command is performed (step 026IWS2302A). Then, the small hit end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) (step 026IWS2303A), and the processing is executed. finish.

In step 026IWS2304A, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 026IWS2304A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305A). If not, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305A Y), the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) (step 026IWS2309A). ).

9-22 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, it is in a state where the variable display of the second special symbol is not made in the second special symbol display device 4B. In addition, it is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is being played.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 026IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is confirmed.

If the number of second holding storages is 0, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM102, and the RAM102. In the second random number buffer area (step 026IWS53B), decrement the value of the second reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 026IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number=n−. Stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are always consistent with the order of the second reserved storage numbers=1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 026IWS55B). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 026IWS55B. The set value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the processing shown in step 026IWS56A of the first special symbol normal processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step 026IWS57B). Specifically, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing when the first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variation display of the first special symbol is set. When it is determined that the big bonus of the first special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step 026IWS69B without performing the processing from step 026IWS58B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol, the big hit judgment value is forcibly disregarded regardless of whether it is stored or not.

The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 026IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 026IWS59B, so that at any time during the start winning. It may be forcibly deviated regardless of whether or not the random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 026IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as the hit determination random number without performing the processing in steps 026IWS58B to S63B, and the small value is set. By performing the hit determination, the hit may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for hit determination was obtained at the time of winning the start prize.

When the big hit of the first special symbol is not changing, the game controlling microcomputer 100 reads the hit judging random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 026IWS58B), and executes the big hit judging module (step 026IWS59B). The big hit determination module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the random number for hit determination coincides with a predetermined big hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 026IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 026IWS61B). .. Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is 16R certainty variation big hit, 9R certainty variation big hit, 2R certainty variation big hit, or 2R normal big hit (step 026IWS62B), and the big hit type is stored (step 026IWS63B). ), and proceeds to step 026IWS69B.

If the big hit is not made in step 026IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 026IWS64B). The small hitting determination module is a program that decides to make a small hit if the random number for hitting determination (or a random number for small hitting determination) matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 026IWS65B), the game controlling microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol ( Step 026IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 judges the small hit type based on the random number for judging the hit type (step 026IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 026IWS68B). In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit B or the small hit C (see FIG. 9-4(B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 026IWS69B), and if it is "0", shifts to step 026IWS75B. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the gaming control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 026IWS70B), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 026IWS71B). When the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 026IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 026IWS72B), and shortens the variable display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 026IWS73B). Further, the game controlling microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 026IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS75B.

Then, in step 026IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 026IWS75B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined just before step 026IWS75B.

In addition, in step 026IWS59B, in consideration of the game state, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit, using either the non-probability change big hit judgment table or the probability change big hit judgment table.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 9-15. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-15, the second variation pattern process is explained by replacing “first” with “second”. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 026IWS1700A and confirms whether the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses a non-variable pattern table shown in FIG. 9-6(C) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. Select the variable pattern table for the second special symbol for KT time. If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 changes depending on whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set, and the number of variations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for any of KT shown in FIGS. 9-6(D) to 9-7(I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-6(D) If the 2nd to 49th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-6(E) is selected, and if the 50th variation, the second variation shown in FIG. 9-6(F). Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-7(G) The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-7(H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-7(I) is selected.

The second special symbol variation process is the same as the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) shown in FIG. 9-16. That is, in the first special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 9-16, if the "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol variation process has been described.

Even in the second special symbol variation process, the same process as steps 026IWS1124A to S1126A of the first special symbol variation process is executed, and the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. If so, the control for transmitting the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be forced out. With such a configuration, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), the remaining second reserved memory can be exhausted, and the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

In addition, it is configured to provide a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol on the right side of the game area ( In a gaming machine configured to be provided with a starting winning opening which is not a variable winning ball device) and which is configured to shift to a normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) As described above, the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, because the variation efficiency of the first special symbol is high, the frequency of small hits based on the variation display of the first special symbol is also high, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed accordingly. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second reserved memory in the normal state by increasing the frequency of playing, and further suppress the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing when the player is absent. You can

FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 026IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 026IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 026IWS2012B), and also controls to send a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 causes the stop symbol of the second special symbol to be derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 026IWS2014B). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 026IWS2015B). When the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 026IWS2016B). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 026IWS2018B.

If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the CPU 103 sets the big hit signal output flag (step 026IWS2017B). In the feature part 026IW, based on the big hit signal output flag being set in step 026IWS2017B, the information output process (step S23) is executed, the big output signal 1 is started to be output to the hall computer, and the big hit signal 2 is output. If it is not being output to the hall computer, the output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a special winning opening pre-opening timer (step 026IWS2018B), sets round 1 opening pattern data according to the big hit type (step 026IWS2019B), and sets "1" to the round number counter (step). 026IWS2020B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 026IWS2021B) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2022B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second gate passage waiting process (step 026IWS2023B).

By executing the processing of step 026IWS2021B, S2022B, in this example, when the big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. And the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 026IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 026IWS2024B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2025B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 026IWS2026B). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 026IWS2027B), and right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the striking and lighting start designation command is performed (step 026IWS2028B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second small hit opening preprocessing (step 026IWS2029B).

By executing the processing of step 026IWS2027B, S2028B, in this example, when the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is better for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the small hit game. Advantageously, the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

However, in this example, even if the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be lit when the KT state is in effect. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 026IWS2026B, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started overlappingly. Also, the process of sending a right-handed lighting start designation command is not performed.

If the second small hit flag is also not set (N in step 026IWS2024B), the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 026IWS2030B).

FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing a second gate passage waiting process in the second special symbol process process. In the second gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input (step 026IWS2501B). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 026IWS2502B). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 026IWS2504B.

If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 sets the big hit signal output flag (step 026IWS2503B). In the characteristic part 026IW, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the fact that the big hit signal output flag is set in step 026IWS2503B, the big output signal 1 is started to be output to the hall computer, and the big hit signal 2 is output. If the external output is not being performed, the external output of the big hit signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the probability variation flag, the high base flag, and the special drawing time saving flag if set, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 (step 026IWS2504B). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a second big hit start designation command (step 026IWS2505B), and sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second big hit opening preprocessing (step 026IWS2506B).

In this feature unit 026IW, the second gate passage waiting process is executed, so that the big hit game is not started immediately when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second special symbol, but the passage gate 41 The game ball has passed, and is configured to shift to the big hit game on the condition that it is detected by the gate switch 21.

9-25 and 9-26 are flowcharts showing the second jackpot end processing in the second special symbol process processing. In the second big hit ending process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 026IWS2200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step 026IWS2204B. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the second big hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2201B), and the control for transmitting the second big hit end designation command is performed (step 026IWS2202B). Then, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) (step 026IWS2203B), and the process is ended.

In step 026IWS2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 026IWS2204B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2205B). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS2205B), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of the jackpot that ended this time is 16R certainty variation jackpot or 2R certainty variation jackpot (step 026IWS2206B). Whether or not it is the 16R certainty variation jackpot or the 2R certainty variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 026IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is the 16R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 026IWS2207B), and sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state ( Step 026IWS2208B). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223B. In the case of the 16R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit, the high base flag is not set, so the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is controlled.

If neither the 16R certainty variation jackpot nor the 2R certainty variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is the 9R certainty variation jackpot (step 026IWS2209B). Whether or not it is a 9R certainty variation jackpot can be determined by, for example, checking the jackpot type stored in step 026IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is the 9R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 026IWS2212B), and sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step 026IWS2213B), Further, the special drawing time saving flag is set to shift to the KT state (step 026IWS2214B). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223B. Therefore, in the case of the 9R probability variation big hit, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is controlled.

In the case of a 9R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (see step 026IWS2504B of the second gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the big hit game based on the 9R certainty variation big hit, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the variable display thereafter, In the second special symbol stop process, Y is determined in step 026IWS2010B, and the subtraction process of the high base number counter in step 026IWS2011B is not performed. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not the 9R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is the 2R normal big hit), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 026IWS2219B), and sets the special figure time saving flag to the KT state. The process moves (step 026IWS2220B). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 026IWS2221B). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223B. Therefore, in the case of a 2R normal big hit, the probability is controlled to be a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 026IWS2223B).

FIG. 9-27 is a flowchart showing a second small hitting end process in the second special symbol process process. In the second small hit completion processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit completion display timer is set (step 026IWS2300B), and when the small hit completion display timer is set, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 026IWS2304B. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the second small hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2301B), and control for transmitting the small hit end designation command is performed (step 026IWS2302B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) is set in the small hit end display timer (step 026IWS2303B), and the processing is executed. finish.

In step 026IWS2304B, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer (step 026IWS2304B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305B). If not, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305B, Y), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 026IWS2306B). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 026IWS2307B), and right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the striking and lighting end designation command is performed (step 026IWS2308B).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 026IWS2309B).

Here, the transition of the game state in the characteristic unit 026IW will be described. FIG. 9-28 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition a game state in this characteristic unit 026IW. First, in the characteristic unit 026IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player aims at the left side of the game area to perform a shooting operation (left hit) of the game ball. Therefore, in the normal state, mainly the starting winning to the first starting winning opening occurs, and mainly the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, 16R certainty variation big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit, or 6R normal big hit occurs mainly.

As shown in FIG. 9-28, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) shifts after the end of the big hit game, The high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 026IWS2206A to S2208A). In addition, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, it shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the end of the big hit game until the next big hit occurs. The high probability/high base state is maintained (see steps 026IWS2209A, S2212A to S2214A). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the big hit game is over, the state shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) and the next big hit occurs. The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 026IWS2219A to S2221A).

In the case where it is after the transition to the KT state (high-probability/high-base state, low-probability/high-base state, high-probability/low-base state), in this feature 026IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. Perform a game ball firing operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and a variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, mainly a 16R sure change big hit, a 9R sure change big hit, a 2R sure change big hit, or a 2R normal big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-28, when 16R certainty variation big hit or 2R certainty variation big hit occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), the high probability/low base state after the big hit game ends. (High probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 026IWS2206B to S2208B). In addition, when the 9R probability variation big hit occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) shifts after the big hit game ends. , The high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 026IWS2209B and S2212B to S2214B). In addition, in this characteristic part 026IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being a 9R probability variation big hit is 50% in total (see FIG. 9-3 ), so once high probability/high In the base state, the high probability/high base state is looped at a rate of 50%. Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) after the big hit game ends. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 026IWS2219B to S2221B).

As shown in FIG. 9-28, when a 16R probability variation big hit or a 2R probability variation big hit occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), a high probability/low base state after the big hit game ends. (High probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 026IWS2206B to S2208B). In addition, when the 9R probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), it shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the big hit game ends. , The high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 026IWS2209B and S2212B to S2214B). Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 026IWS2219B to S2221B). In the feature unit 026IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 9-3(D) and (E)), Once the low probability/high base state is reached, the low probability/high base state loops at a rate of 35%. In addition, after the 6R normal big hit and the 2R normal big hit occur and the low probability/high base state occurs, the next big hit does not occur and the variable display of 50 times is finished, it is shown in FIG. 9-28. As shown, a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered (see steps 026IWS2010A to S2014A).

As shown in FIG. 9-28, when a 16R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a high-probability/low-base state (high-probability/second KT state), a high-probability/low-base state after the jackpot game ends. (High probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 026IWS2206B to S2208B). In addition, in this characteristic part 026IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being 16R certainty variation jackpot or 2R certainty variation jackpot is 15 % (See FIGS. 9-3 (D) and (E)), once the high probability/low base state is reached, the high probability/low base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when the 9R certainty variation big hit occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), it shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the big hit game ends. , The high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 026IWS2209B and S2212B to S2214B). Also, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high-probability/low-base state (high-probability/second KT state), it shifts to a low-probability/high-base state (low probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 026IWS2219B to S2221B).

In FIG. 9-28, the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) describes the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but the variation of the second special symbol at a low rate. It is possible that the display may be performed. In this case, when the 16R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when the 9R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state), and the low-probability/high until the next big hit occurs or the 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-28, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-28, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-28, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

FIG. 9-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external output signal output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. The prize ball signal is assigned to the terminal 01 of the external output terminal board. The prize ball signal is a signal output externally every time a predetermined number (10 in this example) of prize balls are paid out. The jackpot signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 05 of the external output terminal board. The big hit signal 1 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during the entire big hit game (that is, a signal indicating that the big hit game is being executed). The jackpot signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 06 of the external output terminal board. The big hit signal 2 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during all the big hit games and during the KT state (that is, a signal indicating that the player is in a camp). A special winning opening signal is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal Slope. The special winning opening winning signal is a signal externally output based on the detection of the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening. Further, the expected number of prize balls signal is assigned to the terminal 09 of the external output terminal board. The expected number of prize balls signal is a signal output to the outside each time the expected number of prize balls to be paid out reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example).

Each external signal shown in FIG. 9-29 has, for example, a timing at which ten prize balls are paid out, a timing at which a big hit occurs, a timing at which a special winning hole is won, or a planned number of prize balls reaches 10. A flag (for example, see steps 026IWS2017A, S2017B, and S2503B) or a timer corresponding to the output of the external signal is set at a timing, and the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the setting of the flag or the timer. The output is externally output to a hall computer or the like.

Next, the output timing of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 of the external output signals will be described. FIG. 9-30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining output timings of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2. In this example, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the jackpot signal output flag being set in steps 026IWS2017A and S2503B when the gaming state is the normal state, and jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 The external output of is started. After that, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the big hit signal 1 is stopped at the timing when the big hit game is finished. Further, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the big hit signal 2 is stopped at the timing when the KT state is ended. On the other hand, based on the fact that the big hit signal output flag is set in steps 026IWS2017A and S2017B when the game state is the KT state, the information output process (step S23) is executed, and the big output signal 1 is externally output. It In this case, since the KT state is in effect, the big hit signal 2 is continuously output to the outside. After that, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the big hit signal 1 is stopped at the timing when the big hit game is finished.

First, the output timing of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 when the game state is the normal state (low probability/non-KT state) will be described with reference to FIG. 9-30(1). As shown in FIG. 9-30(1), when the gaming state is the normal state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. External output of the big hit signal 1 is started at the same timing, and external output of the big hit signal 2 is started (see step 026IWS2017A). On the other hand, when the gaming state is a normal state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 The external output is not started, and the external output of the big hit signal 1 is started and the external output of the big hit signal 2 is started at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 (see step 026IWS2503B).

Next, using FIG. 9-30(2), the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot when the gaming state is the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state) The output timing of the signal 2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-30(2), when the gaming state is the KT state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. External output of the big hit signal 1 is started at the timing (see step 026IWS2017A). In addition, when the gaming state is the KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the external output of the big hit signal 1 is generated at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. It is started (see step 026IWS2017B). As shown in FIG. 9-30(2), in the KT state, the big hit signal 2 is continuously output to the outside.

Next, the normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 9-31 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process process. In the normal symbol process processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 026IWS5111), The control for transmitting the gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 026IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes a gate switch passage process (step 026IWS5113).

In this characteristic part 026IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected by executing the processing of steps 026IWS5111-S5113, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In addition, in this characteristic portion 026IW, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operation area. However, is it in a gate passage waiting state after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and before the big hit game is started? Regardless of whether it is sent or not, the gate passage designation command is transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 executes any one of the processes shown in steps 026IWS5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In this characteristic unit 026IW, regardless of whether it is in the gate passage waiting state or not, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in Step 026IWS5111, the gate switch passage process of Step 026IWS5113 is executed. Normally, variable display of symbols is executed, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, only when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when not in the gate passage waiting state, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, and in the state of waiting for the gate passage even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol. The variable display may be configured not to be executed.

Further, in this characteristic part 026IW, the passage gate 41 is normally used as a combined use gate of the starting region and the operating region, but the special symbol process process (see steps S25A and S25B) is usually within the timer interrupt process. Since it is executed before the symbol process processing (see step S26), after the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the normal starting area after the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the operating area is detected, Detection processing is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the big hit game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage process (step 026IWS5113): The CPU 103 causes the count value (gate passage memory number) of the gate passage memory counter (counter for counting the number of game balls passing through the passage gate 41) to be the maximum value (in this example, “ 4”) has been reached. If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. In addition, the LED of the universal figure reservation display 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number per ordinary symbol and storing it in the storage area (ordinary symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of gate passage memories.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 026IWS5100): CPU103 is a state in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, if the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step 026IWS5100, specifically, the regular symbol) If the variable display of the normal symbol is not displayed on the display device 20, and the variable winning ball device 6B is not opened/closed based on the fact that the normal symbol display device 20 hits and displays the symbol), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is to be the hit symbol). Then, the variable time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 026IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation process (step 026IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets a normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step 026IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop process (step 026IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a falling symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating the normal symbol normal process (step 026IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal symbol process timer is set to the time before the normal electric accessory release, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step 026IWS5103).

Normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step 026IWS5103): CPU103 confirms whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal electric auditors product operating time in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer To start opening the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric auditors product operating process (step 026IWS5104).

Normal electric auditors product operation process (step 026IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step 026IWS5100).

FIG. 9-32 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step 026IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passage memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passage memory number counter (step 026IWS5121). If the number of stored gate passages is 0 (Y in step 026IWS5121), the processing ends. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step 026IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the normal symbol per determination random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number=1 (step 026IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage memory number counter by 1 and shifts the content of each storage area (step 026IWS5123). That is, the random number for normal symbol determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memory=n (n=2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memory=n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the normal symbol per determination random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each gate passing memory number is always the order of gate passing memory number=1, 2, 3, 4 It is supposed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to make a normal symbol, and performs a lottery process based on a random number (ordinary symbol per determination random number value) to determine whether or not to make a normal symbol. It is determined (step 026IWS5127). Note that, in this characteristic unit 026IW, in step 026IWS5127, the CPU 103 uniformly sets the value of 99/100 regardless of whether the state is the probable variation state, the KT state, or the high base state. It is decided to be a normal symbol with probability.

In step 026IWS5127, when the read random number per normal symbol for judgment is within the range of hit (in the case of hit), the CPU 103 sets the hit symbol as the display result (step 026IWS5128), and proceeds to step 026IWS5130. Further, in step 026IWS5127, when the read random number per normal symbol for judgment is not within the hit range (in case of deviation), the CPU 103 sets the deviation symbol as the display result (step 026IWS5129), and proceeds to step 026IWS5130.

In step 026IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y in step 026IWS5130, S5131). Moreover, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (N in step 026IWS5130, S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 026IWS5101) (step 026IWS5133).

FIG. 9-33 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop processing (step 026IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step 026IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 026IWS3702). Normally, if the symbol process timer has not timed out (N of step 026IWS3702), the process is ended as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (hit in step 026IWS5127). Whether or not it is determined) is confirmed (step 026IWS3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol is set by, for example, setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 026IWS5127, and whether or not the flag is set is confirmed. You can

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a deviating symbol (N in step 026IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 026IWS5100) ( Specifically, it is updated to "0" (step 026IWS3708).

In step 026IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step 026IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 026IWS3704), and if it is set, That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 026IWS3706). Moreover, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the opening of the normal electric accessory (step 026IWS3705). ..

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically “3”) corresponding to the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step 026IWS5103) (step 026IWS3707).

FIG. 9-34 is a flowchart showing the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step 026IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step 026IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 026IWS3802). Normally, if the symbol process timer has not timed out (step 026IWS3802, N), the processing is ended as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric auditors product has passed (Y in step 026IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 026IWS3803). If it is set, that is, if it is in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set to the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 026IWS3805). Moreover, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set to the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric auditors product opening time (step 026IWS3804).

As described above, in the characteristic portion 026IW, the normal electric auditors product opening time is set to 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the normal electric auditors object opening time is set to 0.2 seconds in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to make a start winning in the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball does not easily reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

The control method for facilitating the starting winning in the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in the characteristic portion 026IW. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened a large number of times as compared with the case of being in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B). 6B may be set as the number of times of opening 6B, whereas in the first KT state, the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set as 2). By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to facilitate the starting winning in the second starting winning opening.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state, the control for increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B and the variable winning ball device 6B. May be executed in combination with the control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state (step 026IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric auditors product operating process (step 026IWS5104) (step 026IWS3807).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 9-35 to 9-37 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 026IWS611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 026IWS612). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 026IWS613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the set value command (step 026IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 026IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 026IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 026IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 026IWS618).

If the received effect control command is the display result specification command (step 026IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 026IWS620). ).

If the received production control command is any symbol confirmation designation command (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first forced symbol confirmation designation command, second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 026IWS621) ), the production control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag according to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 026IWS622).

If the received effect control command is the first big hit start designation command or the second big hit start designation command (step 026IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start displaying right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5. Is performed (step 026IWS624). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the first big hit start designation command reception flag or the second big hit start designation command reception flag according to the received big hit start designation command (step 026IWS625).

If the received effect control command is the first big hit end designation command or the second big hit end designation command (step 026IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5. Is performed (step 026IWS627). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first big hit end designation command reception flag or the second big hit end designation command reception flag in accordance with the received big hit end designation command (step 026IWS628).

In this example, the right hit display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the big hit game by executing the processing of steps 026IWS624 and S627.

If the received effect control command is the small hit start designation command (step 026IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 026IWS630).

If the received effect control command is the small hit end designation command (step 026IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 026IWS632).

If the received production control command is the right-handed lighting start designation command (step 026IWS633), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 026IWS634).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 026IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 026IWS636).

If the received production control command is a low-accuracy/non-KT background designating command (step 026IWS637), the production control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/non-KT state (for example, The display is controlled to be a blue background image (step 026IWS638). Further, the effect control CPU 120, if set, resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 026IWS639).

If the received production control command is a low-accuracy/first KT background designating command (step 026IWS640), the production control CPU 120 sets the background image on the image display device 5 to a low probability/background image corresponding to the first KT state (for example, The display is controlled with a green background image (step 026IWS641). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 026IWS642) and, if set, the high-probability state flag indicating the high-probability state and the second KT state indicating the second KT state. The 2KT state flag is reset (step 026IWS643).

If the received effect control command is the high-accuracy/first KT background designating command (step 026IWS644), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image on the image display device 5 to the high probability/background image corresponding to the first KT state (for example, The display is controlled with a yellow background image) (step 026IWS645). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high-probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 026IWS646) and, if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 026IWS647).

If the received production control command is the high-accuracy/second KT background designating command (step 026IWS648), the production control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to the background image corresponding to the high probability/second KT state (for example, The display of the red background image is controlled (step 026IWS649). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the high-probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 026IWS650), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 026IWS651).

If the received production control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 026IWS652), the production control CPU 120 counts the prize balls generated during the period in which the small hits continuously occur in the second KT state. The value of the small hit continuous middle award number counter for 15 is added (step 026IWS653). Next, the effect control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, based on the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after the addition, occurs during the period in which the small hits continuously occur in the second KT state. If the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 1 indicating the number of prize balls is displayed, control is performed to update the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 1 (step 026IWS654).

In addition, in this example, the small winning continuous medium prize ball number display 1 is started when a 16R certainty variation big hit or a 2R certainty variation big hit occurs in the normal state or the first KT state, and other than 16R certainty variation big hit or 2R certainty variation big hit. The display is terminated when the jackpot of (1) occurs (that is, when the second KT state is terminated).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hitting continuous medium prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or more than any threshold value (step 026IWS655). If the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or more than any threshold value, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after addition. The control for displaying the small winning continuous middle award number display 2 according to is performed (step 026IWS656). For example, if the value of the small winning continuous medium award sphere counter after addition is 1000 or 1005, 1010, it means that the number of award spheres has reached 1000 by the prize winning at this time. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value “1000” has been reached, and the small winning continuous award ball number display 2 indicating that the number of award balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as "1000OVER" is displayed as the small winning continuous award ball number display 2.

If the received effect control command is a special winning award winning designation command (step 026IWS657), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the small winning continuous medium prize ball number counter (step 026IWS658). Next, if the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 1 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after addition, the effect control CPU 120 continuously hits the small hit. The control for updating the middle prize number display 1 is performed (step 026IWS659).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small winning continuous medium prize ball counter after addition is equal to or more than any threshold value (step 026IWS660). If the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or more than any threshold value, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after addition. The control for displaying the small winning continuous middle award number display 2 according to is performed (step 026IWS661). For example, if the value of the small winning continuous medium award ball counter after addition is 1000 or 1005, it means that the number of award balls has reached 1000 with the prize of this time at the special winning opening. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value "1000" has been reached, and the small winning continuous award ball number display 2 indicating that the number of award balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as "1000OVER" is displayed as the small winning continuous award ball number display 2.

In this example, the case where the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is updated or the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 is displayed based on the winning in the special winning opening or the special winning opening is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even when a winning is made to the general winning opening 10 during the continuous small hit in the second KT state, a value corresponding to the number of prize balls for the winning at the general winning opening 10 is set as the number of small winning continuous winning balls. It may be added to the counter to update the small hit continuous middle prize ball count display 1 or display the small hit continuous middle prize ball count display 2.

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag according to the received effect control command (step 026IWS662). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS611.

Further, in the present characteristic unit 026IW, the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) executes the demo display control process in the effect control process process (step S76), for example. 9-38 and 9-39 are flowcharts showing the demo display control processing. In the demo display control process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first customer waiting demo display designation command has been received (step 026IWS4701), and if not received, the process proceeds to step 026IWS4706. If it is received, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (step 026IWS4702), and if it is not in the normal state, the process proceeds to step 026IWS4705. Specifically, if neither the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state nor the second KT state flag indicating the second KT state is set, it is determined to be the normal state.

Whether or not the first customer waiting demo display designating command is received is determined, for example, when the first customer waiting demo display designating command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). A flag indicating that the designated command has been received may be set, and in step 026IWS4701, it may be confirmed whether or not the flag is set.

Further, the first KT state flag and the second KT state flag are, for example, in the command analysis process (step S75), a low accuracy/first KT background designating command, a high accuracy/first KT background designating command, and a high accuracy/second KT background designating. Set based on receipt of the command.

In the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first demo standby timer for measuring the value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the first demo display is started (step 026IWS4703), A first demo standby flag indicating that the first demo display is on standby is set (step 026IWS4704). Then, the first demo reception flag is reset (step 026IWS4705).

After that, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first demo standby flag is set (step 026IWS4706), and if it is set, the first special symbol variation is started (step 026IWS4707). Y), or when the big hit game state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 026IWS4708), the process proceeds to step 026IWS4712. As a result, when the first special symbol variation is started or the big hit game state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol, the first demo display is not executed. Specifically, in step 026IWS4707, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the first special symbol is received, it is determined that the first special symbol variation is started. Further, in step 026IWS4708, when the second big hit start designation command is received, it is determined that the big hit game state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol.

The first demo waiting flag is set, the first special symbol fluctuation is not started (N in step 026IWS4707), and is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (N in step 026IWS4708). , The value of the first demo standby timer is decremented by 1 (step 026IWS4709), and when the first demo standby timer times out (step 026IWS4710 Y), the first demo display is started (step 026IWS4711) and the first demo is displayed. The standby flag is reset (step 026IWS4712).

After that, when the first demonstration display is being performed (Y in step 026IWS4713), the effect control CPU 120 starts changing the first special symbol (Y in step 026IWS4714), or based on the change in the second special symbol. When the jackpot gaming state is controlled (Y in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display is ended (step 026IWS4716).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command has been received (step 026IWS4801), and if not received, the process proceeds to step 026IWS4806. If it is being received, it is determined whether or not it is in the KT state (step 026IWS4802), and if it is not in the KT state, the process proceeds to step 026IWS4805. Specifically, if either the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set, it is determined to be the KT state.

Whether or not the second customer waiting demo display designation command is received is determined by, for example, when the second customer waiting demo display designation command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). A flag indicating that the designated command has been received may be set, and in step 026IWS4801, it may be confirmed whether or not the flag is set.

If it is in the KT state, the effect control CPU 120 sets the second demo standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the second demo display is started (step 026IWS4803), A second demo standby flag indicating that the second demo display is on standby is set (step 026IWS4804). Then, the second demo reception flag is reset (step 026IWS4805).

After that, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the second demo standby flag is set (step 026IWS4806), and if it is set, the second special symbol variation is started (step 026IWS4807). Y) or if it is not in the KT state (N in step 026IWS4808), the process moves to step 026IWS4812. As a result, when the second special symbol variation starts or the KT state ends, the second demo display is not executed. Specifically, in step 026IWS4807, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the second special symbol is received, it is determined that the second special symbol variation is started. In step 026IWS4808, if neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set, it is determined that the KT state has ended.

The second demo standby flag is set, the second special symbol fluctuation is not started (N in step 026IWS4807), if the KT state is not finished (Y in step 026IWS4808), the value of the second demo standby timer Is decremented by 1 (step 026IWS4809), and when the second demo standby timer times out (Y in step 026IWS4810), the second demo display is started (step 026IWS4811) and the second demo standby flag is reset (step 026IWS4812). ).

After that, the production control CPU 120, when the second demo display is in progress (Y in step 026IWS4813), the variation of the second special symbol is started (Y in step 026IWS4814), or when the KT state has ended (step 026IWS4815 N), the second demo display is terminated (step 026IWS4816).

FIG. 9-40 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is received (step 026IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, in the command analysis processing (step S75), when the variation pattern command is received, a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command is received is set. In step 026IWS811, it is only necessary to confirm whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 026IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 026IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation pattern #01 to #09. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 026IWS815).

If the 1st KT state flag or the 2nd KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is the KT state), the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the second special symbol. (Step 026IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns #01 to #34. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is ended. When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect control process flag to the value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 026IWS816).

By performing the processing of steps 026IWS812 to S815, in this characteristic portion 026IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol. Is executed, in the case of the KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is in the KT state, or if the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, it is in the non-KT state. , The variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

FIG. 9-41 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed (step 026IWS920). Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area designates the first variation pattern #01 to #09. It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current variable display is a small hit (step 026IWS921). Whether or not the variable display this time is a small hit is confirmed by, for example, whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 8 designation command. It can be determined by If it is a small hit variation, the CPU 120 for effect control determines a non-reach out-of-reason symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 026IWS922).

As described above, in the present example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the small hit occurs, there is only a small hit A, and a game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can hardly be expected to win. Therefore, by executing the processing of steps 026IWS920 to S922, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the non-reach miss symbol is forcibly displayed as a stop. This prevents players from having excessive expectations.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol (N in step 026IWS920) or when it is not a small hit variation (N in step 026IWS921), the effect control CPU 120, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variable display result. Is determined (step 026IWS923). In step 026IWS923, the effect control CPU 120, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be off), only the out-of-left or left or right decorative patterns in which the left-middle-right decorative patterns do not match at all. Matching reach is determined and the combination of symbols is determined. When the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 16R probability variation big hit), the combination of symbols arranged in the design “7” among the odd-numbered symbols is determined. Also, when the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 9R probability variation big hit or the 6R probability variation big hit), the decoration symbol on the left middle right is an odd number symbol other than "7". Decide the combination of the aligned symbols. Further, when the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 2R certainty variation jackpot), the combination of symbols including the special symbol (the symbol "R" in this example) as the decorative symbol in the symbol is determined. .. Further, when the display result 5 designation command or the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit), the combination of symbols in which the left middle right decorative pattern is arranged in an even number pattern To decide. When the display result 8 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), a combination of decorative symbols of the small hit design (for example, “135”) is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current variation display is out of order (step 026IWS924). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display this time is out of order is, for example, whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by. If it is not a deviation variation, the process directly proceeds to step 026IWS928. If the deviation is a deviation (Y in step 026IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of the setting value suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value. (Step 026IWS925).

In step 026IWS925, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 026IWS615). And CPU120 for production control performs the lottery process based on a random number, using the table corresponding to the specified setting value as a setting value suggestion production determination table for determining the presence and type of setting value suggestion production, and setting. Determine the presence and type of value suggestion production.

FIG. 9-42 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the setting value suggestive effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the set value suggestion effect determination table, there is no set value suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect A, set value suggestion effect B, set value suggestion effect C, set value suggestion effect D, and set value. A determination value is assigned to each of the suggestive effect E and the set value suggestive effect F.

The set value suggestive effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. In some cases, the execution rate is highest. Further, the set value suggestive effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the execution rate is highest. Further, the set value suggestive effect C is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the execution rate is highest. Further, the set value suggestive effect D is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined character image in the display color of orange on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the execution rate is highest. Further, the set value suggestive effect E is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the execution rate is highest. Further, the set value suggestive effect F is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. When it is “6”, the execution rate is highest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 026IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, it is not the second KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 026IWS928. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 026IWS926), that is, if it is the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 suggests that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 026IWS927).

FIG. 9-43 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-43, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table is determined for each of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, respectively. A value has been assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 9-43, in this example, the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect is highest when the setting value is “1” and the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect is when the setting value is “2”. The execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is next higher when the execution ratio is next higher and the setting value is "3", and the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is when the setting value is "4". Is the next highest, and the setting value is "5", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and the setting value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-43, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is highest when the set value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is set when the set value is "6". Has the highest execution rate.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the setting value is "1", and the jackpot probability is the highest when the setting value is "6". However, when the setting value is "2", the jackpot is not generated. Since the second KT state may end as a trigger, the setting value “1” is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (high continuation expectation level) and the setting value “6”. In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (low continuation expectation). Therefore, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is the highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the expectation for the continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Note that, as described above, the degree of continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the degree of expectation that the control period to the second KT state will be long without a big hit.

Further, in the present example, since the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the setting value is "1", the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is particularly executed, It is possible to further enhance the sense of expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used and the set value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, based on the change pattern indicated by the received change pattern command. For, a process table corresponding to the set value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 026IWS928).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 026IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 026IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 026IWS930). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to control the turning on/off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

When it is determined to execute the set value suggestion effect, the step 026IWS930 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 026IWS928, so that the decoration is performed. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of symbols (during the deviation).

When it is determined to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 026IWS930 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 026IWS928. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative pattern (during variation of the second KT state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decorative symbol variation time timer to start the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 026IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the variable display effect process (step S172) (step 026IWS932).

FIG. 9-44 and FIG. 9-45 are flowcharts showing the special figure per wait process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 026IWS9701). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 026IWS9706. In this characteristic part 026IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 026IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when executing the big hit mid effect. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the big hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the stage during the big hit has not yet been performed. Without executing, the process proceeds to step 026IWS9706.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 026IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, it moves to step 026IWS9716. In this characteristic part 026IW, when the small hitting design is displayed as the stop design of the decorative design, the stop design display flag 2 is set in step 026IWS9715. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when executing the effect during the small hit. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been fixedly displayed but the effect during the small hit has not yet been executed, so the stop symbol of the decorative symbol of step 026IWS9703 is displayed. The process moves to step 026IWS9716 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the CPU 120 for effect control stops the stop symbol of the left-middle-right decorative symbol (stopping symbol, big hit symbol) which is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. , Small hit symbol) are confirmed and displayed (step 026IWS9703). When the first compulsory symbol confirmation designating command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designating command is received, in step 026IWS9703, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to confirm and display the outlier symbol.

When the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 026IWS9703 (Y of step 026IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 026IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not any of the big hit start designation commands (first big hit start designation command, second big hit start designation command) have been received (step 026IWS9706). When either big hit start designation command is received, production control CPU120 resets stop design indicator flag 1 (step 026IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit type of the big hit that has occurred this time is a 16R certainty variation big hit or a 2R certainty variation big hit (step 026IWS9708). Whether or not the jackpot type is the 16R certainty variation jackpot or the 2R certainty variation jackpot is determined by, for example, checking whether the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command or the display result 6 designation command. it can. If it is the 16R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit, the process directly proceeds to step 026IWS9710.

If neither the 16R certainty variation big hit nor the 2R certainty variation big hit, it means that the second KT state ends after the end of this big hit game when the second KT state is in progress. In this case, the production control CPU 120 clears the values of the small hit continuous number counter for counting the number of times the small hits occur continuously in the second KT state, and the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter to 0 ( Step 026IWS9709).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 026IWS9710). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 026IWS9711), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, the various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 026IWS9712).

After that, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the effect process during big hit (step S176) (step 026IWS9713).

If the big hit symbol is not definitely displayed in the process of step 026IWS9703 (N of step 026IWS9704), if the small hit symbol is definitely displayed in the process of step 026IWS9703 (Y of step 026IWS9714), the CPU 120 for effect control is stopped. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 026IWS9715).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 026IWS9716). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 026IWS9717).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the small hit continuous number counter (step 026IWS9718). Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the small hit continuous number display 1 indicating the continuous number of small hits in the second KT state on the image display device 5 based on the updated value of the small hit continuous number counter. If so, control for updating the small hit continuous number display 1 is performed (step 026IWS9719).

In this example, the small hit continuous number display 1 is started when a 16R certainty variation big hit or a 2R certainty variation big hit occurs in the normal state or the first KT state, and a big hit other than the 16R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit occurs. The display is terminated when it occurs (that is, when the second KT state is terminated).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition is one of the threshold values (step 026IWS9720). If the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition is one of the thresholds, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the small hit continuous number corresponding to the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition. The display 2 is controlled (step 026IWS9721). For example, if the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition is 10, it means that the small hit continuous number has reached 10 times in the present small hit occurrence, and thus the threshold value “10” is reached. If it is determined that the number of consecutive small hits has reached 10, the consecutive small hit number display 2 is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as "10COMBO" is displayed as the small hit continuous number display 2.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the small hit (step 026IWS9722). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 026IWS9723), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 026IWS9724).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit (step S174) (step 026IWS9725).

When the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are not displayed in the processing of step 026IWS9703 (that is, when the deviating symbol is displayed) (N in step 026IWS9704, and N in step 026IWS9714), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 026IWS9726).

Next, a description will be given of a production mode of the production executed in the present characteristic unit 026IW. First, the presentation mode of the set value suggestive presentation will be described. FIG. 9-46 is an explanatory diagram for describing a production mode of the set value suggestive production. In this example, the set value suggesting effect can be executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 9-46(A), when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is being performed on the image display device 5, at the execution timing of the set value suggestive effect, FIG. 9-46(B1) ) To (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-46 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed in a mode in which the predetermined character images 026IW001, 026IW002, 026IW003 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when the set value suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B1), the predetermined character image 026IW001 is displayed on the image display device 5 in a blue display color. Value suggestion production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggesting effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B2), the set value is set in a mode in which the predetermined character image 026IW002 is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5. Suggestive production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestive effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B3), the set value is set in a mode in which the predetermined character image 026IW003 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. Suggestive production is executed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 9-46, the case where the setting value suggesting effect A, the setting value suggesting effect C, and the setting value suggesting effect E are executed is shown. Indicates a predetermined character image with a green display color, a predetermined character image with an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in the color display color.

In the present example, which set value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of focus and the set value suggestion effect is executed. Can be expected.

Next, an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 9-47 is an explanatory diagram for describing a production mode of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern which is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In the present example, when in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-47(A), for example, a character display 026IW004 such as “small hit RUSH” is displayed in the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is displayed so that it is in the middle. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-47(A), when the variable display of the left, right, and right decorative patterns is being displayed on the image display device 5 during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-47 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-47 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed in a mode of displaying predetermined effect images 026IW005 and 026IW006 on the image display device 5. In this example, a case where a racing car image is displayed as the predetermined effect images 026IW005 and 026IW006 is shown. In this case, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (B1), a predetermined effect image 026IW005 is displayed in the image display device 5 in a blue display color. Thus, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (B2), the predetermined effect image 026IW005 is displayed on the image display device 5 in a red display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed, or the effect image of any display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion is displayed. Depending on whether or not the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the display mode of the right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 9-48 is an explanatory diagram for describing the display mode of the right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether it is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit and is a big hit game, As shown in FIG. 9-48(1), the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) (see steps 026IWS2021A and S2021B). Further, based on the reception of the right striking lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 9-48(1), the effect control CPU 120 turns on the right striking notification LED 37 (steps 026IWS2022A, S2022B, S634). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-48(1), the production control CPU 120 displays the right-handed display 026IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 026IWS624).

Further, in the present example, when the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, during the small hit game, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (2), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically The right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (see step 026IWS2027B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handing lighting start designation command, the right-handling notification LED 37 is turned on by the production control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 9-48(2) (see steps 026IWS2028B and S634). .. However, unlike during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 9-48(2), the right hit display 026IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in the present example, when the small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. The hitting notification LED 37 is not turned on, and the right hitting display 026IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

As described above, according to the feature unit 026IW, the first identification information (for example, the game ball) is entered based on the game medium (for example, the game ball) entering the first starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening). , The first special symbol) can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is based on that the game medium has entered the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). The variable display of can be executed. Also, variable means (for example, special variable winning) that can be changed between a first state (for example, open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (for example, closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or inaccessible A ball device 17). Further, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) and a special state having a lower degree of advantage than the advantageous state ( For example, a small hit game state) can be controlled, and when the special state is controlled, the variable means is controlled to the first state. In addition, the first starting area is provided so that a game medium that moves on a predetermined path (for example, an area on the left side of the game area) of the moving path on which the game medium can move can enter, and the variable means is a moving path. A game medium that moves on a specific path (for example, a region on the right side of the game region) is provided so that it can enter. Further, it is possible to execute a specific notification (for example, a right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 9-48 (1) and (2)) for promoting the emission of the game medium to the specific path, and the variable display of the first identification information is possible. When the special state is controlled after the execution of (1), the specific notification is not executed (for example, refer to FIG. 9-48 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

Specifically, as shown in this feature unit 026IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type of the first special symbol side It is configured such that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than the small hit type on the second special symbol side, and the second special when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. When the variable display of the symbols is configured to be forcedly stopped and stopped, if the right hit notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol having a low winning rate (advantage), it is substantially It is not preferable because the player wastes the game ball in spite of being unlikely to win a prize at the special winning opening, and rather gives a disadvantageous launch promotion notification. Therefore, in this example, while the right hitting notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, the right hitting notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage due to a player's wasteful hitting, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the first hold storage unit (for example, the first hold storage buffer) capable of storing the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the hold storage, and the variable display of the second identification information. And a second reserved storage unit (for example, a second reserved storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the reserved storage. Further, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, it is in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). It is controllable, and when a special display result (for example, a small hit pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information (for example, It can be controlled to a small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of the variable display of the second identification information becoming the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one variable display, As a display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a missing pattern) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly ended, and the reserved storage can be smoothly consumed.

Further, according to the present characteristic unit 026IW, it is possible to give a predetermined value when controlled to a special state (for example, pay out 10 prize balls based on winning of a game ball to a special winning opening), It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled in an advantageous state (for example, pay out 15 prize balls based on winning of a game ball to the special winning opening). In addition, as the specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 9-48) and visual confirmation than the first specific notification It is possible to execute the second specific notification (for example, the display of the right-handed display 026IW007 shown in FIG. 9-48(1)) having a high possibility. Further, when controlled to the advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 9-48(1)), and the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and then the special state is controlled. If so, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 9-48(2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the assignable value.

In addition, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the variable state of the first identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled, it is more advantageous than when the variable state of the second identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled. It controls to a special type of low degree (for example, small hit A). When the special state is controlled after the variable display of the second identification information is performed, the specific notification is performed (see (2) and (3) in Fig. 9-48). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the advantage of the player.

Further, according to the characteristic part 026IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs. , Forcibly display non-reach outliers). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognizability of being controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved storage stored in the second reserved storage means can be smoothly consumed.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 026IW, a delay unit (for example, a restriction piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) for delaying the movement of the game medium is provided on the upstream side of the variable unit in the specific path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the target from being aimed at the timing at which the control to the special state is performed after the variable display of the second identification information is normally performed. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the countermeasures against the game machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, as a delay means, a passage member for moving the game ball to meander to the left and right is provided. You may.

In addition, according to this characteristic unit 026IW, the effect is produced based on information from the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that controls the progress of the game, and the information from the game control means. The production control means (for example, CPU120 for production control) which controls is provided. Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed indicator 26) for performing a predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means executes a specific notification (for example, turning on the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left big winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right big winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the playing area. If the variable display of the symbol is a big hit, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if the big hit is the variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to the gaming machine configured as described above, when the big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hitting notification is executed during the big hit game while the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. In the case of a big hit, the right hit notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, when the big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left hitting notification may be executed during the big hit game. That is, the specific notification execution means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right special winning opening) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of a type in which the control target is set. With such a configuration, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left hitting notification is executed during the big hitting game to prevent the player from mistakenly performing the right hitting operation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player.

Further, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is provided on the right side of the game area, the case where the right-handed notification is executed even during the KT state is shown. It is not limited to various forms. For example, when the second start winning port is applied to the gaming machine provided on the left side of the game area, the right-handing notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. Good.

In addition, in the present example, the right-handing notification is executed by displaying the right-handing display 026IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to turning on the right-handing indicator 26 and the right-handling notification LED 37 only during the big hit game. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), in order to execute the first variable display after the end of the big hit game, in addition to turning on the right hit indicator 26 and the right hit notification LED 37. The right-handed notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed display 026IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, in addition to turning on the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handling notification LED 37, a right-handed display 026IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, the right-handed notification may be executed.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the right-handed display 026IW007 having a relatively large size as shown in FIG. 9-48(1), a symbol display (for example, right-facing triangle display) indicating right-handed display is displayed on the image display device 5. Thus, the right-handed notification may be executed.

Further, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball device is provided, the special variable winning ball device to be opened (special winning opening) is configured to be different depending on the type of small hit, and the small display is a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol. It may be configured such that the selection ratio of the small hit type is different depending on whether the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type of the open mode with a low winning rate) that the special variable winning ball device with a small number of prize balls opens. , When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type of the open mode with a high winning rate) that the special variable winning ball device with a large number of prize balls opens. You may comprise.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hit notification is given during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-48(2)), and the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. In the case where a small hit occurs in, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-48(3)), but when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol However, the right-handed notification may not be performed in some cases. For example, when a small hit occurs when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the situation where the left hit operation is in the normal state, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 026IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state). Is. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) can be controlled. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable variation state) and a specific state (for example, a probable variation state) that is easier to control to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for a small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 9-1 and 9). -2). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in payout performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling probability may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in the present feature unit 026IW, the number of special determination values is set to be common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is set to be common), so that the difference in the advantage degree is prevented from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. However, it prevents gambling from becoming too high.

Further, according to the present characteristic unit 026IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). And can be executed in parallel). In addition, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of the variable display of the second identification information becomes a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol). Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the special state, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 026IW, the special state is divided into the first special state (for example, the first KT state) and the second special state (for example, the second KT state) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. It is controllable. Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to execute the special suggestion effect corresponding to the degree of advantage of the special state (for example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 9-47). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by suggesting the advantage of the special state.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 026IW, a predetermined display result (for example, deviating pattern) different from the specific display result (for example, big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, small hit symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display. When the displayed variable display is executed, it is possible to execute the set value suggesting effect that suggests the set value (for example, the set value suggesting effect shown in FIG. 9-46). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect and the set value suggesting effect are executed in the variable display that is out of sync is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect may be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game, and various modes are possible.

In addition, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of special state. Further, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-4). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature unit 026IW, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the small hit type is shared in common), so that the difference in the advantage degree becomes excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming too big, and prevents gambling from becoming too high.

Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the case where the small hit type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values is “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to various forms. For example, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be changed depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”, and the advantage may be varied depending on the set value.

Further, according to the characteristic part 026IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 16R certainty variation big hit, 9R certainty variation big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit, 6R regular big hit, 2R certainty variation big hit, 2R certainty big hit). Further, the type of the advantageous state is determined by using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-3). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature unit 026IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the big hit type is commonly assigned), so that the difference in the advantageous degree is excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9C, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, the determination ratio of the big hit type may be changed depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”, and the advantage may be varied depending on the set value.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. The number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-8). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature unit 026IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is set to be the same regardless of the set value (the variation pattern is shared), so that the difference in the degree of advantage becomes excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming too big, and prevents gambling from becoming too high.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control will change, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous for elements other than the big hit lottery This is not preferable because the degree (difference in payout performance) is significantly different, but in the present feature unit 026IW, the same selection ratio of the variation patterns is used regardless of the set value, so that such a problem does not occur. ing.

It should be noted that in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the case where the allocation of the variation patterns is the same regardless of which of the setting values is “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, by varying the determination rate of the variation pattern depending on whether the setting value is “1” to “6” and providing a difference in the variation time, the variation efficiency is changed by the setting value. It may be configured such that the degree of advantage varies depending on the value.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 026IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state). Is. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) can be controlled. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. The special judgment value (for example, the judgment value for the small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display, and the predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display are determined. And a predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of deviation) are included. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs depending on the set value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 026IW, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable variation state) and a specific state (for example, a probable variation state) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to the specific states of all the set values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

Further, according to this feature unit 026IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Variable display can be executed in parallel). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state is performed. The corresponding judgment value includes a predetermined judgment value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 026IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the KT state) in which the frequency of displaying the variable display of the second identification information is increased to the special display result. Further, when the variable display is executed in which the predetermined display result (for example, the deviating pattern) is controlled and displayed in the special state, the set value suggesting effect suggesting the set value (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 9-46 is set. Value suggestion production) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (eg, big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (eg, big hit game state). Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) can be controlled. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for a small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Further, the number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-2), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is performed. The number of special determination values differs between the value and the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game while realizing the appropriate playability.

The characteristic part 026IW discloses a configuration for solving the following problems. That is, some gaming machines are configured to be able to output a specific signal. For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-200506 describes that a big hit signal (specific signal) is output from an external output terminal during all big hit states.

However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-500506, whether it is in the normal state or the special state, or when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information. No consideration is given to whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of. Therefore, in the normal state, it is necessary to be able to appropriately output the signal when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information.

Therefore, in the characteristic unit 026IW, in order to solve the problem that the signal can be appropriately output when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information, the following means (1) to (5) are provided. A configuration is disclosed.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention can perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), A gaming machine that can be controlled into an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit game state) and a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state), and a variable display of the first identification information. Variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, a portion that executes steps S110A to S113A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100, 2 Special symbol process processing (step S25B) the part which executes the same processing as steps S110A to S113A) and after a predetermined condition (for example, derivation display of the big hit symbol) is established, a specific area (for example, passage gate 41) Based on that the game medium (eg, game ball) has passed, advantageous state control means capable of controlling in an advantageous state (eg, first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100) step S115A ~ Part to execute S118A, part to execute the same process as steps S115A to S118A in the second special symbol process process (step S25B)), and special state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a game control micro) A part for executing steps S119A to S121A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the computer 100, a part for performing the same process as steps S119A to S121A in the second special symbol process process (step S25B), and usually Special state control means (eg, step 026IWS2208A, S2213A, S2214A, S2219A, S2220A, S2208B in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) in which a game value is more likely to be imparted than a special state. , S2213B, S2214B, S2219B, S2220B) and a specific signal output means capable of outputting a specific signal (for example, a jackpot signal 1) (for example, step S23 and step 026IWS2017A, S2017B in the game control microcomputer 100). The part for executing S2503B), and the specific signal output means is such that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the first identification information in the normal state. It is possible to output a specific signal based on the external output of the jackpot signal 1 based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the first special symbol in the normal state as shown in FIG. 9-30(1). (Starting), the specific signal is not output based on the predetermined condition being satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information in the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. The external output of the big hit signal 1 is not started even if the big hit pattern is derived and displayed as a special symbol). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately output the signal when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the specific signal is a signal capable of specifying the control to the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot signal 1), and the specific signal output means is predetermined by the variable display of the second identification information in the normal state. If the conditions are met, it is possible to output a specific signal based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-30(1), in the normal state, with the second special symbol). When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the external output of the big hit signal 1 is started based on the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41). According to such a configuration, it can be specified that the game machine is controlled in an advantageous state outside the gaming machine.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, special signal output means capable of outputting a special signal (eg, big hit signal 2) corresponding to the special state and the advantageous state (eg, step S23 and step in the game control microcomputer 100) 026IWS2017A, S2503B) and the special signal output means can output the special signal using an output terminal different from the specific signal (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-29, the jackpot signal 1 is Externally output from the output terminal of the terminal number "05", the jackpot signal 2 is externally output from the output terminal of the terminal number "06"), the output of the special signal is started at the same timing as the output start timing of the specific signal. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-30, in a normal state, similarly to the big hit signal 1, the external output of the big hit signal 2 is started based on the fact that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed with the first special symbol, When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the external output of the big hit signal 2 may be started based on the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41). With such a configuration, the special signal can be appropriately output.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, a first area (for example, a special winning opening) in which the game medium can enter in the advantageous state and a second area in which the game medium can enter in the special state ( For example, a special winning opening) and a special signal output means (for example, in the game controlling microcomputer 100) capable of outputting a special signal (for example, a special winning opening winning signal) corresponding to the entry of the game medium into the second area. The part for executing step S23), and the special signal output means can output the special signal by using an output terminal different from the specific signal (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-29, the jackpot signal 1 is The output terminal with the terminal number “05” is externally output, and the special winning opening winning signal is externally output from the output terminal with the terminal number “07”). With such a configuration, it is possible to externally monitor the state of entry of the game medium into the second area.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the specific signal output means is predetermined by variably displaying the second identification information when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variably displaying the first identification information. When the condition is satisfied, it is possible to output the specific signal regardless of whether the game medium has passed through the specific region (for example, as shown in (1) and (2) in FIG. When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the big output signal 1 is externally output at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 9-30(2), in the KT state, When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed in the two special symbols, the jackpot signal 1 may be externally output at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal corresponding to the state during the game.

Note that the structure shown by the characteristic unit 026IW can be appropriately combined with the structure shown by the characteristic unit 21TM to form a gaming machine. For example, the configuration for changing the set value indicated by the characteristic portion 21TM is applied to the characteristic portion 026IW so that the setting value suggesting effect can be executed or the small hit RUSH continuous suggesting effect can be executed. Alternatively, the right-handed notification may be executed.

[Explanation regarding the characteristic part 06TM]
Next, the characteristic part 06TM will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in the above [description regarding the characteristic part 026IW], the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed in parallel.

(Relationship between game state and production design and production mode)
First, each game state (low-probability/non-KT state, low-probability/first KT state, high-probability/first KT state, and high-probability/second KT state) and each production design (decorative design, first small design, And the second small design) and each effect mode (normal mode, time saving mode, probability variation mode, and small hit RUSH mode) will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the symbols displayed in the upper right part and the upper left part of the image display device 5, which are smaller than the decorative symbols, and whether or not the special symbols are variably displayed and the display result of the special symbols are displayed. Is called a small design. The variable display of the small symbols can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stop display of the small symbols can also be executed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbols. Then, the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is changed and stopped and displayed in the upper left area of the screen of the image display device 5 from the left to the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, And the first small symbol display area 5r1, and the second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in a variable and stopped manner, and the area in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5 is the second small symbol display area 5l2 from the left. The second small symbol display area 5c2 and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

The first small symbol display areas 511, 5c1, 5r1 and the second small symbol display areas 512, 5c2, 5r2 are all smaller in display area than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the first small design is lower than that of the decorative design, and the visibility of the second small design is lower than that of the decorative design.

FIGS. 10-1 (1) to (4) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of decorative symbols and small symbols corresponding to the game state. In the present embodiment, variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R. Here, there is a case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and a case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. The variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of any one of the special symbols of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol is different depending on the game state. In the following description, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is referred to as a main symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not correspond to the decorative symbol. Special designs are called sub-designs.

That is, the state where the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol is that in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1. The variable display of the first small symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R. Correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and in the second small symbol display area 51, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2, the second special symbol corresponding to the variable display is displayed. It is a state in which the variable display of the two small symbols is executed.

On the other hand, the state where the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol is that in the second small symbol display area 512, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2. The variable display of the second small symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R. Correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and in the first small symbol display area 511, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the first special symbol corresponding to the variable display This is a state in which variable display of one small symbol is executed.

As the gaming state in the present embodiment, as described above, the "low-probability/non-KT state" (sometimes referred to as a normal state) corresponding to the low-probability low base state and the "low-probability corresponding to the low-probability high base state". “Probability/first KT state”, “High precision/first KT state” corresponding to high precision high base state, and “High precision/second KT state” corresponding to high precision low base state. And, when the game state is controlled to (i) low probability/non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to (ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high-accuracy/first KT state, (iv) high-accuracy/second KT state is controlled In either case, the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol.

That is, in the case of (i), the decorative symbol and the first small symbol are information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second small symbol is the information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. However, in the case of (ii) to (iv), the decorative symbol and the second small symbol are information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first small symbol is the first special symbol. The information corresponds to the variable display. In the following description, "special figure 1" in the figure indicates the first special symbol, and "special figure 2" in the figure indicates the second special symbol.

10-1 (1), the game state is a low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, when the sub symbol is the second special symbol image display device 5 It is a figure which shows the example of the image displayed on. Further, FIG. 10-1 (2), the game state is a low probability / first KT state, the main symbol is the second special symbol, the sub symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 when the first special symbol It is a figure which shows the example of the image made. Further, FIG. 10-1 (3), the gaming state is the high-accuracy/first KT state, the main symbol is the second special symbol, the sub symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 when the first special symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of the image made. Further, FIG. 10-1 (4), the game state is a high-precision / second KT state, the main symbol is the second special symbol, the sub symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 when the first special symbol It is a figure which shows the example of the image made.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (1) to (4), the first hold for displaying the first hold storage number (0-4 first hold display 06TM010) in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. A display area 06TM011 is provided, and a second hold display area 06TM021 for displaying the second hold storage number (0 to 4 second hold displays 06TM020) is provided in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. There is. Further, in the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5, there is active display which is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed and also information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol as the main symbol being executed. An active display area 06TM031 for displaying 06TM030 is provided.

Further, a first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 for displaying the first reserved memory number is provided in the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (upper part of the first reserved display area 06TM011). A second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 for displaying the second reserved storage number is provided in the right part of the screen (upper part of the second reserved display area 06TM021). Then, as described above, in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, which displays the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and A first small symbol display area 5r1 is provided, and in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5, a second small symbol display area 5l2 for displaying a second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, a second small symbol. A display area 5c2 and a second small symbol display area 5r2 are provided.

Here, a number of objects (circular images) corresponding to the first number of pending storages are displayed in the first pending display area 06TM011, and a number of second pending storages is displayed in the second pending display area 06TM021. A number of objects (circular images) are displayed. In contrast, the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 displays the first reserved storage number numerically, and the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 displays the second reserved storage number numerically. It The display range of the object in the first reserved display area 06TM011 is wider than the display range of the numerical value in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015, and the first reserved memory number is the first reserved memory number in the first reserved display area 06TM011. It is displayed with higher visibility than the memory number special display area 06TM015. Further, the display range of the object in the second reserved display area 06TM021 is wider than the display range of the numerical value in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, and the second reserved display area 06TM021 contains the second reserved memory number 2 Reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 will be displayed with higher visibility.

Further, in the first reserved display area 06TM011, when the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol (that is, the game state is (i) low probability/non-KT state (normal state) ))), the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved storage number is displayed, but when the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol (that is, the game state is (Ii) low accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy/second KT state), the object itself is not displayed. There is. Thus, in the first hold display area 06TM011, objects corresponding to the first hold storage number are displayed according to the game state. On the other hand, in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, the first reserved storage number is displayed regardless of the gaming state (when the gaming state is any of (ii) to (iv)). Therefore, the player confirms the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 even in the game state (any of (ii) to (iv)) in which the object is not displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011, The first number of reserved memories can be grasped.

Further, in the second reserved display area 06TM021, when the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol (that is, the gaming state is (ii) low probability/first KT state, (iii) ) High accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy/second KT state, when either), the number of objects corresponding to the second reserved storage number is displayed, but the main symbol is the first When the special symbol is the 1 special symbol and the sub symbol is the 2nd special symbol (that is, when the gaming state is (i) low certainty/non-KT state (normal state)), the object itself is not displayed. There is. Thus, in the second hold display area 06TM021, objects corresponding to the second hold storage number are displayed according to the game state. On the other hand, in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, the second reserved storage number is displayed regardless of the gaming state (even when the gaming state is (i)). Therefore, even in the game state (i) in which the object is not displayed in the second holding display area 06TM021, the player can confirm the second holding storage number by checking the second holding storage number special display area 06TM025. You can

Further, in the active display area 06TM031, regardless of the game state, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol which is the main symbol is displayed and becomes the sub symbol. The object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is not displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 10-1(1) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the low certainty/non-KT state. When the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/non-KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the rendering mode is the normal mode, a "sunny image" representing a sunny landscape including the sun and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first number of reserved storages is 4 and the number of second reserved storages is 2, the variable display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol and the second symbol which is the sub symbol The variable display of special symbols is executed concurrently in parallel. Further, "4" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, "2" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, and the four first display areas are displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011. The hold display 06TM010 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 06TM031, the active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area. 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and, in the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol display area 5l2. In the second small symbol display area 5c2 and the second small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the sub symbol) is executed.

The example shown in FIG. 10-1(2) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the low-accuracy/first KT state. When the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the time saving mode. When the effect mode is the time saving mode, a “cloudy image” representing a cloudy landscape including clouds is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first number of reserved storages is 2 and the number of second reserved storages is 4, the variable display of the first special symbol which is the sub symbol and the second which is the main symbol The variable display of special symbols is executed concurrently in parallel. Also, "2" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, and four second sections are displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. The hold display 06TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 06TM031, the active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (the variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area. 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and, in the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol The variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display area 51, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (3), the screen of the image display device 5 is shown when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state. When the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the probability change mode. When the effect mode is the probability variation mode, a "rain image" representing a rainy landscape including clouds and rain is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first number of reserved storages is 2 and the number of second reserved storages is 4, the variable display of the first special symbol which is the sub symbol and the second which is the main symbol The variable display of special symbols is executed concurrently in parallel. Also, "2" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, and four second sections are displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. The hold display 06TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 06TM031, the active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (the variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area. 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and, in the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol The variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display area 51, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

The example shown in FIG. 10-1 (4) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state. When the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the small hit RUSH mode. When the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode, a “typhoon image” representing a landscape of a typhoon including clouds, wind, and rain is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first number of reserved storages is 2 and the number of second reserved storages is 4, the variable display of the first special symbol which is the sub symbol and the second which is the main symbol The variable display of special symbols is executed concurrently in parallel. Also, "2" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, and four second sections are displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. The hold display 06TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 06TM031, the active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (the variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area. 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and, in the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol The variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display area 51, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (1), when the game state is (i) low probability/non-KT state (normal mode), the second special symbol is a sub symbol, but the second small symbol display The second small symbol is variably displayed or stopped (determined stop) in the areas 51, 5c2, 5r2, so that the player variably displays or stops the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol. It is possible to understand that it is being displayed (fixed stop). Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (2) to (4), the game state is (ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high-accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high-accuracy/second KT. State, when in any of the state, the first special symbol is a sub symbol, the first small symbol display area 511, 5c1, 5r1 is displayed variable or stop (fixed stop) As a result, the player can recognize that the first special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is variably displayed or is stopped (fixed stopped). As described above, the visibility of the small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol, but the player can confirm the variation of the special symbol which is the sub symbol, depending on the variation of the small symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed according to the game state. When the gaming state is controlled to the low-accuracy/non-1KT state (normal state), as shown in FIG. 10-1 (1), the production control CPU 120 sends the background designation command (to the normal state) transmitted from the CPU 103. The effect mode is controlled to the normal mode by setting the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to the clear image based on the corresponding command (designating to display the background image). Further, when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-1(2), the production control CPU 120 transmits the background designation command (low accuracy/first KT) transmitted from the CPU 103. The effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode by setting the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to the cloudy image based on the command for designating the background image corresponding to the state). When the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-1(3), the effect control CPU 120 causes the background designation command (high-accuracy/first KT) transmitted from the CPU 103. By setting the background image displayed on the image display device 5 as the rain image based on the command for designating the display of the background image corresponding to the state), the effect mode is controlled to the probability change mode. Further, when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-1(4), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the background designation command (high-accuracy/second KT) transmitted from the CPU 103. The effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode by setting the background image displayed on the image display device 5 as the typhoon image based on a command for designating the background image corresponding to the state).

(Game flow)
FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow of the present embodiment. As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the game state are provided, and the effect control CPU 120 can control the effect mode corresponding to the current game state among the plurality of effect modes. Is.

The gaming state is controlled to the low-probability/non-KT state, and the variation display is started when the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode, and the display result of the variation display is "16R certainty variation big hit", "6R certainty variation big hit". , And "6R normal big hit", the big hit game state is controlled. When the variation display result is "16R probability variation big hit", after the big hit game state ends, the game state is controlled to the high-precision/second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. .. When the result of the variable display is "6R probability variation big hit", the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state after the jackpot gaming state ends, and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode. .. Further, when the result of the variable display is "6R normal big hit", after the big hit game state ends, the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode. .. Therefore, when the big hit occurs in the normal state, the player pays particular attention to which kind of big hit.

When the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state and the variation mode is started when the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, and the variation display result is "small hit" In, the small hit game state is controlled. Then, after the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hitting RUSH mode. That is, the small hit RUSH mode continues. Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display is “16R probability variable big hit” and When any of the "2R probability variable big hit" is reached, it is controlled to a big hit game state. Then, after the big hit game state ends, the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. That is, the small hit RUSH mode continues.

When the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display is "9R probability variable big hit". In this case, the big hit game state is controlled. Then, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode. Also, when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display is "2R normal big hit". When it becomes, the big hit game state is controlled. Then, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode.

The gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state, and the variation display is started when the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode, and the display result of the variation display is "16R probability variation big hit" and "2R probability variation big hit". If any of the above, it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after the big hit game state ends, the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. Also, when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode, the variation display is started, and the variation display result is "9R probability variation big hit". In this case, the big hit game state is controlled. Then, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode. That is, the probability variation mode continues.

When the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state, the variation display is started when the production mode is controlled to the probability variation mode, and the variation display result is "2R normal big hit". Is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode.

When the gaming state is controlled to the low probability/first KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display is "16R probability variable big hit" and "2R probability variable big hit". If any of the above, it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after the big hit game state ends, the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. Also, when the gaming state is controlled to the low-accuracy/first KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display is "9R probability variable big hit". In this case, the big hit game state is controlled. Then, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode.

When the gaming state is controlled to the low-accuracy/first KT state, the variation display is started when the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode, and the variation display result is "2R normal big hit". Is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode.

When the gaming state is controlled to the low-accuracy/first KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the time-saving mode, and when the jackpot does not occur until the predetermined number (50 times in this example) of variable display is executed, , The game state shifts from the low-probability/first KT state to the low-probability/non-KT state (normal state), and the effect mode shifts from the time saving mode to the normal mode. That is, after the gaming state is controlled to the low-accuracy/first KT state (from the production mode being controlled to the time saving mode), the variation display of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times (50 times) is completed, the variation of the special symbol If the display result does not become any of the display results of "16R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit", "9R probability variation big hit", and "2R normal variation big hit", fluctuation of the predetermined number of times (50th) After the display ends, the game state falls from the low-accuracy/first KT state to the low-probability/non-KT state (normal state), and the effect mode falls from the time saving mode to the normal mode.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, not only when the game state is controlled to (iv) high-accuracy/second KT state (rendering mode: small hit RUSH mode), i) Low accuracy/non-KT state (production mode: normal mode), (ii) Low accuracy/first KT state (production mode: time saving mode), (iii) High accuracy / Even when controlled in the first KT state (production mode: probability variation mode), a small hit occurs, and the small hit game state can be controlled.

However, in the present embodiment, in the non-KT state, the variation time of the second variation pattern in which the display result is “off” and the variation time of the second variation pattern in which the display result is “small hit” are set to 15 minutes. Since it is performed (see FIG. 9-6(C)), it is practically difficult to win the game ball in the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as described above, in the first KT state, the variable baseball sphere device 6B is controlled to be in the high base state so as to be opened for a long time (see FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11). Even if a small hit occurs, the number of game balls winning the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is extremely small (for example, about 100 balls per 100 fluctuations). That is, (i) low accuracy/non-KT state (production mode: normal mode), (ii) low accuracy/first KT state (production mode: time saving mode), (iii) high accuracy/first KT state (production mode: probability change) In mode), even if a small hit occurs, the frequency of game balls winning the special variable winning ball device 17 is low.

Therefore, in these gaming states (i) to (iii), the special symbol that is the main symbol (the first special symbol in the case of (i), the second special symbol in the case of (ii) or (iii)) When the display result of is a small hit pattern, the combination of decorative symbols "135" indicating that a small hit has occurred corresponding to this is stopped and displayed (fixed stop), but the player The special variable winning ball device 17 is displayed without prompting to display the game ball on the special variable winning ball device 17 (display of the characters "Small hit!!" at the top of the screen), and the game ball is won on the special variable winning ball device 17. I try not to have excessive expectations.

On the other hand, in (iv) the high-accuracy/second KT state (rendering mode: small hit RUSH mode), the variable base winning ball device 6B is controlled to be short in opening time (Fig. 9). -9 to FIG. 9-11), when a small hit occurs, the game balls often win the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Therefore, in the game state of (iv), if the display result of the second special symbol, which is the main symbol, is a small hit symbol, it is suggested that a small hit has occurred in the image display device 5 correspondingly. The combination “135” of the decorative patterns to be displayed is stopped and displayed (fixed stop), and a display prompting the player to win the game ball to the special variable winning ball device 17 (“small hit!” at the top of the screen). Characters are displayed) so that the game ball has an expectation of winning in the special variable winning ball device 17.

Thus, (i) low accuracy/non-KT state (production mode: normal mode), (ii) low accuracy/first KT state (production mode: time saving mode), (iii) high accuracy/first KT state (production mode) : Probability variation mode), a small hit occurs (the result of displaying the special design that is the main design has become a small hit design) is a stop display (decision stop) of the decorative design in a manner difficult for the player to recognize ), (iv) In the high-accuracy/second KT state (production mode: small hit RUSH mode), a small hit has occurred (the display result of the special symbol which is the main symbol is a small hit symbol) The decoration pattern is stopped and displayed (decision stop) in a manner that the player can easily recognize that it has become).

As described above, in the first KT state among the KT states, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is easily opened, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long and the small hit. Even if occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball is won in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 changes). That is, in the first KT state, the state in which a small hit is likely to occur and the high base state are controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended. As will be described later, the second KT state in the KT state has a short opening time of the upstream side variable winning ball device 6B, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is placed in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. That is, in the second KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

Also, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state in the case of a normal figure is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And as shown in FIG. 9-1 and FIG. 9-2, when the variation of the first special symbol is low, the proportion determined to be a small hit is low, whereas when the variation of the second special symbol is a small hit. Since the ratio is configured to be high (however, except for the case of forced disengagement described above), the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by changing the second special symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player. According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the KT state, a gaming state different from the jackpot gaming state can be realized as a gaming state advantageous to the player.

(Special symbol normal processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 10-3, the first special symbol normal process in the present embodiment will be specifically described. FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state where the first special symbol normal process is executed is the case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S110A. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A, in a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not made in the first special symbol display device 4A, and, This is a case where neither the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the first small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is being played.

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), first, the value of the second special symbol process flag, the second jackpot opening preprocessing (5), the second jackpot opening Medium processing (6), second big hit opening post-processing (7), second big hit ending processing (8), second small hit opening pre-processing (9), second small hit opening middle processing (10), Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value corresponds to any one of the second small hitting end process (11) (step S06TM1000A). The value of the second special symbol process flag is the second big hit opening pretreatment (5), the second big hit opening processing (6), the second big hit opening postprocessing (7), and the second big hit end processing (8), If the value corresponds to any one of the second small hit opening pre-processing (9), the second small hit opening processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11) ( If YES in step S06TM1000A), the process ends.

On the other hand, the value of the second special symbol process flag is the second big hit opening pre-processing (5), the second big hit opening processing (6), the second big hit opening post-processing (7), and the second big hit ending processing (8). ), the second small hitting opening pre-processing (9), the second small hitting opening processing (10), and the second small hitting end processing (11). In this case (NO in step S06TM1000A), the same process as the process after step 026IWS51A shown in FIG. 9-14 is executed.

In the process of step 026IWS52A described above, the CPU 103 transmits only the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command to the effect control CPU 120, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the process of step 026IWS52A, the CPU 103 controls the effect control. To the CPU 120 for use, a first customer waiting demo display designation command, and a production control command (low accuracy/non-KT background specification command, high accuracy/second KT background specification command, high) which specifies the background display corresponding to the current game state. Either a positive/first KT background designating command or a low probability/first KT background designating command) may be transmitted.

Thus, in the step S06TM1000A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is a period of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, and the second special If the period is controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state based on the variable display result of the symbol (YES), the value of the first special symbol process flag, the value indicating the first special symbol normal processing By not updating from (0) to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting process, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started.

If the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the period of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the started first special symbol When the variable display result of "is a big hit" or "a small hit" becomes a problem, the game control becomes complicated. As in the present embodiment, during the period of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, by not starting the variable display of the first special symbol, The game state is controlled appropriately. In addition, based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, when the player is controlled in an advantageous state (big hit game state, small hit game state), by not starting the variable display of the first special symbol, the game The player is concentrated on the game in the advantageous state.

Further, the second special symbol normal processing in the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-4. FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, it is a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is not made in the second special symbol display device 4B. And, it is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the second small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), first, the value of the first special symbol process flag, the first jackpot opening preprocessing (5), the first jackpot opening Medium processing (6), first big hit opening post-processing (7), first big hit ending processing (8), first small hit opening pre-processing (9), first small hit opening middle processing (10), Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value corresponds to any one of the first small hitting end process (11) (step S06TM1000B). The value of the first special symbol process flag, the first big hit opening pretreatment (5), the first big hit opening processing (6), the first big hit opening post-processing (7), and the first big hit end processing (8), In addition, if the value corresponds to any one of the first small hit opening pre-processing (9), the first small hit opening processing (10), and the first small hit end processing (11), ( If YES in step S06TM1000B), the process ends.

On the other hand, the value of the first special symbol process flag, the first big hit opening pre-processing (5), the first big hit opening processing (6), the first big hit opening post-processing (7), and the first big hit end processing (8) ), the first small hitting opening pre-processing (9), the first small hitting opening processing (10), and the first small hitting end processing (11). In this case (NO in step S06TM1000B), the same process as the process after step 026IWS51B shown in FIG. 9-22 is executed.

In the process of step 026IWS52B described above, the CPU 103 transmits only the second customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control CPU 120, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the process of step 026IWS52B, the CPU 103 controls the effect control. The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and the production control command (low accuracy/non-KT background specification command, high accuracy/second KT background specification command, high) for specifying the background display corresponding to the current game state, for the CPU 120. Either a positive/first KT background designating command or a low probability/first KT background designating command) may be transmitted.

Thus, the CPU 103, in step S06TM1000B, based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, it is confirmed whether it is a period of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the first special If the period is being controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state based on the variable display result of the symbol (YES), the value of the second special symbol process flag, a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing By not updating from (0) to the value (1) indicating the second variation pattern setting process, the variation display of the second special symbol is not started.

If the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in the period of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, the second special symbol started When the variable display result of "is a big hit" or "a small hit" becomes a problem, the game control becomes complicated. As in the present embodiment, during the period of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, by not starting the variable display of the second special symbol, The game state is controlled appropriately. In addition, based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, when it is controlled to a state advantageous to the player (big hit game state, small hit game state), by not starting the variable display of the second special symbol, the game The player is concentrated on the game in the advantageous state.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-3, if the first reserved storage number is 0 in the first special symbol normal processing (YES in step 026IWS51A), the first customer waiting demo display designation command is for production control. The data is transmitted to the CPU 120 (step 026IWS52A). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4, if the second reserved storage number is 0 in the second special symbol normal processing (YES in step 026IWS51B), the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 026IWS52B).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 9-38 and 9-39, the production control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demo display designation command, and the game state is (i) low probability/non-KT state (normal). State) is controlled, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (the number of the first reserved memory is 0), and the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is not started. At this time, when the first demo standby timer times out, the image display device 5 starts the first demo display described later. On the other hand, when the game state is not controlled to (i) low-accuracy/non-KT state (normal state) ((ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high-accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) The first demo display is not started when the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received (while being controlled to either the high-accuracy/second KT state).

In the first demo display, the push button 31B is provided at the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 with the background image corresponding to the current game state ((i) low certainty/non-KT state (normal state)) as the background image. The operation prompt display 06TM050 for prompting the user to operate and the characters "menu" are displayed. When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B is operated while the operation prompting display 06TM050 is displayed, a menu screen including a volume adjusting bar and a light amount adjusting bar is displayed, and the stick controller 31A and the push button are displayed. The volume and light amount can be adjusted by operating 31B.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-38 and 9-39, the effect control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and the game state is (ii) low probability/first KT state, (iii). ) High-accuracy / 1st KT state, and (iv) high-accuracy / 2nd KT state, controlled to any state, the variable display of the second special symbol has not been started (second reserved memory number 0 If the second demonstration standby timer times out while the game state is continued, the image display device 5 starts the second demonstration display described later. In addition, in any of the game states (ii) to (iv), when the big hit game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol is started, the game ends once because the low probability/low base state is entered. Will be done. On the other hand, when the game state is not controlled to any of the game states (ii) to (iv) ((i) When controlled to the low certainty/non-KT state (normal state)), the second When the customer waiting demo display designation command is received, the second demo display is not started.

In the second demo display, a background corresponding to the current game state (any one of (ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high-accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high-accuracy/second KT state) With the image (any one of the cloudy image, the rain image, and the typhoon image) as a background, an operation prompting display 06TM050 and an operation prompting display 06TM050 that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B at the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 as in the first demo display. The word "Menu" is displayed. When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B is operated while the operation prompting display 06TM050 is displayed, a menu screen including a volume adjusting bar and a light amount adjusting bar is displayed, and the stick controller 31A and the push button are displayed. The volume and light amount can be adjusted by operating 31B.

In this way, the CPU 103 transmits the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command based on the first reserved memory number being 0 in the first special symbol normal processing, and the second reserved memory in the second special symbol normal processing. The second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the number is zero. That is, the CPU 103 transmits different customer waiting commands to the effect control CPU 120 depending on the special symbol. As a result, on the production control CPU 120 side, a customer waiting command corresponding to the current game state, that is, (i) a first customer waiting demo display designation command in the case of a low accuracy/non-KT state (normal state), (ii) ) Low accuracy/first KT status, (iii) high accuracy/first KT status, and (iv) high accuracy/second KT status), only when the second customer waiting demo display designation command is received. , It becomes possible to start the demo display, and it is possible to start the demo display at an appropriate timing according to the game state.

In the present embodiment, in both the first demo display and the second demo display, the operation prompt display 06TM050 and the word "menu" are displayed in the lower right part of the screen in any case, and the game state is displayed. Except for a different effect part (background image), a common effect mode is adopted when the first demo display is performed and when the second demo display is performed. Not limited to such a form, the first display and the second demonstration display may have different effect modes other than the effect part (background image) that differs depending on the game state.

For example, in the first demo display that is executed when the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received, the objects to be displayed in the demo display in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, operation prompt display 06TM050 and “menu”). Is displayed) while the second demo display is executed when the second customer waiting demo display designation command is received, the object displayed in the demo display at the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 (operation in this example). The promotion display 06TM050 and the character “menu” may be displayed. According to such a configuration, in each game state, the object is displayed in the hold display area corresponding to the special symbol which is the main symbol (for example, in the normal state, it corresponds to the first special symbol which is the main symbol). The object is displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011, and when the high-precision/second KT state, the object is displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021 corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol), It becomes easier for the player to recognize the current game state and the main symbol.

The display colors of the objects to be displayed may be different between the first demo display and the second demo display. For example, in the first demo display, the operation prompt display 06TM050 and the word "menu" are displayed in blue. Then, in the second demonstration display, the operation prompting display 06TM050 and the characters "menu" may be displayed in red. Also, the object itself (object shape) to be displayed may be different between the first demo display and the second demo display. For example, in the first demo display, an image imitating the push button 31B is used. An operation promotion display 06TM050 for prompting to operate 31B may be displayed, and an operation promotion display 06TM050 for prompting to operate the stick controller 31A, which is an image simulating the stick controller 31A, may be displayed in the second demo display.

(Starting prize during demo display)
Next, after the game state is controlled to the low-probability/non-KT state (normal mode), when the first demonstration display is being executed, it is a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and a small hit. An example of an effect when the game medium is started and won in the winning ball device 6A while being controlled to the game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first demo display and the starting winning prize, and FIG. 10-6 shows an example of the effect image related to the first demo display and the starting winning prize. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(1), when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/non-KT state (normal state), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, a "sunny image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. The effect control CPU 120 is executing the first demo display on the image display device 5, and displays the operation prompting display 06TM050 and the characters “menu” on the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, based on that the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 0, “0” is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, and the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025. "0" is displayed on.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display has been definitely stopped based on that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was “out”. The decorative design (2, 4, 7) is continuously displayed in the design display area (5L, 5C, 5R) even during the first demo display, and the small design (2, 4) when the variable display is fixedly stopped. , 7) is continuously displayed in the first small symbol display area (5l1, 5c1, 5r1).

On the other hand, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the fact that the variation display (small hit variation) of the second special symbol that is being executed is finished, and the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 have (1, 3, 3). 5) Make sure stop. That is, the combination of the second small symbol is fixedly stopped in response to the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol being "small hit", and the small hit game state is controlled (FIG. 10). Timing of T1 shown in -5). Here, since the gaming state is controlled to a low-probability/non-KT state (normal state) corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol, based on the variable display of the second special symbol as described later. Even if the small hit game state is controlled, the first demo display is continuously executed without being terminated.

Then, in the period when the small hitting game state is controlled based on the variable display of the second special symbol, a start winning is newly generated in the winning ball device 6A when the first demo display is continuously executed. Then, it is assumed that the number of first reserved memories is 1 (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-5). At this time, the CPU 103 sends a command indicating that the first number of pending storages has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 to display “1” based on the reception of the command indicating that the first reserved storage number has increased.

At this time, the CPU 103, when the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, in the first special symbol process process, executes the first start winning determination process, and executes the first special symbol normal process of step S110A (Figure 5). Here, as shown in FIG. 10-3 described above, when the small hitting game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol process flag is the second small symbol. Since the value corresponds to any one of the pre-hit opening process (9), the second small hit mid-during process (10), and the second small hit end process (11) (YES in step S06TM1000A), The value of the 1 special symbol process flag is not updated from the value (0) indicating the first special symbol normal process to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting process. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started even if the start winning to the first starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A) occurs. After that, the value of the second special symbol process flag is any of the second small hit opening pre-processing (9), the second small hit opening processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11). When the value corresponding to also disappears (NO in step S06TM1000A), the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value (1) indicating the first special symbol normal process to the first variation pattern setting process (1). ) Is updated, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-38, the effect control CPU 120 determines NO in step 026IWS4714, based on that the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and the small hit game state (second special Based on the fact that it is controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the symbol), NO is determined in step 026IWS4715, so the first demo display is not ended (step 026IWS4716 is not executed), and as a result The first demo display will be continuously executed. That is, while the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, even if the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6A occurs, the first demo display continues without being terminated. To execute.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the first demo display is being executed (when the main symbol is the first special symbol), it is controlled to the small hit game state based on the variable display of the second special symbol. When (when the value of the second special symbol process flag is in the range of 9 to 11), the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and whether or not the starting condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. Regardless of whether or not a winning has been made to the first start winning hole, the execution of the first demo display is continued. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is not started because it is controlled to the small hitting game state, the first demo display is immediately ended in response to the winning at the first starting winning opening. In that case, the player feels strange that the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started even though the demo display is finished. Therefore, in such a state, the player does not feel uncomfortable by not terminating the first demo display even if a winning in the first start winning opening occurs. In this way, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the situation of the variable display of the first special symbol.

Further, when the first demo display is executed, when the game state is controlled to the small hitting game state (small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol), the first starting winning opening When a prize is generated, the effect control CPU 120 causes a command related to the small hitting game state such as a small hit start designation command, and a set of commands corresponding to the winning at the first start winning opening (for example, a symbol designating command, a variation). The category command and the first reserved storage number addition designation command) will be continuously received in a short period of time. If it is attempted to execute an effect corresponding to each command in a short period of time in such a situation, effect control becomes complicated and the processing load of the effect control CPU 120 increases excessively. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first demonstration display is executed, when the gaming state is controlled to the small hitting gaming state (the small hitting gaming state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol), 1 Even if a winning at the starting winning opening occurs, the demonstration display that has already been executed is continued, and the notice effect corresponding to the new starting winning is not executed, thereby reducing the processing load of effect control. I am trying to do it.

In the present embodiment, when the first demo display is being executed, the value of the first special symbol process flag is the first during the period of being controlled in the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol. The value (0) indicating the special symbol normal process is not updated to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting process, and the process after the first special symbol normal process in the first special symbol process process does not proceed. As a result, the number of commands transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 is suppressed, and the processing load on the effect control CPU 120 can be reduced.

In addition, during the period of being controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, the variation start condition of the first special symbol cannot be established, but a new start winning award to the winning ball device 6A. When occurs, the CPU 103 executes the first start winning a prize determination process of step S101A. In the first start winning a prize determination process, a process of storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the first hold storage number is executed, and a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern. Is extracted and stored as the suspension information in the first suspension storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the first hold storage number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the winning a prize set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the command indicating that the first number of reserved memories has increased updates the value of the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 from “0” to “1”. In this way, when the variation start condition of the first special symbol cannot be satisfied, even if the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed, but the first hold By updating the value of the memory number special display area 06TM015, the player can recognize that at least the first start winning port has been won and the first reserved memory number has increased.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-6(2), even though the first number of reserved memories is changed from “0” to “1”, the first reserved display area 06TM011 has an object (a circular image). ) Is not displayed. That is, of the display areas in which the first number of reserved memories can be displayed, the first number of reserved memories (the number of objects corresponding to the first number of reserved memories) is not displayed in the highly visible first reserved display area 06TM011. The first reserved storage number is displayed only in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 with low visibility.

If, in this state, an object is displayed in the first hold display area 06TM011 in response to the occurrence of a winning in the first start winning hole, the player immediately displays a variable display of the decorative symbol based on the first hold memory ( It is expected that the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) will be executed, but in the state where the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the first hold display Although the object is displayed in the area 06TM011, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started (the object is not shifted to the active display area 06TM031 and does not become the active display 06TM030), which confuses the player. Therefore, the first reserved storage number 06TM0115 having a high visibility does not display the first reserved memory number (the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number), and the first reserved storage number special display region 06TM015 with a low visibility is displayed. By displaying the first reserved memory number only on, the updated first reserved memory number is appropriately notified without confusing the player.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (3), when the small hitting game state is finished and the gaming state is controlled to the low certainty/non-KT state, the variation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. Based, that is, the value of the second special symbol process flag is either the second small hit opening pre-processing (9), the second small hit opening during processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11). When the value corresponding to the process of (1) is no longer present (NO in step S06TM1000A), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-5).

At this time, based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (YES in step 026IWS4714 shown in FIG. 9-38), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first demo display (step 026IWS4716). As a result, the operation prompting display 06TM050 and the word "menu" in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 are hidden. On the other hand, the clear image, which is the background image corresponding to the current game state ((i) low probability/non-KT state (normal state)), is continuously displayed. In this way, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the “menu” which have a higher display priority than the background image (it seems to be displayed in front of the background image) The character “” is hidden, but the background image itself, which has a lower display priority than the first demo display (appears to be displayed behind the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the character “menu”), continues. Will be displayed. As a result, the player can start the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) before (when the first demo display is displayed) and after (the first symbol). 1 After the demo display is hidden), it is possible to easily understand that the game state has not changed.

The production control CPU 120 causes the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) to start variable display in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is displayed. Let it start. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control displays “0” in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 and displays the active display 06TM030 in the active display area 06TM031 as the first reserved storage number becomes 0. .. The active display 06TM030 displayed at this time is information corresponding to the pending storage based on the winning of the first starting winning opening which occurs when the first demo display is being executed. Further, with the completion of the first demonstration display, the first suspension display area 06TM011 has a number of first suspension displays 06TM010 corresponding to the number of the first suspension memories (the first suspension display 06TM010 generated when the first demonstration display is being executed). (1) Information corresponding to the pending storage based on winning at the starting winning opening) is displayed.

As shown above, the variation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied in response to the end of the small hitting game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 ends the first demo display. In this way, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the execution status of the variable display of the first special symbol.

In the present embodiment, when the second demo display is being executed, the second demo display is not terminated even when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the first special symbol. It is supposed to continue. Then, when the second demonstration display is executed, when the start winning to the second starting winning opening occurs within the period of being controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, The variable display of the second special symbol is not started, and the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 is updated from 0 to 1. At this time as well, the second demo display continues without ending, and no object (circular image) is displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021.

Specifically, when the second demo display is executed (the game state is (ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high-accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high-accuracy/second KT state , If any of the game state is controlled), in the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "9" ~ " Since it is determined to be YES in step S06TM1000B shown in FIG. 10-4 based on the range of "11", the value of the second special symbol process flag does not become a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process, The variable display of the second special symbol is not started. And, in this state (the second demo display is being executed and is being controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol), if the winning to the second starting winning opening occurs, the figure 9-39, step 026IWS4814 determines NO, further step 026IWS4815 determines YES, step 026IWS4816 is not executed, and the second demo display does not end.

Here, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the command indicating that the second number of reserved storages has increased, updates the value of the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 of the image display device 5 from “0” to “1”. To do. However, even though the number of second reserved memories is changed from "0" to "1", the object (circular image) is not displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. That is, of the display areas capable of displaying the second reserved storage number, the second reserved storage area 06TM021 having high visibility does not display the second reserved storage number (the number of objects corresponding to the second reserved storage number). The second reserved storage number is displayed only in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 having low visibility.

After that, the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol is ended, and the game state is (ii) low accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy. /Second KT state, when controlled to any game state, based on the fact that the variation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, that is, the value of the first special symbol process flag, the first small hit open When the value corresponding to any of the pre-processing (9), the first small hitting open processing (10), and the first small hitting end processing (11) has disappeared (NO in step S06TM1000B), the CPU 103 determines , The variable display of the second special symbol is started. At this time, based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (YES in step 026IWS4814 shown in FIG. 9-39), the effect control CPU 120 ends the second demo display (step 026IWS4816). As a result, the operation prompting display 06TM050 and the word "menu" in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 are hidden. On the other hand, a background image (cloudy) corresponding to the current game state (any one of (ii) low accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy/second KT state) The image, the rain image, or the typhoon image) will be continuously displayed.

In this way, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the “menu” which have a higher display priority than the background image (it seems to be displayed in front of the background image) The character “” is hidden, but the background image itself with a lower display priority than the second demo display (appears to be displayed behind the operation prompt display 06TM050 and the character “menu”) continues. Will be displayed. Thereby, the player starts before (when the second demo display is displayed) and (after the second demo display is displayed) the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol). 2 After the demo display is hidden), it is possible to easily understand that the game state has not changed.

The effect control CPU 120 causes the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) to start variable display in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In the second small symbol display area 51, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is displayed. Let it start. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the second reserved storage number to become 0, and causes the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 to display “0” and the active display area 06TM031 to display the active display 06TM030. .. The active display 06TM030 displayed at this time is information corresponding to the pending storage based on the winning of the second starting winning opening which occurs when the second demo display is being executed. In addition, with the completion of the second demonstration display, the second suspension display area 06TM021 has a second suspension display 06TM020 (the number of the second suspension display 06TM020 corresponding to the second suspension storage number). 2) Information corresponding to the pending storage based on the winning at the starting winning opening) is displayed.

(Special symbol variation interruption processing due to the small hit game state)
In the present embodiment, during the variation display of one special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the other special symbol, one of the The variable display of the special symbol is temporarily interrupted, and then, when the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the other special symbol ends, the variable display of the one special symbol is restarted. Hereinafter, the change suspension process and the change restart process of the special symbol due to the occurrence of the small hit will be specifically described.

FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first, if not yet transmitted, based on the determination result of whether to be a big hit, and the determination result of the big hit type, one of the display result designation command (display result 1 control command, display result 2 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 5 designation command) are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1120A).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the first fluctuation interruption flag is set (step S06TM1200A). If the first fluctuation interruption flag is not set (NO in step S06TM1200A), the processing proceeds to step 026IWS1121A and subsequent steps, and if the first fluctuation interruption flag is set (YES in step S06TM1200A), the processing ends. The first variation interruption flag is set when the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is the small hit symbol.

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (step 026IWS1121A), and when the first variation time timer times out (step 026IWS1122A), performs control to transmit the first symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 026IWS1123A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 026IWS1127A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 026IWS1124A). Whether or not the big hit symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (YES in step 026IWS1124A), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first compulsory symbol finalization designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S06TM1210A). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the small hitting symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step S06TM1220A).

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step S06TM1220A). Whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the second small hit flag that indicates a small hit is set on the basis of the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (YES in step S06TM1220A), the CPU 103 sets the first variation interruption flag (step S06TM1230A) and ends the process.

If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (NO in step S06TM1220A), the CPU 103 corresponds the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A). The value is updated to the specified value (step 026IWS1127A), and the process is terminated.

By performing the processing of step S06TM1200A, step S06TM1220A, and step S06TM1230A, in this characteristic part 06TM, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, 1 fluctuation interruption flag is set, the subtraction of the first fluctuation time timer (step 026IWS1121A) is not executed, and the value of the first special symbol process flag is not updated from the value of the first special symbol fluctuation processing, so the first special symbol The variable display of is interrupted.

In addition, by executing the processing of step 026IWS1124A, in this feature unit 06TM, if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. Is forcibly stopped, so that a situation in which a big hit occurs at the same time with the first special symbol and the second special symbol does not occur. In this case, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, when the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly deviated, the variable display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step 026IWS1120A. As for, the control is forcibly disengaged so that the symbols are stopped and displayed.

FIG. 10-8 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process (step S112B) in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first, if not yet transmitted, based on the determination result of whether to be a big hit, and the determination result of the big hit type, one of the display result designation command (display result 1 control command, display result 2 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 5 designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1120B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the second fluctuation interruption flag is set (step S06TM1200B). If the second fluctuation interruption flag is not set (NO in step S06TM1200B), the processing proceeds to step 026IWS1121B and subsequent steps. If the second fluctuation interruption flag is set (YES in step S06TM1200B), the processing is ended as it is. The second variation interruption flag is set when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is the small hit symbol.

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 026IWS1121B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 026IWS1122B), performs control to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 026IWS1123B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step S113B) (step 026IWS1127B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 026IWS1124B). Whether or not the big hit symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (YES in step 026IWS1124B), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second compulsory symbol finalization designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S06TM1210B). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the small hitting symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step S06TM1220B).

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step S06TM1220B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the first small hit flag that indicates a small hit is set on the basis of the variable display of the first special symbol.

If the small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (YES in step S06TM1220B), the CPU 103 sets the second variation interruption flag (step S06TM1230B) and ends the process.

If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (NO at step S06TM1220B), the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to the second special symbol stop process (step S113B). The updated value is updated (step 026IWS1127B), and the process ends.

By performing the processing of step S06TM1200B, step S06TM1220B, and step S06TM1230B, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, in this feature section 06TM, the first 2 fluctuation interruption flag is set, the subtraction of the second fluctuation time timer (step 026IWS1121B) is not executed, and the value of the second special symbol process flag is not updated from the value of the second special symbol fluctuation processing, so the second special symbol The variable display of is interrupted.

Further, by performing the processing of step 026IWS1124B, in this feature unit 06TM, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit during the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Is forcibly stopped, so that a situation in which a big hit occurs at the same time with the first special symbol and the second special symbol does not occur. In this case, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, when the variable display of the second special symbol is forcedly disengaged, the variable display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step 026IWS1120B. As for, the control is forcibly disengaged so that the symbols are stopped and displayed.

FIG. 10-9 is a flowchart showing a first small hitting end process (step S121A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first small hit completion processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit completion display timer is set (step 026IWS2300A), and when the small hit completion display timer is set, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 026IWS2304A. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the first small hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2301A), and when the second fluctuation interruption flag is set, the second fluctuation interruption flag is reset (step S06TM1300A). , Control for transmitting a small hit end designation command (step 026IWS2302A). Then, the small hit end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) (step 026IWS2303A), and the processing is executed. finish.

In step 026IWS2304A, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 026IWS2304A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305A). If not, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (YES in step 026IWS2305A), the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) (step 026IWS2309A). ).

FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing a second small hit completion process in the second special symbol process process. In the second small hit completion processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit completion display timer is set (step 026IWS2300B), and when the small hit completion display timer is set, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 026IWS2304B. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the second small hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2301B), and if the first fluctuation interruption flag is set, the first fluctuation interruption flag is reset (step S06TM1300B). , Control for transmitting a small hit end designation command (step 026IWS2302B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) is set in the small hit end display timer (step 026IWS2303B), and the processing is executed. finish.

In step 026IWS2304B, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer (step 026IWS2304B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305B). If not, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (YES in step 026IWS2305B), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 026IWS2306B). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 026IWS2307B), and right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the striking and lighting end designation command is performed (step 026IWS2308B).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 026IWS2309B).

By performing the processing of step S06TM1300A, in this characteristic part 06TM, when the small hitting game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol ends, the second variation interruption flag is reset, and is shown in FIG. 10-8. As described above, by determining NO in step S06TM1200B, the suspended variable display of the second special symbol is restarted. Similarly, when the small hitting game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol ends, the first variation interruption flag is reset, and as shown in FIG. 10-7, it is determined as NO in step S06TM1200A. The variable display of the suspended first special symbol is restarted.

Next, after the game state is controlled to high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH mode), or low accuracy/first KT state (time saving mode), the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes “small hit” An example of an effect when the small hitting game state is controlled will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12.

FIG. 10-11(A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the small hit that occurs when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH mode), FIGS. 10-12 (A1) to (A5) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image related to a small hit that occurs when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH mode). Is. In addition, FIG. 10-11 (B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the small hit that occurs when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state (time saving mode), FIGS. 10-12 (B1) to (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect image associated with the small hit that occurs when the game state is controlled to the low-accuracy/first KT state (time saving mode). ..

[Small hits Small hits in RUSH mode]
First, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the small hit RUSH mode. When the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode, the "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the CPU 120 for effect control, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. , The decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second of the image display device 5 are displayed. In the small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area 5l1 and the first small symbol display area 5c1 of the image display device 5 are executed. , And in the first small symbol display area 5r1, variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-11(A)). ).

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 to display “0”, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 06TM031 displays the active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 06TM021 displays four second reserved display 06TM020.

When in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1), the image display device 5 displays a small hit continuous number display 1 indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state. At the same time, the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 1 indicating the number of prize balls generated during the period in which the small hits continuously occur in the second KT state is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that after the 16R probability variable big hit occurs and the state is shifted to the second KT state, the small hits have occurred 9 times so far, and as shown in FIG. The case where characters such as "9th time" are displayed as the number display 1 is shown. Also, during the big hit game based on the first 16R probability variation big hit, 15 × 10 balls × 16 rounds = 2400 prize balls are obtained, and after that, 10 × 3 balls = 30 prize balls are obtained for each small hit. Based on the fact that 30×9=270 prize balls have been obtained by the occurrence of nine small hits, a total of 2670 prize balls have been obtained, and FIG. 10-12 (A1) As shown in, the case where characters such as "2670pt" are displayed as the small winning continuous award ball number display 1 is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 causes the design display area 5L of the image display device 5 to have a decorative design "1", and the design display area 5C to have a decorative design "3", and The decorative symbol "5" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R, the second small symbol "1" is displayed in the second small symbol display area 512 of the image display device 5, and the second small symbol is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5c2. "3", and the second small symbol display area 5r2 is confirmed to stop the second small symbol "5" (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-11). That is, the combination of the decorative symbol and the second small symbol whose variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit" is definitely stopped, and the small hit game state is controlled. Further, the occurrence of the small hit is notified by displaying the character "small hit!!" on the upper part of the image display device 5. Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small hit continuous number display 1 to "10th time" since the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

Next, during the period when the game state is controlled to the small hitting game state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open (the period from T2 to T3 shown in FIG. 10-11(A)), FIG. ), the production control CPU 120 erases the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 and the four second reserved display 06TM020 displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021, and displays the image. The device 5 is caused to display the character and the line "Small hit attacker is open!"

Next, during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, three gaming balls are won in the special winning opening, and the number of winning balls is further increased by 10 balls×3 balls=30 balls to reach 2700 balls in total. I shall. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4), the effect control CPU 120 is a period from the closing of the special variable winning ball device 17 to the end of the small hit game state (FIG. 10-11 (A)). During the small hit ending period (T3 to T4), the character and the line of "30pt GET! .. Further, in this example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period in the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode) is set to 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A5), when the gaming state is controlled from the small hitting gaming state to the high-accuracy/second KT state, and the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the effect control CPU 120 In the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative symbols is started, and the second small symbol display area 512 and the second small symbol of the image display device 5 are started. In the display area 5c2 and the second small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol is started (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-11).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 06TM030 in the active display area 06TM031 and activates the second reserved display 06TM020 in the second reserved display area 06TM021 as the number of the second reserved storages becomes 3. One is shifted to the display area 06TM031 side, and “3” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the combination of the second small symbols whose variable display result of the second special symbol is “small hit” is fixedly stopped, the CPU 103 uses the second special symbol in the first special symbol variation process. Since the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed (YES in step S06TM1220A), the first variation interruption flag is set (step S06TM1230A), and the process ends. Then, in step S06TM1200A of the subsequent first special symbol variation processing, based on that the first variation interruption flag is set, the processing of step 026IWS1121A and subsequent steps is not executed, and the processing is ended as it is (YES in step S06TM1200A). ). That is, while the first variation interruption flag is set, the variation display of the first special symbol is suspended because the first variation timer is not subtracted.

When the small hit game state ends, in the second small hit end processing, the CPU 103 executes the processing of step 026IWS2301A and subsequent steps based on the fact that the small hit end display timer is not operating, and interrupts the first fluctuation in step S06TM1300A. The first variation interruption flag is reset because the flag is set.

Since the first variation interruption flag has been set, the CPU 103 executes the processing after 026IWS1121A based on that the first variation interruption flag is not set in step S06TM1200A in the first special symbol variation processing ( (No in step S06TM1200A). That is, when the first fluctuation interruption flag is reset, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is restarted because the first fluctuation timer is subtracted.

Therefore, in the second KT state, regarding the variable display of the first special symbol, in the period from the timing when the gaming state is controlled to the small hitting gaming state to the timing when the small hitting gaming state ends (FIG. 10-11(A)). In the period of T2 to T4 shown), the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily suspended, and at the timing when the small hitting game state ends (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-11(A)), The variable display of the first special symbol is restarted. In this example, the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) is the original timing at which the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed ends, but the period during which the small hit game state is controlled ( In the period of T2 to T4 shown in FIG. 10-11), since the variable display of the first special symbol was suspended, the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol is the variable display of the first special symbol. 10 is extended by the period (the period from T2 to T4 shown in FIG. 10-11(A)) (from the timing of T5 to the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 10-11(A)).

[Small hits in time saving mode]
First, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B1), when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the time saving RUSH mode. When the effect mode is the time saving mode, the "cloudy image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the CPU 120 for effect control, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. , The decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second of the image display device 5 are displayed. In the small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area 5l1 and the first small symbol display area 5c1 of the image display device 5 are executed. , And in the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the sub symbol) is executed (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-6(B)). ).

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 to display “0”, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 06TM031 displays the active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 06TM021 displays four second reserved display 06TM020.

When in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B1), in the image display device 5, the small hit continuous number display 1 and the small hit continuous middle prize shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1). The ball count display 1 is not displayed. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-9(1) to 9-11(1), in the first KT state, the opening time of the downstream special variable winning ball device 17 is 0.2 seconds and 0.8. The open time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds, while it is as short as 2 seconds or 1.8 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a special winning opening (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 variable displays), so a small hit is continuous. The number display 1 and the small winning continuous award ball number display 1 are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 causes the design display area 5L of the image display device 5 to have a decorative design "1", and the design display area 5C to have a decorative design "3", and The decorative symbol "5" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R, the second small symbol "1" is displayed in the second small symbol display area 512 of the image display device 5, and the second small symbol is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5c2. "3", and the second small symbol display area 5r2 is determined to stop the second small symbol "5" (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-6(B)). That is, the combination of the second small symbols for which the display result of the second special symbol is "small hit" is definitely stopped, and the small hit game state is controlled.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first KT state is controlled, even if a small hit occurs, it is extremely rare for the game ball to win the special winning opening, so the second special symbol. Even if the variation display result of "is a small hit", it is not necessary to notify the player that a small hit has occurred. Therefore, during the first KT state, when the display result of the second special symbol is "small hit", the combination of the second small symbol whose variable display result of the decorative symbol and the second small symbol is "small hit" Although (135, etc. in this example) is fixedly stopped, the character "small hit!!" is not displayed above the fixedly-decorated decorative pattern. That is, unlike the second KT state in which the player is informed of the occurrence of the small hit easily by displaying the character "small hit!!" on the upper portion of the decorative pattern which is definitely stopped, the first KT By not displaying characters such as "small hit!" during the state, it is difficult for the player to understand the occurrence of the small hit. According to such a configuration, during the first KT state, even if the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit", it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit has occurred, and the first KT Even if a small hit occurs during the state, the player is prevented from having excessive expectations.

Next, in the period when the gaming state is controlled to the small hitting gaming state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open (the period from T2 to T3 shown in FIG. 10-11(B)), FIG. 10-12 (B3). As shown in FIG. 5, the effect control CPU 120 causes the design display area 5L of the image display device 5 to have a decorative design "1", the design display area 5C to have a decorative design "3", and the design display area 5R to have a decorative design ". 5” is fixedly stopped, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 and the four second reserved display 06TM020 displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021 are erased. Further, in this example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period in the first KT state is set to 0.5 seconds.

Next, when the gaming state is controlled from the small hitting gaming state to the low-probability/first KT state, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B4), the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, In the symbol display area 5C and the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the second small symbol display area 51, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area of the image display device 5 are started. At 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol is started (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-11(B)).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 06TM030 in the active display area 06TM031 and activates the second reserved display 06TM020 in the second reserved display area 06TM021 as the number of the second reserved storages becomes 3. One is shifted to the display area 06TM031 side, and “3” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025.

Further, as described above, even during the first KT state, with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol, the period from the timing when the gaming state is controlled to the small hitting gaming state to the timing when the small hitting gaming state ends (FIG. 10). During the period from T2 to T4 shown in -11(B), the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily suspended, and at the timing when the small hitting game state ends (shown in FIG. 10-11(B)). (At the timing of T4), the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted. In this example, the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-11(B) is the original timing at which the variable display of the first special symbol being executed ends, but the period during which the small hit game state is controlled ( In period (T2 to T4 shown in FIG. 10-11B), since the variable display of the first special symbol was suspended, the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol is the variable display of the first special symbol. 10B is extended by the period (the period from T2 to T4 shown in FIG. 10-11B) (from the timing of T5 to the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 10-11B).

In this way, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win the special winning opening in the small hitting game state, so an effect (character display of "small hitting!!") that emphasizes the small hitting control is executed. Instead, the small hit ending period is made shorter than that in the second KT state. On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the special winning opening in the small hitting game state, an effect that emphasizes the small hitting control (character display of "small hitting!!") is executed and The small hit ending period is made longer than that in the 1KT state. In this example, the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period is 3 seconds in the second KT state.

As described above, the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol is "small hit", and when the small hit game state is controlled, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. Suspended. The small hit ending period in the first KT state is 0.5 seconds, while the small hit ending period in the second KT state is 3 seconds. Here, in the first KT state and the second KT state, when the small hit of the same type occurs, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is common (for example, in the case of the small hit B, 0.8 seconds). Therefore, in the second KT state, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted for [0.8 seconds+3 seconds=3.8 seconds], while in the first KT state, the variable display of the first special symbol is Pause for [0.8 seconds + 0.5 seconds = 1.3 seconds].

In this way, in the first KT state in which the degree of expectation of winning at the special winning opening is low, the interruption time of variable display can be made shorter than in the second KT state in which the degree of expecting winning of prize at the special winning opening is high. If a small hit ending period common to the second KT state is provided in the first KT state, the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is not executed, and the first special prize is low even though the expectation of winning the special winning opening is low. Due to the fact that the variable display of symbols is interrupted for a long period (for example, 3.8 seconds), there is a large mismatch between the variable display time of the first special symbol and the effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. This will give the player a feeling of strangeness. As in the present embodiment, by setting the small hitting ending period in the first KT state to a time shorter than the small hitting ending period in the second KT state, the variable display time of the first special symbol in the first KT state and the first It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by suppressing inconsistency with the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol.

(Production control when a big hit occurs)
Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are simultaneously executed in parallel, regarding the effect control when the variable display result of one of the special symbols is "big hit" , FIG. 10-13 and FIG. 10-14.

10-13(A), the gaming state is controlled to a low-probability/non-KT state (normal mode), and the display result of the first special symbol is "big hit", so that the second special symbol It is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the display result is forcibly set to “out”. 10-14 (A1) ~ (A4), the gaming state is controlled to low probability / non-KT state (normal mode), the display result of the first special symbol is "big hit" , Is an explanatory view showing an example of the effect image when the display result of the second special symbol is forcibly "disappeared".

Further, FIG. 10-13 (B), the game state is controlled to the low-probability/non-KT state (normal mode), and the display result of the second special symbol is "big hit", so the first special It is the time chart which shows the execution timing of each production when the display result of the design is forcibly set to “out”. 10-14 (B1) ~ (B4), the game state is controlled to low probability / non-KT state (normal mode), the display result of the second special symbol is "big hit" , Is an explanatory view showing an example of the effect image when the display result of the first special symbol is forcibly "disappeared".

(When the second special symbol is forced out)
First, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A1), when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/non-KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, a "sunny image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. Here, it is assumed that the CPU 103 has started the variable display of the first special symbol while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed. In response to this, the CPU 120 for effect control, in the second small symbol display area 51, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (sub symbol) In the state in which the variable display of the second special symbol) is being executed, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (with the main symbol) While starting the variable display of information corresponding to a certain first special symbol), in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the image display device 5, The variable display of one small symbol is started (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-13(A)).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays “0” in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 based on that the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 0. Is displayed, and “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025. An active display 06TM030 is displayed in the active display area 06TM031.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 displays “2” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state, and the letters "REACH!!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 (timing T2 in FIG. 10-13(A)). At this time, in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol is continued. That is, in the first small symbol display area 5l1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the first small symbol display area 5r1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, The first small symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body operation effect of moving the movable body 06TM100 from the tilted position to the standing position while continuing the reach state, and at the same time, moves the movable body. The effect effect of superimposing and displaying the flame effect image 06TM150 around the 06TM100 is executed (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-13(A)). The flame effect image 06TM150 is an image having a higher display priority (the display layer is higher) than the background image and the decorative pattern, so that it is displayed from the player in front of the background image and the decorative pattern. appear.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an operation of returning the movable body 06TM100 in the standing position to the tilted position, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4) (T4 shown in FIG. 10-13(A)). As a result, the movable body motion effect is finished, and the decorative design "2" is displayed in the design display area 5L, the decorative design "2" is displayed in the decorative design display area 5C, and the decorative design "2" is displayed in the decorative design display area 5R. Confirm stop, the first small symbol display area 5l1 of the first small symbol "2", the first small symbol display area 5c1 the first small symbol "2", and the first small symbol display area 5r1 the first small symbol The symbol "2" is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of the decorative design and the first small design in which the display result of the first special design is "big hit" is fixedly stopped. Then, the occurrence of the big hit is notified by displaying the characters "big hit!!" on the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-8 described above, in the second special symbol variation process, if the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (YES in step 026IWS1124B), for effect control The control for transmitting the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the CPU 120 is performed (step S06TM1210B), and the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be forced out. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4), the production control CPU 120 that has received the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command, in the second small symbol display area 512, the second small symbol “7”, the second small symbol. The second small symbol "8" in the symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol "2" in the second small symbol display area 5r2 are fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of the second small symbols for which the display result of the second special symbol is “out” is fixedly stopped.

(When the first special symbol is forced out)
First, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B1), when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/non-KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, a "sunny image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. Here, it is assumed that the CPU 103 has started the variable display of the first special symbol while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed. In response to this, the CPU 120 for effect control, in the second small symbol display area 51, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (sub symbol) In the state in which the variable display of the second special symbol) is being executed, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (with the main symbol) While starting the variable display of information corresponding to a certain first special symbol), in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the image display device 5, The variable display of one small symbol is started (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-13(B)).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays “0” in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 based on that the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 0. Is displayed, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025. Further, the active display area 06TM031 displays the active display area 06TM030.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 displays “2” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state, and the letters "REACH!!" are displayed on the upper portion of the image display device 5 (timing T2 in FIG. 10-13(B)). At this time, in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol is continued. That is, in the first small symbol display area 5l1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the first small symbol display area 5r1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, The first small symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B3), at a timing to execute a blackout effect described later in the variation pattern of the second special symbol (T3 shown in FIG. 10-13 (B)). (At the timing of), the blackout effect is executed in the image display device 5. With the blackout effect in the present embodiment, the visibility of the background image, the decorative design, and the reach effect image is reduced by displaying the darkened image 06TM200 as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. It is a production that makes it difficult to see. In the present embodiment, the background image and the decorative pattern are in a visually difficult state by executing the blackout effect.

Here, due to the blackout effect, the decorative pattern is in a visually difficult state, but the first small symbol and the second small symbol remain visible. That is, the visibility of the decorative design of "2" stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R, and the decorative pattern variably displayed in the symbol display area 5C is reduced, while the first small The first small symbol that is variably displayed in the symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, and the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, And the visibility of the second small symbol that is variably displayed in the second small symbol display area 5r2 is not deteriorated.

Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B4), at a timing when the display result of the second special symbol that was performing the variable display is “big hit” (FIG. 10-13 (B)). At the timing of T4 shown in (1), the occurrence of the big hit is notified by displaying the characters "FEVER" in the central portion (the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5. Then, the second small symbol display area 5l2 has a second small symbol "7", the second small symbol display area 5c2 has a second small symbol "7", and the second small symbol display area 5r2 has a second small symbol. "7" is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of the decorative design and the second small design in which the display result of the second special design is "big hit" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-7 described above, in the first special symbol variation process, if the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (YES in step 026IWS1124A), for effect control The control for transmitting the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the CPU 120 is performed (step S06TM1210A), and the variable display of the first special symbol is controlled to be forced out. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the first compulsory symbol determination designation command, the first small symbol "2", the first small symbol in the first small symbol display area 5l1. The first small symbol "4" in the symbol display area 5c1 and the first small symbol "7" in the first small symbol display area 5r1 are fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of the first small symbols for which the display result of the first special symbol is “out” is fixedly stopped.

As shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4), when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative pattern is "big hit", the combination of the decorative symbols to be a big hit ("222" in this example) ) Is being performed while the effect of stopping display is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B4), when the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is "big hit", the big hit The occurrence of the big hit is notified by displaying the character "FEVER" without executing the effect of stopping and displaying the combination of the decorative patterns. Temporarily, the special design corresponding to the decorative design (main design) is switched from one special design to the other special design during the variable display (for example, switching from the first special design to the second special design). If it is executed, it becomes unclear which special symbol the display result is, and the player may mistakenly recognize it. Therefore, when the display result of the variable display of the special symbol (sub symbol) that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is a big hit, by not performing the effect of displaying the combination of the decorative symbols that are the big hit, the display result of any special symbol It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing whether it was a big hit.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A3) and (A4), when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol (main symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol is “big hit”, the movable body 06TM100 is tilted. While performing the movable body motion effect to move from the position to the standing position, as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (B3) and (B4), the variation of the second special symbol (sub symbol) that does not correspond to the decorative symbol When the display result of the display is “big hit”, the movable body motion effect is not executed. According to such a configuration, a player who is not paying attention to the variable display of the decorative symbol has an irregular timing (in this example, the first special symbol which is the main symbol is a sub symbol during the variable symbol display). It is possible to prevent the interest of the movable body motion production with high expectation from being lowered by the movable body motion production being executed at the timing when the variable display result of the 2 special symbols becomes “big hit”). ..

(Process when power is restored)
Next, the processing when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from the power failure will be specifically described. In this embodiment, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started after the power is turned off, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. As shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103, in the process of command transmission at the time of restoration in the game control main process (step S7), specifies that the power has been restored from the power failure (designates to display the restoration screen). The 1 designation command, and the first reserve storage number designation command and the second reserve storage number designation command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed when the power is turned off, in addition to the above command, a display designating the display result of the variable display of the special symbol that has been executed A result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 8 designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

Next, when the CPU 103 executes the process of interrupt permission (step S12) in the game control main process, it enters a loop process. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

Then, the CPU 103, in the command control processing (step S27) in the timer interrupt processing for game control, data indicating the game status backed up in the RAM 102 when the power is turned off (game status, and variation status of the first special symbol and A set of commands according to the second special symbol variation condition, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 within one interruption. These commands include a customer-waiting demo designation command (first customer-waiting demo display designation command, second customer-waiting demo display designation command) that designates the first customer waiting state or the second customer waiting state, and the game state. Background designation command (low-confidence/non-KT background designation command, low-precision/first KT background designation command, high-precision/first KT background designation command, high-precision/second KT background designation command) that specifies the corresponding background display, and a pattern Confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command) and the like are included.

In the following description, on the restoration screen displayed on the image display device 5, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol, (2) the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol, and (3) each production symbol (decoration) The design, the first small design, the second small design) and the background image are displayed in a superimposed manner. Regarding these images (1) to (3), the image with the highest display priority (the image that appears to be displayed closest to the front) is the (1) restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and the display priority is The second highest image (the image that appears to be displayed behind (1) in front of (3)) is a restored image corresponding to the (2) sub-pattern and has the highest display priority. The low image (the image that seems to be displayed at the back) is (3) each effect design and background image.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery 1 designation command, it performs display control of both (1) a restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) a restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol. .. In the present embodiment, the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol is an image in which the characters "power failure is being restored" are displayed on the entire screen, so (1) when the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol is displayed, The restoration image corresponding to the (2) sub symbol having a lower display priority than that is in a state in which the player cannot visually recognize it. As a result, the recovery screen becomes the one in which the characters "recovering power failure" are displayed on the entire screen (similar to situation 2 and situation 6 shown in FIG. 10-18 described later).

10-15 shows an example of a command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 when the power is restored. These commands are, as described above, the power failure recovery 1 designation command, the first reserved storage number designation command and the second reserved storage number designation command, and the display result designation command and the second special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Is sent by interrupt processing after sending the display result specification command corresponding to. In addition, in FIG. 10-15, a typical situation is shown as a change situation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of power-off, but the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of power-off. It is also possible to send commands corresponding to other situations.

"Situation 1" of FIG. 10-15 shows the situation when the second special symbol is in the second customer waiting state and the first special symbol is in the first customer waiting state as the fluctuation situation at the time of power off. There is. In the case of “Situation 1”, the CPU 103 performs the same order as the background designation command→the second customer waiting demo display designation command→the background designation command→the first customer waiting demo display designation command in the same interrupt process when the power is restored. Each command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Based on the background designation command, the CPU 120 for effect control controls the game state ((i) low-accuracy/non-KT state (normal state), (ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, and (iii) high-accuracy/second) based on the background designation command. It is possible to specify 1 KT state, (iv) high accuracy/second KT state). It should be noted that the first customer waiting demo display designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the number of first holding memories when the power is turned off is 0, and the second customer waiting demo display designating command is the second holding memory when the power is turned off. Sent based on the number being zero.

"Situation 2" of FIG. 10-15 is, as the fluctuation status at the time of power-off, the second special symbol is in the second customer waiting state, the first special symbol is being variably displayed, and the remaining time of the variability display is 8 ms. The situation when it is above is shown. In the case of “Situation 2”, the CPU 103 transmits each command to the effect control CPU 120 in the order of the background designation command→the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command in the same interrupt process when the power is restored.

"Situation 3" of FIG. 10-15 shows that the second special symbol is in the second customer waiting state, the first special symbol is being variably displayed, and the remaining time of the variably displaying is 4 ms. It shows the situation when. In the case of "Situation 3", the CPU 103 controls each command in the same interrupt process when the power is restored, in the order of background designation command -> second customer waiting demonstration display designation command -> first symbol confirmation designation command It is transmitted to the CPU 120. CPU120 for production control, based on receiving the background designating command and the first special symbol confirmation designating command, when the first special symbol is the main symbol, the decorative symbol and the first small symbol are fixedly stopped. If the first special symbol is a sub symbol, the first small symbol is fixedly stopped.

"Situation 4" of FIG. 10-15 is, as the fluctuation status at the time of power-off, the second special symbol is being variably displayed and the remaining time of the variability display is 8 ms or more, and the first special symbol is waiting for the first customer. It shows the situation when it is in a state. In the case of “Situation 4”, the CPU 103 transmits each command to the effect control CPU 120 in the order of background designation command→first customer waiting demo display designation command in the same interrupt process when the power is restored.

"Situation 5" of FIG. 10-15 is, as the fluctuation status at the time of power-off, the second special symbol is being variably displayed and the remaining time of the variability display is 4 ms, and the first special symbol is the first customer waiting state. It shows the situation when. In the case of "Situation 5", the CPU 103 controls the production of the respective commands in the order of the second symbol confirmation designation command -> background designation command -> the first customer waiting demo display designation command in the same interrupt process when the power is restored. It is transmitted to the CPU 120.

"Situation 6" of FIG. 10-15 is, as the fluctuation state at the time of power-off, the second special symbol is being variably displayed and the remaining time of the variability display is 8 ms or more, and the first special symbol is being variably displayed. It shows the situation when there is and the remaining time of the variable display is 8 ms or more. In the case of "Situation 6", the CPU 103 does not transmit the command to the effect control CPU 120 in the interrupt process at the time of power restoration.

(Recovery screen)
10-15 shows an example of a restoration screen displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is restored. The effect control CPU 120 can display a different type of recovery screen depending on each of the above-mentioned “situation 1” to “situation 6” game situations. In the example shown in FIG. 10-15, the gaming state at the time of power failure is controlled to a low accuracy/non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second symbol. This is an example of the case where the special design is used.

In the case of “Situation 1”, the production control CPU 120 turns off the power based on the reception of the low-accuracy/non-KT background designating command, the first customer waiting demo display designating command, and the second customer waiting demo display designating command. It is possible to specify that the game state at the time of occurrence is a low probability/non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. Further, since the variable display of the main symbol is not executed and the variable display of the sub symbol is also not executed, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is not executed, and (2 ) The display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol is not executed, and (3) only the display control of each production design (decorative design, the first small design, the second small design) and the background image is executed.

That is, the CPU 120 for effect control displays a "sunny image" as the background image of the decorative pattern, and causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 to deviate from the decorative pattern at the time of restoration (in the present example, in this example). "247") is displayed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, a deviating symbol ("247" in this example) is displayed as the first small symbol at the time of restoration, and the image is displayed. In the second small symbol display areas 512, 5c2, 5r2 of the device 5, a deviating symbol ("152" in this example) is displayed as the second small symbol at the time of restoration. Further, "0" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 based on the first reserved memory number being 0, and the second reserved memory number is based on the second reserved memory number being 0. "0" is displayed in the memory number special display area 06TM025.

In the case of “Situation 2”, the effect control CPU 120 receives the low-accuracy/non-KT background designating command and the second customer waiting demo display designating command, and the game state at the time of power failure is low/non-determining. In the KT state (normal state), it is possible to specify that the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. Also, since the variable display of the main symbol is being executed and the variable display of the sub symbol is not being executed, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is executed, and (2) the sub Display control of the restored image corresponding to the design is not executed, and (3) display control of each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image is executed.

CPU120 for production control, (1) display control of the restoration image corresponding to the main design, and (3) display control of each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image. As a result of execution, the display priority is high and is displayed over the entire screen (1) Only the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is displayed on the screen. In other words, the characters “power off recovery is in progress” are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

In the case of "Situation 3", the production control CPU 120 turns off the power based on the reception of the low probability/non-KT background designating command, the second customer waiting demonstration display designating command, and the first symbol designating confirming designating command. It is possible to specify that the game state at the time of occurrence is a low probability/non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. In addition, it is the timing to fix the main symbol (that is, the timing to display the decorative symbol in the fixed stopped state and the first small symbol in the fixed stopped state), and the variable display of the sub symbol is not executed. Therefore, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is not executed, (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol is not executed, and (3) each production symbol (decoration) Only the display control of the design, the first small design, the second small design) and the background image is executed.

That is, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the "sunny image" as the background image of the decorative design, and leaves the state in which it is fixedly stopped as the decorative design at the time of restoration in the design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. A symbol (“247” in this example) is displayed, and the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5 is in the stopped state as the first small symbol at the time of restoration. "247") is displayed, and the second small symbol display area 51, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5 displays the deviating symbol ("152" in this example) as the second small symbol at the time of restoration. Further, "0" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 based on the first reserved memory number being 0, and the second reserved memory number is based on the second reserved memory number being 0. "0" is displayed in the memory number special display area 06TM025.

In the case of "Situation 4", the production control CPU 120 receives the low-accuracy/non-KT background designating command and the first customer waiting demo display designating command, and the gaming state at the time of power failure is low/non-determining. In the KT state (normal state), it is possible to specify that the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. Further, since the variable display of the main symbol is not executed and the variable display of the sub symbol is being executed, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is not executed, and (2 ) Display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol is executed, and (3) display control of each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image is executed.

CPU120 for production control, (2) display control of the restoration image corresponding to the sub design, and (3) display control of each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image. As a result of execution, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and the background image are displayed in a superimposed manner. Here, the image whose display priority is high is (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, but the display range of the restored image corresponding to the (2) sub symbol is the display range of the sub symbol (in the case of the first small symbol) Is limited to the upper left part of the screen, and the upper right part of the screen in the case of the second small symbol), so except for the part of the restored image corresponding to the sub-pattern (the upper right part of the screen in this example), (3) each effect The design (decorative design and first small design) and the background image can be visually recognized. As a result, the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen which is the display range of the second small symbol) is displayed as "restoring", and the other parts are each production symbols. (Decorative pattern and first small pattern) and the background image will be displayed.

In the case of "Situation 5", the production control CPU 120 receives the second symbol confirmation designating command, the low probability/non-KT background designating command, and the first customer waiting demonstration display designating command, and the power is cut off. It is possible to specify that the gaming state is a low probability/non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. In addition, since the variable display of the main symbol is not executed, it is the timing to fix the sub symbol (that is, the timing to display the second small symbol in the fixed stop state), (1) the main symbol The display control of the restoration image corresponding to the is not executed, (2) the display control of the restoration image corresponding to the sub-symbol is not executed, and (3) each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) Only the display control of the pattern) and the background image is executed.

That is, the CPU 120 for effect control displays a "sunny image" as the background image of the decorative pattern, and causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 to deviate from the decorative pattern at the time of restoration (in the present example, in this example). "247") is displayed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, a deviating symbol ("247" in this example) is displayed as the first small symbol at the time of restoration, and the image is displayed. In the second small symbol display areas 512, 5c2, 5r2 of the device 5, an outlying symbol (“152” in this example) in a fixed stop state is displayed as the second small symbol at the time of restoration. Further, "0" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 based on the first reserved memory number being 0, and the second reserved memory number is based on the second reserved memory number being 0. "0" is displayed in the memory number special display area 06TM025.

In the case of "Situation 6", the CPU 120 for effect control does not receive the command, so it is impossible to specify the game state at the time of power failure, and the main symbol and the sub symbol. Therefore, based on the reception of the power failure recovery 1 designation command, the display control of both (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol is being executed. Then, as described above, (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol having a lower display priority than this are superimposed and displayed, and as a result, the restoration screen is the screen. The word "Recovery from power failure" is displayed on the whole.

In this example, when the power is cut off, the game state is controlled to be in the low-probability/non-KT state. If the KT state is controlled to any one of the second KT state, the high-accuracy/first KT state, and the low-probability/first KT state, the background designation command corresponding to each KT state is transmitted. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the background designation command can specify that the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol together with the game state (which KT state it is). Is.

For example, the gaming state is controlled to a high-precision/second KT state, the variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol is not executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol which is the sub symbol is executed. If the power is cut off while the power is on, this corresponds to the case shown in “Situation 2” of FIG. 10-15. In this case, the production control CPU 120 does not execute (1) display control of the restoration image corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol, and (2) restoration image corresponding to the first special symbol which is the sub symbol. Display control is executed, and (3) display control of each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (typhoon image in this example) is executed.

CPU120 for production control, (2) display control of the restoration image corresponding to the sub design, and (3) display control of each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image. As a result of execution, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and the background image are displayed in a superimposed manner. Here, the image whose display priority is high is (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, but the display range of the restored image corresponding to the (2) sub symbol is the display range of the sub symbol (in the case of the first small symbol) Is limited to the upper left part of the screen, the upper right part of the screen in the case of the second small symbol), except for the part of the restored image corresponding to the sub-pattern (the upper left part of the screen in this example), (3) each effect The usage pattern (decorative pattern and second small pattern) and the background image (typhoon image in this example) can be visually recognized. As a result, the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper left part of the screen which is the display range of the first small symbol) is displayed as "restoring", and the other parts are each production symbols. The (decorative pattern and the second small pattern) and the background image are displayed.

In this way, the CPU 103, when restored from the power cut, the game state when the power cut occurs, and the command for specifying the fluctuation status of the first special symbol and the fluctuation status of the second special symbol. The set can be transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the set of the commands is different depending on the game state specified based on the set of the commands, and the changing situation of the first special symbol and the changing situation of the second special symbol. A mode recovery screen can be displayed. According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner in parallel, it is possible to perform an appropriate notification regarding the power-off recovery.

(Specific example of recovery screen in situation 6)
Next, as shown in the above-mentioned "Situation 6", a specific example of a case where the power is cut off when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel. Will be described. In this example, when the power is cut off, the gaming state is controlled to a low accuracy/non-KT state (normal state) (that is, the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol). Yes), the first number of pending storages is 0, and the number of second pending storages is 0. As described above, in the “situation 6”, the CPU 120 for effect control receives the power failure recovery 1 designation command, and based on (1) the recovery image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the recovery corresponding to the sub symbol. This is a state in which display control of both images is being executed. Then, as described above, (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol having a lower display priority than this are superimposed and displayed, and as a result, the restoration screen is the screen. The text "Recovery from power failure" is displayed throughout.

As shown in FIG. 10-16(A), after the recovery from the power failure, the variation display of the first special symbol that was being executed when the power failure occurred and the second special symbol that was being executed when the power failure occurred When the variable display of the first special symbol is finished before the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in parallel with the variable display, the CPU 103 determines that the first reserved memory number is 0. , The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52A in FIG. 10C).

Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 terminates (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) each production. A design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and a background image (clear image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the second special symbol, since the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command have been received, (2) corresponding to the sub symbol The display control of the restored image continues. Accordingly, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol and (3) each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed in a superimposed manner. It will be. As a result, the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen which is the display range of the second small symbol) is displayed as "restoring", and the other parts are each production symbols. The (decorative pattern and the first small pattern) and the background image (the clear image in this example) are displayed.

Here, when the number of the first pending storage is 1 or more when the power is cut off, the CPU 103, after recovering from the power cut, ends the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed when the power is cut off. After that, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command are not transmitted, but when the next variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variation pattern command and the background designation command will be transmitted (FIG. 10). -3 step 026IWS56A, FIG. 9-15 step 026IWS1704A). The production control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern command and the background designation command terminates (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main design, and (3) each production design (decorative design, first small design, A second small pattern) and a background image (a clear image in this example) are displayed. As a result, the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen which is the display range of the second small symbol) is displayed as "restoring", and the other parts are each production symbols. The (decorative pattern and the first small pattern) and the background image (the clear image in this example) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-16(B), after the power is cut off, the variable display of the first special symbol which is being executed when the power is cut off and the second special symbol which is being executed when the power is cut off are displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol ends earlier than the variable display of the first special symbol when the variable display is executed in parallel, the second reserved storage number is 0, so the CPU 103 , The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52B of FIG. 10-4).

Based on the reception of the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 terminates (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, and (3) for each production. A design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and a background image (clear image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the first special symbol, since the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command have been received, (1) corresponding to the main symbol The display control of the restored image continues. Therefore, (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed in a superimposed manner. It will be. Then, (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and the display priority lower than this (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (in this example) As a result of the superimposed display of (a clear image), the recovery screen is such that the characters "recovering power failure" are displayed on the entire screen.

Here, when the number of the second reserved memory is 1 or more at the time of the power cut, the CPU 103, after recovering from the power cut, ends the variable display of the second special symbol that was being executed at the time of the power cut. After that, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command are not transmitted, but when the next variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variation pattern command and the background designation command will be transmitted (FIG. 10). -4 step 026IWS56B etc.). The production control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern command and the background designation command ends (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub design, and (3) each production design (decorative design, the first small design, A second small pattern) and a background image (a clear image in this example) are displayed. Then, (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and the display priority lower than this (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (in this example) As a result of the superimposed display of (a clear image), the recovery screen is such that the characters "recovering power failure" are displayed on the entire screen.

As shown in FIG. 10-16(C), after the recovery from the power failure, the variation display of the first special symbol that was being executed when the power failure occurred, and the second special symbol that was being executed when the power failure occurred When the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are completed when the variable display is executed in parallel, the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second reserved memory number is also 0. Therefore, the CPU 103 transmits the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command, and the second customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52A in FIG. 10C). , Step 026IWS52B of FIG. 10-4).

Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display designating command and the background designating command, and the second customer waiting demo display designating command and the background designating command, the production control CPU 120 (1) restores corresponding to the main symbol. The display control of the image is terminated, and (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol is terminated, and (3) each production design (decorative design, the first small design, the second small design) and the background image. (A clear image in this example) is displayed. As a result, (3) only each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed. In this way, (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol are simultaneously terminated, and (3) each production symbol (decorative symbol, It is possible to display only the first small symbol, the second small symbol) and the background image (the clear image in this example).

Here, when the number of the first reserved memory is 1 or more and the number of the second reserved memory is 1 or more when the power is cut off, the CPU 103 displays the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. When the 1st customer waiting demo display designating command and background designating command, and the 2nd customer waiting demo display designating command and background designating command are not transmitted, the next variable display of the first special symbol and the next When starting the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation pattern command and the background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation pattern command and the background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol. Is transmitted (step 026IWS56A in FIG. 10-3, step 026IWS1704A in FIG. 9-15, step 026IWS56B in FIG. 10-4, etc.).

The production control CPU 120 is based on receiving the variation pattern command and the background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation pattern command and the background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol. Then, (1) the display control of the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol is terminated, (2) the display control of the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol is terminated, and (3) each production symbol (decorative symbol, the first A small pattern, a second small pattern) and a background image (a clear image in this example) are displayed. As a result, (3) only each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed. In this way, (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol are simultaneously terminated, and (3) each production symbol (decorative symbol, It is possible to display only the first small symbol, the second small symbol) and the background image (the clear image in this example).

It should be noted that, based on the fact that the first number of reserved memories is 0 and the number of second reserved memories is 1 or more when the power is cut off, after the power is restored, the first customer waiting demo corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol When the display designation command and the background designation command, and the variation pattern command and the background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol are transmitted, the production control CPU 120 that receives these commands is (1) the main symbol. End the display control of the restoration image corresponding to, (2) and end the display control of the restoration image corresponding to the sub-symbol, (3) each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design ) And a background image (a clear image in this example) are displayed. As a result, (3) only each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed. In this way, (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol are simultaneously terminated, and (3) each production symbol (decorative symbol, It is possible to display only the first small symbol, the second small symbol) and the background image (the clear image in this example).

Also, based on the fact that the first number of reserved memories is 1 or more and the second number of reserved memories is 0 when the power is cut off, after the power is restored, the variation pattern command and the background corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol. When the designated command and the second customer waiting demonstration display designated command and the background designated command corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are transmitted, the production control CPU 120 that has received these commands is (1) the main symbol. End the display control of the restoration image corresponding to, (2) and end the display control of the restoration image corresponding to the sub-symbol, (3) each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design ) And a background image (a clear image in this example) are displayed. As a result, (3) only each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed. In this way, (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol are simultaneously terminated, and (3) each production symbol (decorative symbol, It is possible to display only the first small symbol, the second small symbol) and the background image (the clear image in this example).

FIG. 10-17 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the case where a power failure occurs in the low accuracy/non-KT state. As shown in FIG. 10-17, the game state is controlled to a low-probability/non-KT state (main symbol: first special symbol, sub symbol: second special symbol), and a variable display of the first special symbol and When the variable display of the two special symbols is executed in parallel, it is assumed that the power is cut off (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-17). At this time, the first number of pending storages is 0, and the number of second pending storages is 0.

When the power is turned on (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-17), the CPU 103 is a command transmission (step S7) process at the time of recovery in the game control main process, and is a power failure recovery 1 designation command, first number of pending storages. The designation command and the second reserved storage number designation command, and the display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol and the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. At this time, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and the restoration image corresponding to the (2) sub symbol having a lower display priority than this are displayed in a superimposed manner, and as a result, the restoration screen displays "power failure" on the entire screen. The word "Recovering" is displayed.

Further, as shown in "Situation 6" of FIG. 10-15, even after the interruption permission (step S12) is performed in the game control main processing and the game control timer interrupt processing is executed, transmission at the time of restoration Since the command set is not sent, the message "Recovery from power failure" is displayed on the entire screen and does not change. Here, because the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol that was interrupted by the power interruption is resumed, and the variable display of the second special symbol that was interrupted by the power interruption is resumed. (T3 timing shown in FIG. 10-17).

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished (timing T4 shown in FIG. 10-17), the CPU 103 determines that the first waiting memory number is 0 and the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and A background designating command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 terminates (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) each production. A design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and a background image (clear image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the second special symbol, since the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command have been received, (2) corresponding to the sub symbol The display control of the restored image continues. Accordingly, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol and (3) each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed in a superimposed manner. It will be. As a result, the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen which is the display range of the second small symbol) is displayed as "restoring", and the other parts are each production symbols. The (decorative pattern and the first small pattern) and the background image (the clear image in this example) are displayed.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-17), based on that the second reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 103 causes the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and A background designating command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the display control of the restored image corresponding to (2) the sub symbol. As a result, (3) only each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed.

FIG. 10-18 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the case of power failure in the low accuracy/non-KT state. As shown in FIG. 10-18, the gaming state is controlled to the low-probability/non-KT state (main symbol: first special symbol, sub symbol: second special symbol), and the variable display and the first special symbol When the variable display of the two special symbols is executed in parallel, it is assumed that the power is cut off (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-18). At this time, the first number of pending storages is 0, and the number of second pending storages is 0.

When the power is turned on (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-18), the CPU 103 is a command transmission (step S7) process at the time of recovery in the game control main process, and is a power failure recovery 1 designation command, first number of pending storages. The designation command and the second reserved storage number designation command, and the display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol and the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. At this time, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and the restoration image corresponding to the (2) sub symbol having a lower display priority than this are displayed in a superimposed manner, and as a result, the restoration screen displays "power failure" on the entire screen. The word "Recovering" is displayed.

Further, as shown in "Situation 6" of FIG. 10-15, even after the interruption permission (step S12) is performed in the game control main processing and the game control timer interrupt processing is executed, transmission at the time of restoration Since the command set is not sent, the message "Recovery from power failure" is displayed on the entire screen and does not change. Here, because the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol that was interrupted by the power-off is restarted, and the variable display of the second special symbol that was interrupted by the power-off is restarted. (T3 timing shown in FIG. 10-18).

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed (timing T4 shown in FIG. 10-18), the CPU 103, based on the second number of pending storages being 0, displays the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and The background designation command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 terminates (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, and (3) for each production. A design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and a background image (clear image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the first special symbol, since the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command have been received, (1) corresponding to the main symbol The display control of the restored image continues. Therefore, (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed in a superimposed manner. It will be. As a result, the word "Recovery from power failure" remains displayed on the entire screen.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-18), the CPU 103 determines that the first customer waiting demonstration display designating command and A background designating command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 ends the display control of the restored image corresponding to (1) the main symbol. As a result, (3) only each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed.

FIG. 10-19 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the case of power failure in the high accuracy/second KT state. As shown in FIG. 10-19, the gaming state is controlled to a high-precision/second KT state (main symbol: second special symbol, sub symbol: first special symbol), and variable display of the first special symbol and When the variable display of the two special symbols is executed in parallel, it is assumed that the power is cut off (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-19). At this time, the first number of pending storages is 0, and the number of second pending storages is 0.

When the power is turned on (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-19), the CPU 103 is a command transmission (step S7) process at the time of recovery in the game control main process, and a power failure recovery 1 designation command, first reserved memory count. The designation command and the second reserved storage number designation command, and the display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol and the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. At this time, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and the restoration image corresponding to the (2) sub symbol having a lower display priority than this are displayed in a superimposed manner, and as a result, the restoration screen displays "power failure" on the entire screen. The word "Recovering" is displayed.

Further, as shown in "Situation 6" of FIG. 10-15, even after the interruption permission (step S12) is performed in the game control main processing and the game control timer interrupt processing is executed, transmission at the time of restoration Since the command set is not sent, the message "Recovery from power failure" is displayed on the entire screen and does not change. Here, because the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol that was interrupted by the power interruption is resumed, and the variable display of the second special symbol that was interrupted by the power interruption is resumed. (T3 timing shown in FIG. 10-19).

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-19 ), the CPU 103 determines that the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and A background designating command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 terminates (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) for each production. A design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and a background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the first special symbol, since the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command have been received, (2) corresponding to the sub symbol The display control of the restored image continues. Accordingly, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol and (3) each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed in a superimposed manner. It will be. As a result, the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper left part of the screen which is the display range of the first small symbol) is displayed as "restoring", and the other portions are each production symbols. The (decorative pattern and the second small pattern) and the background image (the typhoon image in this example) are displayed.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed (timing T5 shown in FIG. 10-19), the CPU 103 determines that the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and A background designating command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display control of the restored image corresponding to (2) the sub symbol. As a result, (3) only each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed.

FIG. 10-20 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the case of power failure in the high accuracy/second KT state. As shown in FIG. 10-20, the gaming state is controlled to the high-precision/second KT state (main symbol: second special symbol, sub symbol: first special symbol), and the variable display and the first special symbol When the variable display of the two special symbols is being executed in parallel, it is assumed that the power is cut off (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-20). At this time, the first number of pending storages is 0, and the number of second pending storages is 0.

When the power is turned on (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-20), the CPU 103 is a command transmission (step S7) process at the time of recovery in the game control main process, and is a power failure recovery 1 designation command, first number of pending storages. The designation command and the second reserved storage number designation command, and the display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol and the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. At this time, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and the restoration image corresponding to the (2) sub symbol having a lower display priority than this are displayed in a superimposed manner, and as a result, the restoration screen displays "power failure" on the entire screen. The word "Recovering" is displayed.

Further, as shown in "Situation 6" of FIG. 10-15, even after the interruption permission (step S12) is performed in the game control main processing and the game control timer interrupt processing is executed, transmission at the time of restoration Since the command set is not sent, the message "Recovery from power failure" is displayed on the entire screen and does not change. Here, because the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol that was interrupted by the power-off is restarted, and the variable display of the second special symbol that was interrupted by the power-off is restarted. (T3 timing shown in FIG. 10-20).

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends (timing T4 shown in FIG. 10-20), the CPU 103 determines that the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and A background designating command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 terminates (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, and (3) for each production. A design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and a background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the second special symbol, since the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command have been received, (1) corresponding to the main symbol The display control of the restored image continues. Therefore, (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed in an overlapping manner. It will be. As a result, the word "Recovery from power failure" remains displayed on the entire screen.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-20), based on that the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and The background designation command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 ends (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol. As a result, (3) only each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed.

As described above, when the power is cut off in a situation in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, the game when the power interruption occurs It is possible to display the restoration screen in a different mode depending on the state, and the remaining variation time of the first special symbol and the remaining variation time of the second special symbol. This makes it possible to notify the recovery process in an appropriate manner according to the variable display status of the main symbol and the variable display status of the sub symbol.

(Variation example when start winning occurs during demo display)
In the above-mentioned example, when executing the first demonstration display, when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol (the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9 to When the range of 11), the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and whether or not the starting condition of the first special symbol is satisfied (the winning of the first starting winning opening has occurred). Whether or not), the execution of the first demo display continues. Not limited to such a form, when the first demonstration display is executed, the starting condition of the first special symbol when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol The first demo display may be ended immediately when the conditions are satisfied. 10-21 and 10-22 are flowcharts showing modified examples of the demo display control process.

The processing of steps 026IWS4701 to 026IWS4714 shown in FIG. 10-21 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. The effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is started in step 026IWS4714. When the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first reserved storage number is 0 (step 06TM1400). When the first number of reserved storages is 0 (YES in step 06TM1400), the processes after step 026IWS4715 shown in FIG. 9-38 are executed. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit game state is started based on the variation display result of the second special symbol (step 026IWS4715), and if the big hit game state is started (YES in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display Is ended (step 026IWS4716), and the big hit game state is not started (NO in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display is continued.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 ends the first demo display (026IWS4716) when the first reserved storage number is not 0 (NO in step 06TM1400). That is, when the first demonstration display is executed, regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the starting condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. Immediately end the first demo display.

The processing of Step 026IWS4801 to Step 026IWS4814 shown in FIG. 10-22 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. The production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol is started in step 026IWS4814. When the variable display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 06TM1500). When the second number of reserved storages is 0 (YES in step 06TM1500), the processing from step 026IWS4815 shown in FIG. 9-39 is executed. That is, it is confirmed whether or not it is controlled to the KT state (step 026IWS4815), and if it is controlled to the KT state (YES at step 026IWS4815), the second demo display is continued and the KT state must be controlled. If (NO in step 026IWS4815), the second demo display is ended (step 026IWS4816). That is, when the second demonstration display is executed, regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, the starting condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Immediately end the first demo display.

In this embodiment, when the game state is controlled to the small hit game state, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not started. Then, in the process shown in FIGS. 9-38 and 9-39 described above, in the demo display control process, even if the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started. , The first demonstration display is continued, and since the variable display of the second special symbol is not started even if the start winning to the variable winning ball device 6B occurs, the second demonstration display is continuously executed. On the other hand, in this modified example, when the gaming state is controlled to the small hitting gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, but as shown in FIG. 10-21, When a start winning is generated in the winning ball apparatus 6A and the first number of reserved memories becomes 1 (NO in step 06TM1400), the first demonstration display is immediately ended. Further, in this modification, when the gaming state is controlled to the small hitting gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is not started, but as shown in FIG. When the start winning for the ball device 6B occurs and the second number of reserved memories becomes 1 (YES in step 06TM1500), the second demonstration display is immediately ended.

Next, after the game state is controlled to the low-accuracy/non-KT state (normal mode), when the first demonstration display is being executed, it is a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and a small hit. 10-23 and 10-24 will be used to describe an example of an effect in the case where the game medium is started and won in the winning ball device 6A while being controlled to the game state. FIG. 10-23 is a modification of the time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first demonstration display and the start winning, and FIG. 10-24 is a modification of the effect image related to the first demo display and the starting winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows a modification.

As shown in FIG. 10-23(1), when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/non-KT state (normal state), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, a "sunny image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. The effect control CPU 120 is executing the first demo display on the image display device 5, and displays the operation prompting display 06TM050 and the characters “menu” on the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, based on that the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 0, “0” is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, and the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025. "0" is displayed on.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display has been definitely stopped based on that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was “out”. The decorative design (2, 4, 7) is continuously displayed in the design display area (5L, 5C, 5R) even during the first demo display, and the small design (2, 4) when the variable display is fixedly stopped. , 7) is continuously displayed in the first small symbol display area (5l1, 5c1, 5r1).

On the other hand, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the fact that the variation display (small hit variation) of the second special symbol that is being executed is finished, and the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 have (1, 3, 3). 5) Make sure stop. That is, the combination of the second small symbols is fixedly stopped in response to the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol being "small hit", and the small hit game state is controlled (FIG. 10). Timing of T1 shown in -23). Here, since the gaming state is controlled to a low-probability/non-KT state (normal state) corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol, based on the variable display of the second special symbol as described later. Even if the small hit game state is controlled, the first demo display is continuously executed without being terminated.

Then, in the period when the small hitting game state is controlled based on the variable display of the second special symbol, a start winning is newly generated in the winning ball device 6A when the first demo display is continuously executed. Then, it is assumed that the first number of reserved storages becomes 1 (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-23). At this time, the CPU 103 sends a command indicating that the first number of pending storages has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 to display “1” based on the reception of the command indicating that the first reserved storage number has increased.

At this time, the CPU 103, when the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, in the first special symbol process process, executes the first start winning determination process, and executes the first special symbol normal process of step S110A (Figure 5). Here, as shown in FIG. 10-3 described above, when the small hitting game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol process flag is the second small symbol. Since the value corresponds to any one of the pre-hit opening process (9), the second small hit mid-during process (10), and the second small hit end process (11) (YES in step S06TM1000A), The value of the 1 special symbol process flag is not updated from the value (0) indicating the first special symbol normal process to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting process. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started even if the start winning to the first starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A) occurs. After that, the value of the second special symbol process flag is any of the second small hit opening pre-processing (9), the second small hit opening processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11). When the value corresponding to also disappears (NO in step S06TM1000A), the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value (1) indicating the first special symbol normal process to the first variation pattern setting process (1). ) Is updated, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines NO in step 026IWS4714 based on that the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and when the first reserved storage number is 0, The first demo display is terminated by determining NO in step 06TM1400 based on the fact that there is no (a command indicating that the number of first pending storage has increased) is received (step 026IWS4716 is executed). .. That is, in the period in which the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, when the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6A occurs, the first demo display is ended.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the first demonstration display is executed (when the main symbol is the first special symbol), it is controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variable display of the second special symbol. When (when the value of the second special symbol process flag is in the range of 9 to 11), the start condition of the first special symbol is irrespective of whether or not the start condition of the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. The first demonstration display is ended in response to the establishment (the winning of the first starting winning opening has occurred). Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is not started because it is controlled to the small hit game state, the execution of the first demo display is continued according to the winning at the first starting winning opening. If so, the player will be caused to mistakenly recognize that the winning in the first starting winning opening is invalid. Therefore, in such a state, the first demonstration display is ended when a winning in the first starting winning opening occurs, so as to suppress the misidentification of the player. In this way, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the situation of the variable display of the first special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10-24(2), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the first demo display based on the fact that the first number of reserved memories becomes 1 (NO in step S06TM1400 shown in FIG. 10-21). It is ended (step 026IWS4716). As a result, the operation prompting display 06TM050 and the word "menu" in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 are hidden. On the other hand, the clear image, which is the background image corresponding to the current game state ((i) low probability/non-KT state (normal state)), is continuously displayed. In this way, as the first number of reserved memories is no longer 0, the operation prompt display 06TM050 and the “menu” having a higher display priority than the background image (appearing to be displayed in front of the background image) Is hidden, but the background image itself, which has a lower display priority than the first demo display (appears to be displayed behind the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the word “menu”), continues. Will be displayed. As a result, the player is in a gaming state before the first demo display ends (when the first demo display is displayed) and after the first demo display ends (after the first demo display is hidden). It is possible to easily grasp that it has not changed.

In addition, during the period of being controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, the variation start condition of the first special symbol cannot be established, but a new start winning award to the winning ball device 6A. When occurs, the CPU 103 executes the first start winning a prize determination process of step S101A. In the first start winning a prize determination process, a process of storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the first hold storage number is executed, and a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern. Is extracted and stored as the suspension information in the first suspension storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the first hold storage number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the winning a prize set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the command indicating that the first number of reserved memories has increased updates the value of the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 from “0” to “1”. In this way, when the variation start condition of the first special symbol cannot be satisfied, even if the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed, but the first hold By updating the value of the memory number special display area 06TM015, the player can recognize that at least the first start winning port has been won and the first reserved memory number has increased.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24(2), even though the first number of pending storages has changed from "0" to "1", an object (circular image is displayed in the first pending display area 06TM011). ) Is not displayed. That is, of the display areas in which the first number of reserved memories can be displayed, the first number of reserved memories (the number of objects corresponding to the first number of reserved memories) is not displayed in the highly visible first reserved display area 06TM011. The first reserved storage number is displayed only in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 with low visibility.

If, in this state, an object is displayed in the first hold display area 06TM011 in response to the occurrence of a winning in the first start winning hole, the player immediately displays a variable display of the decorative symbol based on the first hold memory ( It is expected that the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) will be executed, but in the state where the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the first hold display Although the object is displayed in the area 06TM011, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started (the object is not shifted to the active display area 06TM031 and does not become the active display 06TM030), which confuses the player. Therefore, the first reserved storage number 06TM0115 having a high visibility does not display the first reserved memory number (the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number), and the first reserved storage number special display region 06TM015 with a low visibility is displayed. By displaying the first reserved memory number only on, the updated first reserved memory number is appropriately notified without confusing the player.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-24 (3), when the small hitting game state ends, and the gaming state is controlled to the low certainty/non-KT state, the variation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. Based, that is, the value of the second special symbol process flag is any of the second small hit opening pre-processing (9), the second small hit opening processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11) When the value corresponding to the process of (1) is no longer present (NO in step S06TM1000A), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-23).

The production control CPU 120 causes the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) to start variable display in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is displayed. Let it start. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control displays “0” in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 and displays the active display 06TM030 in the active display area 06TM031 as the first reserved storage number becomes 0. ..

In the present embodiment, when the second demo display is being executed, the second demo display is not terminated even when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the first special symbol. It is supposed to continue. Then, when the second demonstration display is executed, when the start winning to the second starting winning opening occurs within the period of being controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, The variable display of the second special symbol is not started, and the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 is updated from 0 to 1. At this time as well, the second demo display ends, and no object (circular image) is displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021.

Specifically, when the second demo display is executed (the game state is (ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high-accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high-accuracy/second KT state , If any of the game state is controlled), in the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "9" ~ " Since it is determined to be YES in step S06TM1000B shown in FIG. 10-4 based on the range of "11", the value of the second special symbol process flag does not become a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process, The variable display of the second special symbol is not started. And, in this state (the second demo display is being executed and is being controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol), if the winning to the second starting winning opening occurs, the figure It is determined to be NO in step 026IWS4814 of 10-22, further determined to be NO in step S06TM1500, step 026IWS4816 is executed, and the second demonstration display is ended.

At this time, based on the fact that the second reserved memory count has become 1 (NO in step S06TM1500 shown in FIG. 10-22), effect control CPU 120 terminates the second demonstration display (step 026IWS4816). As a result, the operation prompting display 06TM050 and the word "menu" in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 are hidden. On the other hand, a background image (cloudy) corresponding to the current game state (any one of (ii) low accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy/second KT state) The image, the rain image, or the typhoon image) will be continuously displayed.

In this way, as the second number of reserved memories becomes 1, the operation prompt display 06TM050 and the “menu” having a higher display priority than the background image (appearing to be displayed in front of the background image) Is hidden, but the background image itself, which has a lower display priority than the second demo display (it seems to be displayed behind the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the word “menu”), continues. Will be displayed. Thereby, the player starts before (when the second demo display is displayed) and (after the second demo display is displayed) the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol). 2 After the demo display is hidden), it is possible to easily understand that the game state has not changed.

Here, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the command indicating that the second number of reserved storages has increased, updates the value of the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 of the image display device 5 from “0” to “1”. To do. However, even though the number of second reserved memories is changed from "0" to "1", the object (circular image) is not displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. That is, of the display areas capable of displaying the second reserved storage number, the second reserved storage area 06TM021 having high visibility does not display the second reserved storage number (the number of objects corresponding to the second reserved storage number). The second reserved storage number is displayed only in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 having low visibility.

After that, the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol ends, and the gaming state is (ii) low accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy/ Second KT state, when controlled to any gaming state, based on the fact that the variation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, that is, the value of the first special symbol process flag, before the first small hit opening When the value corresponding to any one of the processing (9), the first small hit open processing (10), and the first small hit end processing (11) has disappeared (NO in step S06TM1000B), the CPU 103 The variable display of the second special symbol is started.

The effect control CPU 120 causes the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) to start variable display in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In the second small symbol display area 51, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is displayed. Let it start. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the second reserved storage number to become 0, and causes the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 to display “0” and the active display area 06TM031 to display the active display 06TM030. ..

(1) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, a first gate passage waiting process in the first special symbol process process (first special symbol process flag: 4), a first jackpot opening pretreatment (first) Special symbol process flag: 5), first big hit open processing (first special symbol process flag: 6), first big hit open after-treatment (first special symbol process flag: 7), first big hit end process (first) Special symbol process flag: 8), first small hit opening pretreatment (first special symbol process flag: 9), first small hit opening process (first special symbol process flag: 10), and first small hit end Processing (1st special symbol process flag: 11), 2nd gate passing waiting processing in 2nd special symbol process processing (2nd special symbol process flag: 4), 2nd big hit opening pretreatment (2nd special symbol process flag) : 5), processing during the second big hit opening (second special symbol process flag: 6), second big hit opening post-processing (second special symbol process flag: 7), second big hit end processing (second special symbol process flag) : 8), second small hit opening pre-processing (second special symbol process flag: 9), second small hit opening processing (second special symbol process flag: 10), and second small hit ending process (second) The special symbol process flag: 11) and an example in which the individual symbols are provided have been described.

That is, the processing (first special symbol process flag: 4 to 11) when controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, and the variable display result of the second special symbol. The processing (the second special symbol process flag: 4 to 11) in the case of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the, and the example provided individually are described. Not limited to such a form, the process (first special symbol process flag: 4 to 11) when controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, and the second Based on the variable display result of the special symbol, the process (the second special symbol process flag: 4 to 11) when controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is made common (that is, the CPU 103 executes a common program). Yes).

Specifically, when the first special symbol process flag is 4 and the second special symbol process flag is 4, a common gate passage waiting process is executed, and when the first special symbol process flag is 5 and The common big hit opening pre-processing is executed when the 2 special symbol process flag is 5, and the common big hit opening process is common when the first special symbol process flag is 6 and the second special symbol process flag is 6. Is executed, the first special symbol process flag is 7 and the second special symbol process flag is common big jackpot open post-processing is executed, the first special symbol process flag is 8 and the second When the special symbol process flag is 8, the common big hit ending process is executed, and when the first special symbol process flag is 9 and the second special symbol process flag is 9, the common small hit opening pretreatment is Is executed, when the first special symbol process flag is 10 and the case where the second special symbol process flag is 10, the common small hit opening process is executed, and when the first special symbol process flag is 11 and second A common small hit ending process may be executed when the special symbol process flag is 11. In this way, for the processing related to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, whether it is processing based on the variable display result of the first special symbol or processing based on the variable display result of the second special symbol Instead, the programs may be shared.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, the state of waiting for passage through the gate after the big hit symbol is definitely stopped (a state before the big hit starts, when the first special symbol process flag is "4" or the second special symbol process flag is In the case of "4"), the demo display corresponding to the gaming state may be executed. That is, if the game ball does not pass through the passage gate 41 even if a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the big hit symbol is definitely stopped (when the game ball is not detected by the gate switch 21), the game is played. When the state is (i) low-accuracy/non-KT state, the first demo display is executed, and the game state is (ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high-accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high. The second demo display may be executed when either the accurate/second KT state is set.

As described above, in the waiting state for passing through the gate, even if the winning in the first starting winning opening occurs, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning is not started, and the winning in the second starting winning opening is won. Even if it occurs, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning is not started. When the demonstration display is being executed in the gate passage waiting state, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the fact that a prize has been awarded to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening (during the demonstration display). While terminating the 1 demo display or the 2nd demo display), a notification prompting the player to launch the game ball so as to pass through the passage gate 41 (for example, "pass the gate to start a big hit" or "right hit") It is also possible to execute a notification for displaying characters on the image display device 5. That is, regardless of the game state (whether the first demo display is being executed or the second demo display is being executed), it is executed in response to the game ball winning the first start winning port. It is also possible to end the demo display that is being performed, and to end the demo display that is being executed in response to the game ball winning the second starting winning opening. In this way, even in the gate passage waiting state, it is possible to realize appropriate control relating to the demonstration display according to the satisfaction condition of the starting condition.

It should be noted that when a start winning is generated during the demo display in the gate passage waiting state, the running demo display may be continued. For example, when a start winning (winning to the first starting winning opening or winning to the second starting winning opening) occurs during the demo display in the gate passage waiting state, the game ball is not ended while the running demo display is finished. You may make it continue until it passes the passage gate 41 (until the big hit start effect is started). Further, when a start winning is generated during the demonstration display in the gate passage waiting state, the demonstration display in execution may be continued depending on the game state at that time, for example, the game state is (i) In the case of the low probability/non-KT state (during the first demo display), the first demo display is ended when the winning at the first starting winning opening occurs, but the winning at the second starting winning opening occurs. Even if the first demo display is not ended, the game state is one of (ii) low accuracy/first KT status, (iii) high accuracy/first KT status, and (iv) high accuracy/second KT status. In the case (during the second demo display), the second demo display is ended when the winning in the second starting winning opening occurs, but the second demo display is displayed even if the winning in the first starting winning opening occurs. It may not be terminated.

(3-1) Also, in the small hit game state when the small hit game state is controlled during the execution of the demo display (first demo display, second demo display), the starting condition for the variable display of the normal symbol is When it is established (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41), the demonstration display in execution may be continued without being terminated.

(3-2) Also, in the small hit game state when the small hit game state is controlled during execution of the demo display (first demo display, second demo display), the starting condition for the variable display of the normal symbol is In response to the establishment (the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the demonstration display in execution may be ended. In this case, when the starting condition for the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41), the game state is (i) low accuracy/non-KT state (that is, left-handed operation should be performed). State), and when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 even after the end of the small hitting game state (that is, it continues in spite of the game state in which a left-handed operation should be performed). When the right-handing operation is performed), the left-handing notification may be performed.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

In addition, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification and the configurations shown in the below-described embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be understood that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplifications in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description, but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

Another example of the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a variable display of the first specific identification information (first Variable display of 1 special symbol) and variable display of second specific identification information (variable display of second special symbol) can be executed in parallel with specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), and game. Depending on the state (non-KT state, KT state), either variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) or variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) Corresponding to one of the decoration identification information variable display (variable display of the decorative pattern) can be executed decoration identification information variable display means (CPU120 for effect control), the first specific identification variable display (first special symbol). Based on the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative pattern) among the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) When the advantageous state (big hit game state) is controlled ((A1) to (A4) in FIG. 10-14, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is "big hit") When it becomes), the notification effect for notifying the variable display result of the decoration identification information (as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4), the combination of the decorative patterns that become a big hit (in this example, “222”) is stopped and displayed. And a notification display execution means capable of executing (production) (production control CPU 120), and a variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and a variable display of the second specific identification information (second). Among the variable display of the special symbol), when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information (as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (B1) to (B4)). In addition, when the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is "big hit", the notification effect is not executed (as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B1), it is a big hit). The effect of stopping and displaying the combination of the decorative patterns is not displayed, but the occurrence of the big hit is informed by displaying the character "FEVER"), and as the advantageous state, the first advantageous state (for example, A game state control means (for example, 16-round big hit, probability variation big hit) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round big hit, normal big hit), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, can be controlled. , Game control micro computer Computer 100) and the first advantageous state are selected at a higher rate than the second advantageous state as a longer period as an end time effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous condition. Time effect selection means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 11-10, FIG. 11-11), and the end time when the end time effect (for example, ending effect) can be executed during the end time effect period. Production effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, FIG. 11-23 to FIG. 11-26), and the end time effect executing means is the end time of the first advantageous state. It is possible to execute any of a plurality of types of end effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the effect period, and a plurality of types that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state. An end time effect reception unit (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, and push button 31B) that can accept the selection of the end time effect executed by the end time effect execution unit from the end time effects, from the player. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 11-19, FIG. 11-20, and step S784 in FIG. 11-21. The period in which the selection can be accepted may be the first half of the finish production period or the second half of the big hit round. Specifically, in the 16R jackpot, it may be a period from the reception of the 13R start command to the reception of the 16R end command. ) Is further provided with a gaming machine.

According to such a configuration, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to the decoration identification information, by not performing the notification effect, based on the variable display of any specific identification information. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing whether or not it has been controlled to the advantageous state. Further, since the period of time controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the gaming value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and the first specific identification information is variably displayed. (Variation display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel with specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), , Gaming state (non-KT state, KT state), variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) The decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) capable of variably displaying the decoration identification information (variable display of the decoration pattern) corresponding to either one of the above, and the variable display of the first specific identification information (first Variable display of special design) and variable display of second specific identification information (variable display of second special design), variable display of specific identification information corresponding to variable display of decorative identification information (variable display of decorative design) When the advantageous state (big hit game state) is controlled based on (A10 to (A4) in FIG. 10-14, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is "big hit". ","), the notification effect for notifying the variable display result of the decoration identification information (as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4), the combination of the decorative patterns that becomes a big hit ("222" in this example) is stopped. And a notification control execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing an effect to be displayed, and a variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and a variable display of the second specific identification information ( Among the variable display of the second special symbol), when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information (FIGS. 10-14 (B1) to (B4)). As shown, when the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is “big hit”, the notification effect is not executed (as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B1), Without performing the effect of stopping and displaying the combination of decorative patterns that is a big hit, the occurrence of the big hit is notified by displaying the character "FEVER"), and further, a normal state (for example, a normal state), After the end of the advantageous state, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probable variation state, a time saving state, a high base state), and as the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, certain variation big hit), More disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of a second advantageous state (for example, 6 round big hit, normal big hit), and the above-mentioned when being controlled to the normal state. When it is controlled to the advantageous state when controlled to the special state (for example, when it is a so-called big hit of consecutive chan) than when it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, when it is a so-called big hit at first hit) The end effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, FIG. 11-10, which selects a long period at a higher rate as the end effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state. 11-6) of FIG. 11) and an end time effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22) capable of executing an end time effect (for example, ending effect) in the end time effect period. , FIG. 11-23 to FIG. 11-26), and the end time effect executing means includes a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect effect) in the end time effect period of the first advantageous state. At the end time executed by the end time effect execution means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in any one of the patterns E) and can be executed in the end time effect period of the first advantageous state. An end-time production reception unit (for example, CPU 120 for production control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B) capable of receiving the selection of production from the player. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 11-19, FIG. 11-20, and step S784 in FIG. 11-21. ) Is further provided with a gaming machine.

According to such a configuration, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to the decoration identification information, by not performing the notification effect, based on the variable display of any specific identification information. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing whether or not it has been controlled to the advantageous state. Further, since the period of time controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the gaming value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

The player may be notified of which specific identification information variable display is used to control the advantageous state in the ending effect executed when the advantageous state ends. By doing so, it is possible to more surely let the player recognize which variable control of the specific identification information has been controlled to the advantageous state, and further prevent the player from making a mistake. it can.

Furthermore, as an example of the form of a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly recognizing it, prevent gambling from becoming too high, and reduce the decrease in interest in the game. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player, and the first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, a certain change as the advantageous state). A big state) and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (e.g., 6 round big jackpot, regular big jackpot), and/or game state control means (e.g., a game control micro). Computer 100) and the first advantageous state end selecting a longer period as a finish production period (for example, ending production time) at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate than the second advantageous state. Time effect selection means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 11-10, FIG. 11-11), and the end time when the end time effect (for example, ending effect) can be executed during the end time effect period. Production effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, FIG. 11-23 to FIG. 11-26), and the end time effect executing means is the end time of the first advantageous state. It is possible to execute any of a plurality of types of end effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the effect period, and a plurality of types that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state. An end time effect reception unit (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, and push button 31B) that can accept the selection of the end time effect executed by the end time effect execution unit from the end time effects, from the player. It may be another operation unit for setting.Step S752A in Fig. 11-19, step S784 in Fig. 11-20, and step S784 in Fig. 11-21. It may be present or may be in the latter half of the big hit round, specifically, in the 16R big hit, it may be a period from the reception of the 13R start command to the reception of the 16R end command. Gaming machine further provided.

Alternatively, it can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and is controlled to a special state different from the advantageous state after completion of the advantageous state (for example, a probability variation state, a time saving state, a high base state). A possible gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) in a normal state (for example, a normal state), the special state, and the advantageous state as a first advantageous state (for example, 16 rounds big hit, probability variation big hit) And a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round big hit, normal big hit), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, a game state control means (eg, game control microcomputer 100). ), and controlling to the advantageous state when controlled to the special state, as compared to the case where the advantageous state is controlled to the normal state (for example, a so-called first big hit). In such a case (for example, in the case of a so-called consecutive big hit), an end time effect selecting unit that selects a long time period as an end time effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state at a high rate. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 11-10, and FIG. 11-11), and an end time effect executing means capable of executing an end time effect (for example, ending effect) during the end time effect period ( For example, the effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, and FIG. 11-23 to FIG. 11-26), and the end time effect executing means, during the end time effect period of the first advantageous state, One of a plurality of types of end productions (for example, production pattern A to production pattern E) can be executed, and a plurality of types of end productions that can be executed in the end production period of the first advantageous state. An end time effect reception means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, other for setting, which can accept the selection of the end time effect executed by the end time effect execution means from the player. 11-19. Step S752A of FIG. 11-19, FIG. 11-20, and step S784 of FIG. 11-21. Below, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

Hereinafter, the characteristic portion of another embodiment will be described.
(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 069F of the present embodiment)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, problems may occur from the following viewpoints. Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine in which a big hit with a long ending period in which an end effect of a big hit is executed and a short big hit (see, for example, JP-A-2007-7165). In the gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2007-7165, a short ending time is selected when the probability variation big hit occurs. However, when advantageous big hits occur consecutively, the ending period is shortened, the interval between big hits and the next big hits is shortened, and the speed at which prize balls can be obtained increases Could be too high. The gaming machines according to the inventions 069F to 071F that solve such problems are proposed below.

Further, conventionally, there has been a gaming machine in which an advantageous big hit is set to have a longer fanfare period at the start of the big hit than a disadvantageous big hit (for example, see JP-A-2014-148). However, simply setting the advantageous big hit fanfare period long may lead to a decline in interest. The gaming machines according to the inventions 073F and 074F that solve such problems are proposed below. In the following, the features of the gaming machines according to the inventions 069F to 071F, the invention 073F, and the invention 074F will be represented as a characteristic portion 069F. The characteristic part 069F can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above.

FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, showing a layout of main members. Hereinafter, description of the configuration common to that of FIG. 1 will not be repeated.

The game area 2 formed on the board surface of the game board has a left game area 2A on the left side of the top side of the image display device 5 and a right game area 2B on the right side. If the left game area 2A that is the first game area and the right game area 2B that is the second game area are divided by the end surface of the image display device 5 inside the game area 2 or the arrangement PL of the nails, for example. Good. When the game ball that is shot from the hitting ball launching device and is driven into the game area 2 is guided to the left game area 2A that is the first game area, for example, by being guided along the nail arrangement PL, , It becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area 2B which is the second game area.

In the left game area 2A, a normal winning ball device 6A is provided. For example, the normal winning ball device 6A is provided below the center of the image display device 5. The normal winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. As described above, the left game area 2A is always provided with the normal winning ball device 6A that forms the first starting winning hole into which the game ball can enter.

In the right game area 2B, a normal variable winning ball device 6B is provided. The normal variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable blades that is changed by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. 11-2 into a closed state that is a vertical position and an open state that is a tilted position. A tulip-shaped accessory is provided to form the second starting winning opening. As an example, in the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball does not pass through the second starting winning hole. Put in a state. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, so that the game ball can pass through the second starting winning hole. Open it. The normal variable winning ball device 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning port, while the solenoid 81 is in the enlarged open state when the solenoid is in the on state. May be configured such that the game ball is difficult to enter. Thus, in the right game area 2B, the normal variable that can be changed to the first variable state in which the game ball can pass through the second start winning hole and the second variable state in which the game ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass. A winning ball device 6B is provided.

By the arrangement of the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the like in the left game area 2A and the right game area 2B, the game ball guided to the left game area 2A which is the first game area is the second game area. It is impossible or difficult to pass through the second start winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B provided in the right game area 2B. In addition, the game ball guided to the right game area 2B, which is the second game area, has the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A provided in the left game area 2A, which is the first game area. Impossible or difficult to pass.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 11-2. The game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 11-2. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and if the first reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, the first start The condition is met. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and if the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit value, the second start is performed. The condition is met. The number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting opening switch 22A and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. May be the same or different in number.

Two special variable winning ball devices are provided below the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The upper special variable winning a prize ball device 7A is provided with a upper special winning opening door which is opened and closed by a solenoid 82A for the upper special winning opening door shown in FIG. Form a top prize hole that changes to. As an example, in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A, the upper special winning opening door closes the upper special winning opening when the solenoid 82A for the upper special winning opening door is off. On the other hand, in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A, the upper special winning opening door opens the upper special winning opening when the solenoid 82A for the upper special winning opening door is on. The game ball that has entered the upper special winning opening formed on the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is detected by, for example, the upper special winning opening switch 23A shown in FIG. 11-2. In addition, in this embodiment, the upper special winning opening and the lower special winning opening have the same door shape, but the shapes of the two special winning openings may be different. For example, one of them may be an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that change between a closed state and an open state like the normal variable winning ball device 6B, or a state stored in the game area 2. It may be a winning opening that changes to a state of protruding from.

The lower special variable winning a prize ball device 7B is provided with a lower special winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82B for a lower special winning opening door shown in FIG. 11-2. Forming a lower prize hole that changes to. As an example, in the lower special variable winning a prize ball device 7B, the lower special winning opening door closes the lower special winning opening when the solenoid 82B for the lower special winning opening door is off. On the other hand, in the lower special variable winning a prize ball device 7B, when the solenoid 82B for the lower special winning opening door is on, the lower special winning opening door opens the lower special winning opening. The game ball that has entered the lower special winning opening formed in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is detected by, for example, the lower special winning opening switch 23B shown in FIG. 11-2.

A large number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls pass through the upper special winning opening formed by the upper special variable winning ball device 7A and the lower large winning opening formed by the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. That is, the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is in the first state advantageous to the player by opening the upper special winning opening by the upper special winning opening door. The lower special variable winning ball device 7B is in the first state, which is advantageous to the player, by opening the lower special winning opening through the lower special winning opening door. On the other hand, the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is in the second state, which is disadvantageous to the player, by closing the upper special winning opening with the upper special winning opening door. The lower special variable winning ball device 7B is in the second state, which is disadvantageous to the player, by closing the lower special winning opening with the lower special winning opening door. In addition, instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass through the upper and lower prize holes, or in addition to the closed state, the game ball does not easily pass through the upper and lower prize holes. State may be provided.

Inside the upper special variable winning ball device 7A, a discharge path is provided through which the game balls that have entered the upper special winning opening that has been opened by the upper special winning opening door are discharged from the upper special variable winning ball device 7A. There is. The game ball discharged from the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is detected by the first discharge switch 24C installed in the discharge path.

Inside the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, the game ball that has entered the lower special winning opening that has been opened by the lower special winning opening door passes through a predetermined probability variation area, or does not pass through it. A guide route for guiding the player to the discharge route discharged from the special variable winning ball device 7B is provided. The game ball that has entered the lower special variable winning ball device 7B first passes through the route provided with the lower special winning opening switch 23B for detecting the winning game ball, and then the guide path to the probability variation area and the probability variation. It is guided to a branch point to a guideway that does not pass through the area and guides to the discharge path. When the game ball guided to the branch point flows down the guide path to the probability variation area, this game ball is detected by the probability variation area switch 24A, and the probability variation control condition for becoming the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state ends To establish. That is, the place where the probability variation area switch 24A is installed is defined as the probability variation area, and based on the fact that the game ball has passed through this probability variation area, a predetermined probability variation control condition can be established. Since the probability variation area is inside the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, only the game balls that have won the lower special variable winning ball device 7B can pass through.

The probability variation area changes to an open state in which the game ball can pass and a closed state in which it cannot pass by the probability variation area lid driven by the solenoid 82C for the probability variation area lid. As an example, when the probability variation region lid solenoid 82C is in the off state, the probability variation region cover moves to a position where it closes the probability variation region and closes the probability variation region. On the other hand, when the probability variation region cover solenoid 82C is in the ON state, the probability variation region cover moves to a position where the probability variation region lid is not blocked, and the probability variation region is opened. The game ball that has reached the branch point when the probability variation area is in the closed state does not pass through the probability variation area and is discharged from the lower special variable winning ball device 7B as it is. In this case, the game ball is detected by the second discharge switch 24B installed on the common discharge path. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the branch point when the probability variation area is in the open state passes through the probability variation area and is detected by the probability variation area switch 24A installed in the probability variation area. Then, the game ball that has passed through the probability variation area is discharged from the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. When the gaming ball that has won the lower special variable winning ball device 7B passes through the probability variation area, the probability variation area switch 24A detects the game ball that has passed through the probability variation area, and is controlled to the probability variation state. Therefore, by adjusting the ratio of the game ball winning the lower special variable winning ball device 7B and the length of time and timing of the probability variation area cover in the permissible position, the ratio of controlling to the probability variation state is set appropriately. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the inside of the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is configured such that at least the periphery of the probability variation region is visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible for the player to confirm whether or not the game ball that has entered the lower special variable winning ball device 7B has passed through the probability variation area.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A in the left gaming area 2A, the gaming ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 11-2. The first starting condition is satisfied because of the above. After that, for example, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied because the previous special figure game or the jackpot gaming state has ended, the special figure game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. Is started.

When the game ball passes through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B in the right game area 2B, that game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 11-2. As a result, the second starting condition is satisfied. After that, for example, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied because the previous special figure game or the jackpot gaming state has ended, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is started. However, when the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning port.

In the present embodiment, in the normal game state different from the probability variation state, the normal variable winning a prize ball device 6B is in the second variable state, so that it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning hole. .. Therefore, the special figure game using the second special figure is not started. Therefore, in the normal game state which is not yet controlled in the probability changing state, the player guides the game ball to the left game area 2A and uses the special special game based on the first special prize based on the winning at the first starting winning opening. And the "big hit" of the special figure game. In the big hit game state based on the result of the variable display result of the special hit game using the first special drawing, the game ball enters the lower special variable winning ball device 7B in a specific round. Furthermore, it becomes possible to pass through the probability variation region. When the game ball passes through the probability variation area, the probability variation confirmation flag is set, and the transition to the special game state controlled to the probability variation state is determined. After that, when the big hit game state ends, it is controlled to the probability change state, the normal variable winning a prize ball device 6B changes to the first variable state, and the game ball can pass through the second starting winning hole. In this embodiment, the second special figure game is more advantageous than the first special figure game. Therefore, the player guides the game ball to the right game area 2A, starts the special figure game using the second special figure based on the winning at the second starting winning opening, and the "big hit game" of the special figure game. Will be aimed at. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with various game experiences that change according to the game state.

In the big hit game state, the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening is opened, and the upper special variable winning ball device 7A or the lower special variable winning ball device 7B becomes the first state advantageous to the player. Then, during the predetermined period, or until a predetermined number of game balls enter the upper prize hole or the lower prize hole to generate the prize ball, the upper prize hole or the lower prize hole is continued. A round game to be opened is executed. During periods other than the execution period of the round game, the upper special winning opening and the lower special winning opening are closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate winning balls. When a game ball enters the upper prize hole, the upper prize switch 23A detects the prize ball, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball each time the game ball is detected. When a game ball enters the lower special winning opening, the lower special winning opening switch 23B detects the winning ball, and similarly a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times is reached. Therefore, in the big hit game state, the player can very easily obtain a large number of prize balls, and the game state is advantageous for the player. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give a score corresponding to the number of game balls to become prize balls.

After the jackpot gaming state is over, the probability that the variable display result is "big hit" may be controlled to be higher than the normal state based on the establishment of a predetermined probability variation control condition. In the present embodiment, the probability variation control condition is that the probability variation area switch 24A detects passage of the game sphere that has entered the lower special variable prize winning ball device 7B from the lower special winning opening to the probability variation area. This probability variation state is controlled to continue until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times. That is, the end of the variable display for the predetermined number of times is the certainty change end condition.

In the probability changing state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B in the second variable state in the normal state, the first variable state in which the game ball can pass through the second starting winning port, and the second variable state in which it is impossible. Change. In this way, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state is referred to as the electric Chu opening control. In the present embodiment, the second special figure game started when the game ball has passed through the second starting winning opening is started when passing through the first starting winning opening that can be passed even in the normal state. This is more advantageous to the player than the first special figure game. Therefore, the probability change state in which the electric Chu opening control is executed is a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

It should be noted that when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the electric tube opening control may not be performed. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the upper limit winning opening and the lower winning opening are in the open state in the big hit game state, the upper limit time is short, and the game ball is difficult to pass or cannot pass. A game is executed, and after the big hit game state ends, it may be controlled to a probability change state. In such a case, the jackpot type is also referred to as "probable". Then, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability" when the electric Chu opening control is not being performed, the probability change control is performed after the big hit game state ends, but the positive change state is performed. It is also possible not to perform the electric charge opening control.

The game ball used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the record information of the points given in correspondence with the number thereof have, for example, a valuable value that can be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize according to the number. I wish I had it. Alternatively, the recorded information of the game balls and the points may not be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes, but may have valuable value that can be used for another game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, the game value that can be given in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the payout of a game ball that is a prize ball and the addition of a score, and for example, control in a jackpot game state or a special game state such as a probability variation state Control, the jackpot gaming state, which is more advantageous in the case of a jackpot, is selected to be the first proportion higher than the second proportion, and the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot gaming state is the second It may include that the game situation is advantageous for the player, such as the first round number being larger than the round number, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state being the first probability higher than the second probability. ..

In this embodiment, a round game of the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot is executed. Of these, when the number of times of executing the round game becomes “3” as the specific number, the round game with the lower special winning opening opened is executed, and the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is advantageous for the player. It will be in the first state. On the other hand, when the number of times of executing the round game is other than “3” as the specific number of times, the round game with the upper special winning opening in the open state is executed, and the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is advantageous to the player. It becomes a state. In the round game executed for the third time, since the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is in the first state and the game ball that has entered the lower special variable winning ball device 7B can pass through the probability variation area, these round games are It is also called a certain variation open round game. On the other hand, the round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7A other than the third time is in the first state is also referred to as a normally open round game. In addition, the period when one round game is executed is one round, and the big hit game state executed based on one "big hit" includes a plurality of rounds. Of these, the round in which the lower special variable winning ball device 7B executed in the third time is opened is expressed as the lower opening round. The other rounds in which the upper special variable winning device 7A is in the open state are expressed as upper open rounds. That is, when the variable display result is "big hit", in the big hit game state controlled based on the "big hit", the round game provided with the operation time of the lower big winning opening door and the upper big winning A plurality of round games including a round game in which the operating time of the door is provided are executed.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "big hit", as the big hit type, in the big hit game state controlled based on the "big hit", the number of times of executing the round game is "3" as the specific number of times. , There are a plurality of types of jackpots having different upper limit times for opening the lower special winning opening. As an example, when the jackpot type is the "first jackpot", it is controlled to the "first jackpot gaming state" in which the upper limit time for opening the lower jackpot is 52 milliseconds. When the jackpot type is "second jackpot" or "third jackpot", the jackpot gaming state is set such that the upper limit time for opening the lower jackpot is longer than the first jackpot. In the first big hit game state, the control time of the open state is as short as 52 milliseconds, so that the rate at which the game ball can actually enter the lower special winning opening and enter the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is low. Therefore, when the big hit type is the "first big hit", it is unlikely that the game ball will pass through the lower big winning opening, and it is difficult to establish the probability variation control condition for entering the probability variation state after the big hit game state is over. On the other hand, in the second big hit or third big hit game state, since it is opened for about 29 seconds, if the game ball is guided to the right game area 2B in which the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is installed, the game ball has a high rate. Can enter the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. Therefore, after the end of the big hit game state, the probability variation control condition for becoming the probability variation state is easily established.

Which of the plurality of types of jackpots is selected is determined at a predetermined ratio, for example, in response to the determination that the variable display result is “big hit” at the start of the special drawing game. When a game ball enters the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, not only is a predetermined number of game balls paid out, but also the game ball passes through the probability changing area depending on the position of the probability changing area lid, and the variable display result becomes "big hit". Probability is controlled to be a probable state that is higher than the non-probable state. Therefore, the second big hit and third big hit game states are more advantageous to the player than the first big hit game state. Further, the third jackpot gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the second jackpot gaming state in that the prize balls are often paid out in the upper opening round. The second jackpot is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot in terms of payout of prize balls and establishment of the probability variation control condition.

In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display. Various processes are selected in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and to set the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A and the lower special variable winning ball device 7B in a predetermined procedure. To be executed.

Subsequent to the special symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes the probability variation area solenoid control processing for controlling the position of the probability variation area lid and the validity/invalidity of the probability variation area. In the probability variation area solenoid control process, the CPU 103 controls the opening/closing of the probability variation area lid based on the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code set in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the big hit game state being set to "1". Then, the switching control for enabling/disabling the probability variation region is executed. For example, opening and closing of the probability variation region lid and switching between valid and invalid of the probability variation region are executed based on the probability variation solenoid pattern table. The probability variation solenoid pattern table may be a table in which the timing of switching the open/closed state of the probability variation region lid and the timing of switching the validity/invalidity of the probability variation region are stored in association with the elapsed time from the start of the round in the round game. Alternatively, in connection with the opening and closing of the lower special winning opening, if the lower special winning opening is in the open state, the probability variation area may be in the open state and the probability variation area may be valid. On the other hand, when the lower special winning opening is closed, the probability variation area may be closed and the probability variation area may be invalidated. In the probability variation area solenoid control process, a usage pattern is selected from a plurality of probability variation solenoid pattern tables stored in the ROM 101 in accordance with the big hit type and the number of rounds of the round game to be executed. Then, based on the selected usage pattern, the probability variation area detection valid flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is updated. Further, by updating the probability variation area solenoid buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in accordance with the value of the read solenoid output designation data, the solenoid 82C for the probability variation area lid is turned on/off according to the solenoid output designation data. To control. That is, the position of the probability variation region lid is controlled. The probability variation region solenoid buffer is an output buffer for outputting a control signal for designating ON/OFF to the probability variation region lid solenoid 82C, and the probability variation region command in the command control process according to the value stored in the buffer. A control signal is output to the area cover solenoid 82C.

FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 of FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. 11C, the CPU 103 performs any of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Select or execute. Of the description of these processes, the same description as that described with reference to FIG. 7 will not be repeated.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., in the big hit game state, the execution of the round game according to the big hit type is started and the upper big prize hole or the lower big prize hole is opened. It includes a process for setting the open state and the like. In the present embodiment, this jackpot opening preprocessing determines whether or not the round game to be started is a probability variation opening round in which the lower special winning opening is opened, and if it is a probability variation opening round, Further, a process of setting the probability variation region solenoid control code to 1 is further included as common control data for supporting the start of the position control of the probability variation region lid and the start of the valid/invalid control of the probability variation region. Further, it further includes a process of updating the solenoid output data table according to the big winning opening to be opened. When the jackpot opening preprocessing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This big hit opening process is a process of measuring the elapsed time after the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the upper special winning opening switch 23A or the lower large winning opening switch 23B. Based on the number of gaming balls or the like detected by, the processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. In this big hit opening process, the lower special winning opening detection process is further executed in the probability variation opening round. In addition, the lower special winning opening detection process is based on the number of gaming balls that have won the lower special variable winning ball device 7B and the number of gaming balls discharged from the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. The process of counting the game balls in the device 7B, the process of determining whether or not the passage of the game balls to the probability variation region is detected, the probability variation confirmation flag is set when the passage of the probability variation region is detected when the probability variation region is valid. Including processing to set. When the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". In this embodiment, when the round game is finished, whether the upper special winning opening or the lower large winning opening is closed, the process of closing the upper special winning opening and the lower large winning opening The process of closing the winning opening is executed together. Therefore, the process of determining whether the target of the closing process is the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening is unnecessary. Further, it is easy to change the design because it is only necessary to delete or add the process of making the closed state regardless of whether the number of special winning openings to be used is increased or decreased.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening is opened has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or the upper limit number has not been reached. In this case, a process of waiting until the next round game is started is included. In the present embodiment, as the jackpot opening post-processing, the above-described lower special winning opening detection processing is further executed in the probability variation opening round. In addition, after the big hit opening processing, based on the number of gaming balls in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B counted by the big winning opening detection processing, processing for allowing execution of control after the running round is further performed. included. Then, when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7".

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed by the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the like. It includes a process of waiting until the time elapses, a process of performing various settings for controlling to the probable variation state and the time saving state in response to the success or failure of the probabilistic variation control condition, and the like. Then, when the setting for controlling the probability variation state or the time saving state is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

11-4 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S110 of FIG. 11-3 as a special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 11-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (step S231). The second special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the number of the second special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in step S231 (step S231; NO), the reservation stored corresponding to the reservation number "1" in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B. Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out as data (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer or the like and temporarily stored.

Subsequent to the process of step S232, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the second special storage number count value by updating the second special storage number by 1, and the second special figure is updated. The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number “1” in the pending storage unit 151B is shifted upward by one entry (step S233). Further, in the processing of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so that the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1. At this time, the variable special map designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special map designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S234).

When the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" in step S231 (step S231; YES), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation storage number is "0" (step S235). The first special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved storage number count value stored in the first reserved storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". do it. Thus, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure pending storage number is "0", and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

When the number of the first special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in step S235 (step S235; NO), the reservation stored corresponding to the reservation number "1" in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A. As data, numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer or the like and temporarily stored.

Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, the first special storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the first reserved memory count value, and the first special memory is updated to be decreased by 1, and the first special map is updated. The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number "1" in the pending storage unit is shifted to the upper by one entry (step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so that the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1. At this time, the variable special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

After performing either of the processing of steps S234 and S238, it is determined whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is “big hit” or “miss” (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, the special figure display result determination table prepared by being stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in the use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, a numerical value that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates whether the special figure display result is a “big hit” according to whether the probability variation control is performed or not. ”And “miss” should be assigned to the determination result. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table on the basis of the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read out from the random number buffer for variation.

FIG. 11-5(A) shows an example of determination in the process of step S239. In this example of determination, the determination rate of whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” is varied depending on the presence or absence of the probability variation control in the probability variation state. More specifically, when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” at a higher rate than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state. Therefore, in the probability variation state in which the probability variation control is performed, the special figure display result is more likely to be "big hit" and in the jackpot gaming state than in the normal state in which the probability variation control is not performed. That is, the probability variation state in which the probability variation control is performed is more advantageous to the player than the normal state in which the probability variation control is not performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S239 is "big hit" (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S240; YES), for example, a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to an on state (step). S241), the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to the determination result as to which of the plurality of jackpot types according to the fluctuation special map designation buffer value or the like. Just do it. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination read from the variation random number buffer.

FIG. 11-5(B) shows an example of determination in the process of step S242. In this example of determination, the special symbols that are variably displayed in the special figure game in which the start condition is satisfied are different in the determination ratio of the big hit type depending on whether the special symbol is the first special figure or the second special figure. ing. Here, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the start condition of the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, and the variation special figure becomes the first special figure. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the special special game display device 4B start condition of the special figure game is satisfied, the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure. In the determination example shown in FIG. 11-5(B), when the variation special map is the first special map, the big hit type is determined to be either “first big hit” or “second big hit”. On the other hand, when the variation special map is the second special map, the big hit type is only determined to be the “third big hit”. That is, the jackpot type is determined to be the “first jackpot” and the “second jackpot” only when the variation special map is the first special map. In this way, different jackpot types may be determined according to the special symbols variably displayed in the special figure game. Further, the jackpot type is determined to be "third jackpot" only when the variation special map is the second special map.

In this embodiment, a round game of the number of rounds corresponding to the type of big hit is executed, and the lower special winning opening is opened in a predetermined probability variation open round in the big hit game state. In the normal opening round, the upper prize hole is opened. Here, when the big hit type is "the second big hit" and "the third big hit", in the predetermined probability variation open round in the big hit game state, the big hit type is lower than the first big hit. The upper limit time of the open state becomes long, and the probability variation control condition for becoming the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is easily established. By the jackpot type is determined by the determination rate as shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), when the variation special map is the second special map, the jackpot game at a higher rate than when it is the first special map The probability variation control condition for achieving the probability variation state after the state ends is satisfied. That is, when the special figure display result is "big hit" in the second special figure game, the probability variation control condition is more easily established than when the special figure display result is "big hit" in the first special figure game.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is the “first jackpot”, the upper limit time for opening the lower special winning opening is as short as 52 milliseconds, so that the percentage of game balls entering the lower special winning opening is very high. Low. Therefore, the probability that the probability variation control condition is satisfied is very low. On the other hand, in the case of the “second big hit” and the “third big hit”, since the upper limit time is 29 seconds, the probability that the game ball enters the lower special winning opening is high. Therefore, the probability that the probability variation control condition is satisfied is high. In the present embodiment, when the "big hit" occurs in the probability changing state, the big hit type is determined as "second big hit" or "third big hit", so the special game is controlled from the normal game state to the positive change state. It is possible to set such that while the rate of being in the state is lowered, the “big hit” continues at a high rate once the probability variation state is once controlled. As for the “second big hit”, the probability that the probability variation control condition is satisfied is higher than that of the “first big hit” like the “third big hit”, but since the number of rounds is smaller than that of the third big hit, the “big hit” is The number of balls to be paid out as prize balls based on "."

To explain the mechanism in detail, in the special drawing game using the first special drawing, when the variable display result is "big hit", it becomes the first big hit at a predetermined rate and based on the "big hit". The probability variation control condition is not satisfied in the big hit game state controlled by, and after the big hit game state ends, the game state shifts to the normal game state that is not controlled to the probability change state. On the other hand, in the special figure game using the first special figure, in the case of the "second big hit", the probability variation control condition is satisfied at a high rate in the big hit game state controlled based on the "big hit", and the big hit game is played. After the state is finished, it is controlled to a special game state which is controlled to the probability variation state. In the special game state, the normal variable winning a prize ball device 6B is controlled to the open state, and the special figure game using the second special figure can be started. In the special figure game using the second special figure, when the variable display result is "big hit", it is always "third big hit", so that the probability change state is controlled again with a high probability after the big hit ends. For this reason, until all the special figure games of a predetermined number of times in the probability variation state are "missed" and the probability variation ending condition is satisfied, the "big hit" and the probability variation state continue in succession. With such a configuration, while the percentage of the variable display result of the big hit type being "the second big hit" is reduced in the first special figure game which is performed in the normal gaming state, the variable display result of the "second big hit" is temporarily changed. After being derived, the probability that the probability change state and the “big hit” will continue to increase will provide a sharp and exciting gaming experience.

After executing the process of step S242, the big hit type is stored (step S243). In the process of step S243, for example, by storing the data showing the determination result of the big hit type in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the big hit type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, the big hit type can be stored. Good.

When it is determined in step S240 that it is not a “big hit” (step S240; NO), after executing the processing of step S243, a pre-determined result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, and further, a big hit Corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the game state, the fixed special symbol is set (step S244). As an example, when it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol display result corresponds to the pre-determined result of “missing”, and the pattern becomes a losing symbol. The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if the special figure display result is determined to be a "big hit" in step S240, any of the special symbols that are predetermined as a plurality of kinds of big hit symbols, depending on the determination result of the big hit type in step S242. It may be set as a confirmed special symbol. In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is "first jackpot", the symbol "5" or "9" is used, and when it is "second jackpot", the symbol "3" is used. In the case of "3 big hits", the symbol "7" is set as the definite symbol with the special symbols respectively indicated.

After executing the process of step S244, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" (step S245), the special symbol normal process is ended. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" in step S245, and the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 11C is executed.

If the number of pending storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S235 (step S235; YES), after performing a predetermined demo display setting (step S246), the special symbol Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, has an effect control command for designating a demonstration display such as displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 already transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12? Determine whether or not. At this time, if it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 11-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 11-3 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 11-6, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special symbol finalized display flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. (Step S261). The special figure fixed display flag is set to the ON state in response to the fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the special figure game being derivatized and displayed.

In step S261, when the special symbol finalization display flag is off (step S261; NO), setting for deriving and displaying the finalized special symbol is performed (step S262), and the command transmission setting at the time of symbol finalization is set. It is performed (step S263). For example, an effect control command prepared in advance as a symbol determination command is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 12. Further, a predetermined constant time is set as the special figure display time (step S264). Then, after the special symbol finalized display flag is set to the on state (step S265), the special symbol stop processing is ended. At this time, since the special figure process flag is not updated, the special symbol stop processing is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs.

When the special figure finalization display flag is ON in step S261 (step S261; YES), it is determined whether the special figure finalization display time has elapsed (step S266). At this time, if the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed (step S266; NO), the special symbol stop process ends. Here, since the special figure process flag is not updated, the special symbol stop processing is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs, and waits until the special figure fixed display time elapses.

When the special figure finalization display time has elapsed in step S266 (step S266; YES), the special figure finalization display flag is cleared and turned off (step S267), and then the big hit flag is turned on. It is determined (step S268). When the big hit flag is on (step S268; YES), the fanfare production time corresponding to the big hit type is set (step S269).

FIG. 11-7 is a diagram showing a fanfare time table. Referring to FIG. 11-7, as shown in FIGS. 11-7(A) and 11-7(B), respectively, a big hit occurs in the low base state and a big hit occurs in the high base state. The fanfare production time is set in advance in accordance with the type of jackpot in response to the continuous chanting.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the transmission setting of the big hit start designation command capable of specifying the fanfare production time according to the big hit type is performed (step S270), and, for example, the RAM 102 such as the game control flag setting unit 152. The big hit start flag provided in the predetermined area of is set to the ON state (step S271). Then, the setting for ending the probability variation control is performed (step S272). For example, as the process of step S272, a process of clearing a probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like to an off state, or a probability variation for counting the number of remaining special figure games in which the probability variation control is performed. It suffices to execute processing such as clearing the frequency counter.

The probability variation counter is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the game control counter setting unit 154, and corresponds to the upper limit number of special figure games in which probability variation control is performed when the probability variation state is reached after the jackpot gaming state ends. The initial count value may be set.

After executing the processing of step S272, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" (step S273), and then the special symbol stop processing is ended. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4", the next time a timer interrupt occurs, the big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 shown in FIG. 11C is executed.

When the big hit flag is off in step S268 (step S268; NO), the value of the special figure process flag is initialized to "0" (step S274). After executing the process of step S274, it is determined whether or not the probability variation control is to be ended (step S275). As an example, in the process of step S275, when the probability variation count value stored in the probability variation counter is other than “0”, the count value is updated by subtracting 1 from the updated value, and the updated probability variation count after updating. It is determined whether or not the count value matches a predetermined probability variation end determination value. At this time, if the probability variation end determination value matches, the probability variation control may be terminated by clearing a predetermined probability variation flag or the like. On the other hand, if it does not match the probability variation end determination value, the state of the probability variation flag is maintained, and the process of step S275 may be terminated.

After executing the process of step S275, after performing the setting for transmitting the game state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S276), the special symbol stop processing is ended. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "0", when the next timer interrupt process occurs, the special symbol normal process of step S110 shown in FIG. 11C is executed.

FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 11-3 as the big hit opening pre-process. In the big hit opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 11-8, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit start flag is on (step S291). The big hit flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S271 shown in FIG. 11-6 in response to the start of the big hit game state.

When the big hit start flag is ON in step S291 (step S291; YES), it is determined whether or not the fanfare production time has elapsed (step S292). At this time, if the fanfare production time has not elapsed (step S292; NO), the big hit opening preprocessing is ended. Here, since the special figure process flag is not updated, the jackpot opening preprocessing is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs, and the process waits until the fanfare production time elapses.

When the fanfare production time has elapsed in step S292 (step S292; YES), as a process for starting the first round game in the big hit game state, after clearing the big hit start flag and turning it off (step) S293), for example, a round counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the control counter setting unit 154 is set to "1" as a count initial value corresponding to the number of round game executions (step S294).

When the big hit start flag is OFF in step S291 (step S291; NO) and after the process of step S294 is executed, for example, from the big hit type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, as shown in FIG. The jackpot type buffer value indicating the jackpot type determined in step S245 is read, and, for example, from a round counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as a game control counter setting unit, a round indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started from now on. The count value is read (step S295).

Then, the CPU 103, on the basis of the big hit type buffer value and the round count value read in step S295, forms a special winning opening to be opened in the round game to be started on the upper special variable winning ball device 7A. Either the special winning opening or the lower special winning opening formed in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is determined (step S296). When the round count value is "3", it is determined to execute the round game in which the lower special winning opening is opened. On the other hand, when the round count value is other than "3", it is determined to execute the round game in which the upper special winning opening is opened. Therefore, when the number of times of executing the round game becomes “3” as the specific number, the round game with the lower special winning opening opened is executed, and the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is advantageous to the player. It becomes a state.

The CPU 103 may set a detection effective switch for effectively detecting a game ball in accordance with the determination of the special winning opening to be opened by the process of step S296. For example, when the round count value is “3”, the lower special winning opening switch 23B is activated in association with the lower special winning opening being opened. On the other hand, when the round count value is other than "3", the upper special winning opening is opened and the detection of the game ball by the upper special winning opening switch 23A is enabled.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special winning opening to be opened determined in step S296 is the lower special winning opening (step S297), and if it is the lower special winning opening (step S297; YES), It is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code set in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is "0" (step S298). If the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code is "0" (step S298) (S298; YES), the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code is set to "1" which is a value corresponding to the probability variation area control pattern setting processing (S299). The probability variation area solenoid control code is a control flag that specifies the position control of the probability variation area lid using the probability variation area solenoid in the probability variation area solenoid control area, and is "0" when the position control of the probability variation area lid is not performed. Is set to "1", and is set to "1" when the position control of the probability variation region lid is started. When it is determined in step S298 that the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code is not "0" (step S298: NO), the jackpot opening preprocessing is ended. Therefore, according to such processing, even if it is determined to open the lower special winning opening, if the value of the probability variation region solenoid control code is not "0", that is, the previous lower special winning opening is opened. When the probability variation area lid corresponding to the round is being controlled, it is possible to prevent the round in which the lower special winning opening is opened from being started.

In step S297, it is determined that the determined special winning opening to be opened is not the lower special winning opening (step S297; NO), or if the processing of step S299 is completed, the opening pattern of the special winning opening according to the type of big hit. The special winning opening opening pattern table determination process for setting is executed (step S300). According to such a process, when it is determined to open the upper special winning opening, since the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code is not referred to, regardless of whether the probability variation area lid is being controlled, You can start the round to open the upper prize hole.

After performing the process of step S300, a solenoid control process for controlling each solenoid is performed (step S301).

After the process of step S301 is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the big hit open process (step S302).

After executing the process of step S302, the CPU 103 sets the interval time from when the upper special prize opening is closed to when the lower special prize opening is opened, and when the lower special prize opening is closed, the upper special prize is awarded. An interval time setting process for setting an interval time until the mouth is opened is executed (step S303). After executing the processing of step S303, the CPU 103 ends the jackpot opening preprocessing.

FIG. 11-9 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S115 of FIG. 11-3 as the big hit opening process. In the big hit opening process shown in FIG. 11-9, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the winning number count value has reached a predetermined maximum winning determination value (step S341). When the maximum winning determination value is not reached in step S341 (step S341; NO), it is determined whether or not an end code is set in the work table before opening the special winning opening (step S342). When it is determined that the end code is not set (step S342; NO), the electric accessory release pattern process is executed (step S343). The electric accessory opening pattern process is a process of controlling opening/closing of the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening according to the opening/closing pattern indicated by the special winning opening opening pattern table determined in the processing of step S300 of FIG. 11-8. ..

After performing the process of step S343 in FIG. 11-9, it is determined whether the count switch is on by checking the detection signal transmitted from the count switch or the like (step S344). For example, in the process of step S344, the detection signal transmitted from the count switch of the special winning opening of which the opening/closing control is being performed among the upper special winning opening and the lower special winning opening is checked. Then, when the count switch is off (step S344; NO), the big hit opening process is ended. On the other hand, when the count switch is on (step S344; YES), the winning number count value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S345), and then the big hit opening process is ended.

When the winning number count value reaches the maximum winning determination value in step S341 (step S341; YES), for example, the driving of the solenoid corresponding to the special winning opening for which opening/closing control is performed is stopped and the big winning is achieved. Settings are made to close the mouth (step S346). For example, when the special winning opening for which the opening/closing control is performed is the upper special winning opening, the setting of closing the upper special winning opening by stopping the driving of the solenoid 82A for the upper special opening door is performed.

After executing the process of step S346 or when it is determined that the end code is set in the process of step S342 (step S342; YES), the round end command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S347).

Next, the CPU 103 determines, based on the round count value, whether or not the round to be ended is a round for opening the lower special winning opening (step S348). Then, when it is determined that the round is to open the lower special winning opening (step S348; YES), the value of the probability variation region solenoid control code is set to "3" which is a value corresponding to the probability variation region control execution process. (Step S349).

After executing the process of step S350, or when it is determined in the process of step S348 that the round is not the one in which the lower special winning opening is opened (step S348; NO), the value of the special figure process flag is changed to the big hit opening post-process. After updating to the corresponding value "6" (step S352), the big hit opening process is ended.

FIG. 11-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S116 of FIG. 11-3 as the post-big hit process. In the big hit opening post-processing shown in FIG. 11-10, the CPU 103 first updates the interval timer value so that 1 is subtracted (step S361). At this time, it is determined whether or not the updated interval timer value has become "0" (step S362). When the interval timer value is other than "0" (step S362; NO), the jackpot opening post-process is ended.

When the interval timer value is "0" in step S362 (step S362; YES), it is determined whether the round count value has reached the upper limit round count value (step S363). If the round count value is less than the upper limit round count value (step S363; NO), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" which is the value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (step S364). , After the jackpot opening process is completed. Thus, until the round count value is determined to be the upper limit round count value by the processing of step S363, the processing of steps S115 to S116 of FIG. It is possible to execute a plurality of rounds in which is opened.

When it is determined in step S363 that the round count value is the upper limit round count value (step S363; YES), the ending effect time corresponding to the jackpot type is set (step S366). At this time, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off.

FIG. 11-11 is a diagram showing an ending time table. Referring to FIG. 11-11, as shown in FIGS. 11-11(A) and 11-11(B), respectively, a big hit occurs in the low base state and a big hit occurs in the high base state. The ending effect time is set in advance according to the type of big hit with respect to the continuous winning time.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-11, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a big hit end designation command capable of specifying an ending effect time according to the kind of big hit to the effect control board 12 (step S367). .. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the big hit ending process (step S368), and the big hit opening post-process is ended. Note that the CPU 103 may count the number of continuation of the time saving state and identify the number of continuation of the time saving state by making it possible to identify by the EXT data of the big hit end designation command or the like.

FIG. 11-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S117 of FIG. 11-3 as the big hit ending process. In the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 11-12, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed (step S381). As an example, in the processing of step S365 in the jackpot opening post-processing shown in FIG. 11-10, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the ending effect time is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S381, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and it is determined whether the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed. When the ending effect time has not elapsed in step S381 (step S381; NO), the jackpot ending process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, when the ending effect time has elapsed in step S381 (step S381; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the passage flag is on (step S382). Here, the passage flag is a flag that is set to an ON state when the probability variation area switch 24A detects passage of the game ball into the probability variation area.

When the passage flag is ON in step S382 (step S382; YES), the probability variation control is started to set the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the probability variation state (step S383). As an example, in the process of step S383, in addition to setting the probability variation flag to the on state, a count initial value corresponding to the upper limit number of special figure games that can be executed in the probability variation state is set in the probability variation counter. .. After that, the passage flag is reset to the off state (step S384). In addition, in the process of step S383, a setting for starting the time saving control in which the average variable display time becomes shorter than the normal state may be executed.

After the processing of step S384 is executed, or when the passage flag is not on in the processing of step S382 (step S382; NO), the setting for starting the high base control is performed (step S385). As an example, in the process of step S385, the time saving flag and the advantageous state flag are set to the ON state, and the preset initial count value corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game executable in the time saving state is set. , The special figure variation counter may be set.

After performing the process of step S385, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S386), the big hit ending process is ended.

FIG. 11-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In this effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit. .. Of the description of these processes, the same description as that described with reference to FIG. 7 will not be repeated.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In this special figure winning wait process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit start processing. To do. When the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "miss", and the value of the effect process flag is the initial value. Update to "0".

The big hit start process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In the big hit start process, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit game state on the image display device 5 after the end of the variable display time. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the processing during the round.

The in-round process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the processing during this round, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control during the round. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "6" which is a value corresponding to the post-round processing. If the final round is finished, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the post-end processing of the big hit.

The post-round processing of step S176 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this post-round processing, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the processing during the round.

The post-big hit completion process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this post-big hit end process, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control in the image display device 5 to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process.

FIG. 11-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure winning waiting process executed in step S173 of FIG. 11-13. In the special symbol winning waiting process shown in FIG. 11-14, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a symbol fixing designation command has been received (step S720). When the symbol confirmation designation command is not received (step S720; NO), the special symbol winning waiting process is ended.

When the symbol fixing designation command is received (step S720; YES), the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the fixed decorative symbol (step S722). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the confirmed decorative design is a jackpot design (step S723). When the fixed decorative design is not the big hit design (step S723: NO), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step S726), and the special design winning wait process. To finish.

When the confirmed decorative design is the big hit design (step S723: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command has been received (step S730). When the hit start designation command is not received (step S730; NO), the special figure hit waiting process is ended.

When the hit start designation command is received (step S730; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the fanfare effect as described later with reference to FIG. 11-17 (step S733A), and the fanfare effect time timer. The value is set (step S733B), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" corresponding to the big hit start process (step S174) (step S734), and the special figure hit waiting process is ended.

FIG. 11-15 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot start process executed in step S174 of FIG. 11-13. In the jackpot start process shown in FIG. 11-15, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a special winning opening opening notification command is received (step S741). Here, the special winning opening opening notification command is a command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state.

When the special winning opening opening notification command is not received (step S741; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the fanfare effect execution process shown in FIG. 11-16 (step S742), and ends the big hit start process. .. As an example, in the process of step S742, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1, and the effect device is controlled in accordance with the content of the process data n. For example, in the image display device 5, an effect of displaying a jackpot display pattern and displaying characters or characters indicating that the jackpot has occurred is executed. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched, and the process data set next in the process table is switched. , Set the process timer set value in the next process data to the process timer and start the process timer.

When the special winning opening opening notification command is received (step S741; YES), the setting for starting the big hit medium effect is performed (step S743). As an example, in the process of step S743, the in-round effect is selected based on the contents of the special winning opening opening notification command, then the process table corresponding to the in-round effect is selected, and the process timer is started.

Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S744), and then the jackpot start processing is ended.

FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of fanfare production execution processing. With reference to FIG. 11-16, the CPU 120 for effect control subtracts 1 from the fanfare effect time timer value (step 069FS111). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fanfare effect time timer value has become 0 (step 069FS112).

When it is determined that the fanfare production time timer value is not 0 (NO in step 069FS112), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the start of the fanfare production time (step 069FS113).

When it is determined that it is the start of the fanfare production time (YES in step 069FS113), the effect control CPU 120 selects the notification effect according to the big hit type and the number of consecutive chanting (step 069FS114), and starts the big hit type suggestion display. (Step 069FS115). The notification effect is an effect for notifying the type of effect executed in the big hit round. The jackpot type suggestion display is a display for suggesting the jackpot type.

When it is determined that it is not the start of the fanfare production time (NO in step 069FS113), and after step 069FS115, the production control CPU 120 determines whether it is the start of the notification production (step 069FS121). The start time of the notification effect is predetermined for each fanfare effect time, and for example, when the fanfare effect time is 13 seconds and 20 seconds, the time is 5 seconds and 7 seconds from the start of the fanfare effect time, respectively. Is.

When it is determined that it is the start time of the notification effect (YES in step 069FS121), the effect control CPU 120 starts execution of the notification effect selected based on the jackpot type (step 069FS122).

When it is determined that it is not the time to start the notification effect (NO in step 069FS121) and after step 069FS122, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the started notification effect is the notification effect that accepts the selection by the player. Is determined (step 069FS123). When it is determined that the player's selection is the notification effect (YES in step 069FS123), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the selection acceptable period in the notification effect (step 069FS124).

When it is determined that the selection is acceptable (YES in step 069FS124), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection is accepted (step 069FS125). When it is determined that the selection has been accepted (YES in step 069FS125), the effect control CPU 120 sets the accepted content as the effect content for the jackpot round (step 069FS126).

If it is determined that it is not a notification effect for accepting the player's selection (NO in step 069FS123), it is determined that it is not accepting the selection (NO in step 069FS125) if it is determined that it is not in the selection acceptable period (NO in step 069FS124). In the case, and after step 069FS126, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the calling source of the fanfare effect execution process.

FIG. 11-17 is a timing chart showing an example of fanfare production. With reference to FIG. 11-17, the following is set in the fanfare effect setting executed in step S733A of FIG. 11-14 described above. When the hit start designation command received in step S730 is a command indicating a 6R normal big hit, 13 seconds is set as the fanfare production time in step 733A, as shown in FIG. 11-7, and FIG. ) The effect data is set so that the effect indicated by () is executed.

FIG. 11-17(A) shows a timing chart when it is determined that the 6R normal big hit is decided. First, the jackpot type suggestion display is executed in the first 5 seconds of the fanfare production time. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like showing that the jackpot type is the 6R normal jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5.

The jackpot type notification effect is executed as the notification effect in 8 seconds from the fifth to the 13th second of the fanfare effect time. The big hit type notification effect is an effect of notifying the confirmed big hit type. From the time when the big hit type suggestion display and the big hit type notification effect are executed, the right-hand hit notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from then on.

When the hit start designation command received in step S730 is a command indicating a 6R probability variation big hit, in step 733A, as shown in FIG. 11-7, 13 seconds is set as the fanfare production time, and FIG. ) Or the effect shown in FIG. 11-17(C) is determined by lottery (for example, it is determined that the effect of FIG. 11-17(B) is executed at a rate of 30%, and 70% of 11-17 (C) is determined to execute the effect), and effect data is set so that the determined effect is executed.

FIG. 11-17(B) shows a first timing chart when it is determined that the 6R probability variation big hit is determined. First, the jackpot type suggestion display is executed in the first 5 seconds of the fanfare production time. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like showing that the jackpot type is the 6R normal jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5.

The round promotion effect is executed as the notification effect in 8 seconds from the fifth to the 13th second of the fanfare effect time. The round promotion effect is an effect in which the player is shown to have been promoted from a jackpot having a low advantage to the player to a jackpot having a high advantage to the player. Right hit notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from the time when the big hit type suggestion display and the round promotion effect are executed, and thereafter.

FIG. 11-17(C) shows a second timing chart when it is determined that the 6R probability variation big hit is determined. First, the jackpot type suggestion display is executed in the first 5 seconds of the fanfare production time. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like indicating that the jackpot type is the 6R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5.

The music selection effect is executed as the notification effect in 6 seconds from the fifth to the 11th second of the fanfare effect time. The music selection effect is an effect of selecting the music output during the big hit. The special right-handing notification is executed in 2 seconds from the 11th second to the 13th second of the fanfare production time. The above-mentioned right-handed notification is executed by displaying a small "right-handed" in the upper right part of the image display device 5, whereas the special right-handed notification is displayed in the central part of the image display device 5 by a large right-handed part. It is executed by displaying "Strike". The right hit notification is displayed on the image display device 5 during and after the jackpot type suggestion display, the music selection effect, and the special right hit notification.

If the hit start designation command received in step S730 is a command indicating a 16R probability variable big hit, in step 733A, as shown in FIG. 11-7, 20 seconds is set as the fanfare production time, and FIG. ) The effect data is set so that the effect indicated by () is executed.

FIG. 11-17(D) shows a timing chart when it is determined that the 16R probability variation big hit is determined. First, the jackpot type suggestion display is executed in the first 7 seconds of the fanfare production time. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like showing that the jackpot type is the 16R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5.

In the 13 seconds from the 7th second to the 20th second of the fanfare production time, the music selection production is executed as the notification production. Right hit notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from the time when the jackpot type suggestion display and the music selection effect are executed, and thereafter.

FIG. 11-18 is a screen transition diagram showing the flow of fanfare production. With reference to FIG. 11-18, in the production in the case of the 6R certainty variation jackpot shown in FIG. 11-17(B), as shown in FIG. 11-18(A), as a jackpot type suggestion display, a 6R normal jackpot is displayed. An image including a character “C big hit” indicating that is displayed on the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIGS. 11-18(B) and 11-18(C), as a result of the round promotion effect being executed, an image including the characters “B jackpot” indicating that it is a 6R certainty variation jackpot. Is displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the effect in the case of the 16R certainty variation jackpot shown in FIG. 11-17(D), as shown in FIG. 11-18(D), the 16R certainty variation jackpot is displayed as the jackpot type suggestion display. An image including the characters “big hit” is displayed on the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIGS. 11-18(E) and 11-18(F), the music selection effect is executed, and the player's selection is accepted by the operation of the stick controller 31A. As a result, the selected jackpot is selected. An image including a character indicating that the music inside is “music G” is displayed on the image display device 5.

It should be noted that, in the case of the 16R certainty variation jackpot, as shown in FIG. 11-18(E), there are 10 music options, but in the case of the 6R certainty variation jackpot, there are fewer songs. Number (for example, 3 songs). As shown in FIGS. 11-17(C) and (D), 16R probability variation jackpots are more music choices than 6R probability variation jackpots, but since the period of music selection performance is lengthened, the player Can make it difficult to select songs.

In addition, when the big hits are consecutively changed, it is possible to add music options for the 16R probability variation big hit. The number of options in the first hit may be smaller, the same, or larger than the number of options in the 6R certainty variation big hit.

Further, when the selected music piece is output, a video image is also displayed.

FIG. 11-19 is a flowchart showing details of the in-round process executed in step S175 of FIG. 11-13. In the in-round processing shown in FIG. 11-19, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a special winning opening open designation command has been received (step S751). When the command after opening the special winning opening has not been received (step S751; NO), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for controlling the effect operation that is a round effect according to the number of rounds (step S752). An ending effect selection second process shown in FIG. 11-20 described later is executed (step S752A). As an example, in the process of step S752, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1, and the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data n. For example, in the image display device 5, an effect of displaying a jackpot display symbol and displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like is executed. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched, and the process data set next in the process table is switched. , Set the process timer set value in the next process data to the process timer and start the process timer.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the "second jackpot", for example, by reading the EXT data in the jackpot opening notification command transmitted from the main board 11 ( Step S753).

When the big hit type is not the “second big hit” in step S753 (step S753; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the in-round process.

On the other hand, when the big hit type is the “second big hit” in step S753 (step 753; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the probability variation confirmation command is received from the main board 11 (step S754). .. Here, the probability variation confirmation command is a command for notifying that the probability variation region switch 24A is turned on and the probability variation state is confirmed.

When the probability variation confirmation command is received in step S754 (step S754; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the winning effect control (step S755). For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a winning effect indicating that a game ball has won in the probability variation area as the winning effect control setting.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the winning flag indicating that the game ball has won in the probability variation area during the round game to the on state (step S756).

When the probability variation confirmation command is not received in step S754 (step S754; NO), or after the processing of step S756 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting for starting the instruction effect is performed. It is determined whether or not (step S757). Here, the instruction effect is an effect for instructing the player to perform an operation of launching a game ball to the lower special variable winning ball device 7B.

When the setting for starting the instruction effect (instruction effect start setting) is made in step S757 (step S757; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs the instruction effect control setting (step S758). For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes an instruction effect as an instruction effect control setting.

When the setting for starting the instructed effect (instruction effect start setting) is not performed in step S757 (step S757; NO), or after the process of step S758 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 gives the notification effect. It is determined whether or not the setting for starting (notification effect start setting) is made (step S759). Here, the notification effect is an effect for notifying that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area.

When the setting for starting the notification effect (notification effect start setting) is made in step S759 (step S759; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs the notification effect control setting. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the notification effect as the notification effect control setting.

When the setting for starting the notification effect (notification effect start setting) is not performed in step S759 (step S759; NO), or after executing the processing of step S759, the effect control CPU 120 causes the processing during the round. To finish.

When the command after opening the special winning opening is received in step S751 (step S751; YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for starting the interval effect based on the content of the command after opening the special winning opening. Perform (step S761). Here, the interval effect is an effect of performing interval display according to the number of rounds. Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the set interval effect and starts the process timer.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "6" which is the value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S762), and ends the in-round processing.

11-21 is a flowchart showing details of the post-round processing executed in step S176 of FIG. 11-13. In the post-round processing shown in FIG. 11-21, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a hit end designation command has been received (step S771). Here, the hit end designation command is a command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state. When the hit end command has not been received (step S771; NO), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the special winning opening opening notification command has been received (step S772).

When the special winning opening opening notification command is not received (step S772; NO), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for controlling the effect operation that is an interval effect according to the number of rounds (step S773). .. As an example, in the process of step S773, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1, and the effect device is controlled in accordance with the content of the process data n. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched, and the process data set next in the process table is switched. , Set the process timer set value in the next process data to the process timer and start the process timer.

When the special winning opening opening command is received (step S772; YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for ending the effect operation that is the interval effect according to the number of rounds (step S774). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the "second jackpot", for example, by reading the EXT data in the jackpot opening notification command transmitted from the main board 11 ( Step S775). At this time, if the big hit type is the “second big hit” (step S775; YES), for example, by reading the EXT data in the special winning opening opening notification command transmitted from the main board 11, It is determined whether the number of rounds is 9 (step S776).

When the next round is 9 rounds in step S776 (step S776; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting the instruction effect (instruction effect start setting) (step S777). As an example, in the process of step S777, a process table corresponding to the instruction effect is selected and a process timer is started.

On the other hand, when the next round is not 9 rounds in step S776 (step S776; NO), the effect control CPU 120 reads, for example, the EXT data in the special winning opening opening notification command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like. Thus, it is determined whether the next round is 10 rounds (step S778).

When the next round is 10 rounds in step S778 (step S778; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning flag is set to the on state (step S779).

When the winning flag is set to the ON state in step S779 (step S779; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting for starting the notification effect (notification effect start setting) (step S780). As an example, in the process of step S780, the process table corresponding to the notification effect is selected and the process timer is started.

If the jackpot type is not the “second jackpot” in step S775 (step S775; NO), the next round is not 10 rounds in step S778 (step S778; NO), or the winning flag is on in step S779. If not set (step S779; NO), it is determined whether the next round is any of 13R to 16R (step S783).

When the next round is any of 13R to 16R (step S783; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect selection first process shown in FIG. 11-20 described later.

When the next round is none of 13R to 16R (step S783; NO), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for starting an effect operation that is a round effect corresponding to the number of rounds (step S781). As an example, in the process of step S781, the process table corresponding to the performance during the round is selected and the process timer is started.

After executing the process of step S777, the process of step S780, the process of step S781, or the process of step S784, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect process flag. The value is updated to "5", which is the value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S782), and the post-round processing is ended.

When the hit end command is received in the process of step S771 (S771; YES), the ending effect is set as described later with reference to FIG. 11-25 (step S782A), and the ending effect time timer value is set. (Step S782B), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the big hit end post-processing (step S781), and the round post-processing is ended.

FIG. 11-20 is a flowchart showing an ending effect selection first process and a second process. With reference to FIG. 11-20, in the ending effect selection first process, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the next round is any of 13R to 15R (step 069FS131). When it is determined to be any of 13R to 15R (YES in step 069FS131), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the type of ending effect has not been accepted (step 069FS132).

When it is determined that the selection of the ending effect type has not been received (YES in step 069FS132), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting the ending effect selection acceptance display (step 069FS133).

If it is determined that the next round is neither 13R nor 15R (NO in step 069FS131), it is determined that the selection of ending effect is accepted (NO in step 069FS132), and after step 069FS133 The control CPU 120 determines whether or not the next round is 16R (step 069FS134).

When it is determined to be 16R (step 069FS134), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the type of ending effect has not been accepted (step 069FS135). When it is determined that the selection of the ending effect has been accepted (NO in step 069FS135), the setting for starting the effect which notifies the ending effect of the accepted type as the ending effect to be executed is performed (step 069FS136).

When it is determined that the selection of the type of ending effect has not been received (YES in step 069FS135), the effect control CPU 120 starts the effect of notifying the ending effect of the type automatically selected by the lottery as the ending effect to be executed. Is set (step 069FS137).

When it is determined that the next round is not 16R (NO in step 069FS134), after step 069FS136 and after step 069FS137, the effect control CPU 120 returns the processing to be executed to the calling source of this processing.

In the ending effect selection second process, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current round is any of 13R to 15R (step 069FS141). If it is determined to be any of 13R to 15R (YES in step 069FS141), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for controlling the ending effect selection acceptance display (step 069FS142).

When it is determined that the current round is neither 13R nor 15R (NO in step 069FS141), and after step 069FS142, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending effect selection acceptance display is being displayed. (Step 069FS143). When it is determined that it is being displayed (YES in step 069FS143), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the type of ending effect has been accepted (step 069FS144).

When it is determined that the selection of the type of ending effect is accepted (YES in step 069FS144), the effect control CPU 120 sets the ending effect of the accepted type as the ending effect to be executed (step 069FS145).

When it is determined that the ending effect selection reception display is not being displayed (NO in step 069FS143), selection of the type of ending effect is not accepted (NO in step 069FS144), and after step 069FS145 The control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current round is 16R (step 069FS146). When it is determined to be 16R (YES in step 069FS146), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for controlling the effect that notifies the ending effect to be executed (step 069FS147).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current round is not 16R (NO in step 069FS146) and after step 069FS147, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the calling source of this process.

FIG. 11-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the post-big hit completion process executed in step S177 of FIG. 11-13. In the post-big hit termination process shown in FIG. 11-22, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the ending effect time timer value (step S770), and determines whether or not the ending effect time timer value has become 0 ( Step S771). That is, it is determined whether or not the ending effect time timer has timed out (whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed). When the ending effect time timer value is not 0 (step S771; NO), ending effect execution processing shown in FIG. 11-23 described later is executed (step S772), and the post-big hit processing is ended. When the ending effect time timer value becomes 0 (step S771; YES), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step S773), and the big hit ends. The post-processing ends.

FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart showing an example of ending effect execution processing. Referring to FIG. 11-23, effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the ending effect time timer value (step 069FS151). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending effect time timer value has become 0 (step 069FS152).

When it is determined that the ending effect time timer value is not 0 (NO in step 069FS152), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending effect time is started (step 069FS153).

When it is determined that it is the start of the ending effect time (YES in step 069FS153), the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the ending effect of the set type. (Step 069FS154).

When it is determined that it is not the start time of the ending effect time (NO in step 069FS153), and after step 069FS154, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the ending effect being executed is an ending effect that accepts the selection by the player. It is determined whether or not (step 069FS156). When it is determined that it is the ending effect that accepts the selection by the player (YES in step 069FS156), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the selection acceptable period in the ending effect (step 069FS157).

When it is determined that it is the selection acceptable period (YES in step 069FS157), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection is accepted (step 069FS158). When it is determined that the selection is accepted (YES in step 069FS158), the effect control CPU 120 sets the accepted content as the effect content after the big hit (step 069FS159).

If it is determined that it is not the ending effect that accepts the player's selection (NO in step 069FS156), it is determined that it is not accepting the selection (NO in step 069FS158) if it is determined that it is not in the selection acceptable period (NO in step 069FS157). In the case, and after step 069FS159, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the calling source of the ending effect execution process.

FIG. 11-24 is a screen transition diagram showing the flow of selecting the type of ending effect. Referring to FIG. 11-24, in FIG. 11-24(A), the number of current rounds is increased when the jackpot 13 to 15 rounds are executed by executing the processing shown in FIG. 11-20. In addition to the characters that indicate the total number of balls won in the jackpot, an image that includes characters that prompt the player to select the type of effect at the ending, and the type of effect at the ending. An image including the characters of the options is displayed on the image display device 5. When this screen is displayed, the player can select the type of effect at the ending by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In addition, when the push button 31B is not operated before the selectable period of 15 rounds ends, the type of option in the selected state is selected as the type of effect at the ending.

Next, in FIG. 11-24(A), by performing the processing shown in FIG. 11-20, when the final 16 rounds of the jackpot, the character indicating the current round number and the jackpot are displayed. An image including a character indicating the type of the selected ending effect is displayed on the image display device 5 in addition to the character indicating the total number of the acquired balls.

FIG. 11-25 is a timing chart showing an example of the ending effect. Referring to FIG. 11-25, FIG. 11-25(A) shows a case where the ending effect of effect pattern A is executed at the time of the first hit. At the time of the first hit, the effect pattern A is automatically selected. The effect pattern A is an ending effect effect pattern for selecting the contents of the effect contents in the early stage, the middle game, and the end game in the high base state after the big hit.

When the big hit round ends and the ending effect time starts, first, an introduction effect indicating that the ending effect starts in 2 seconds from 0 seconds to 2 seconds is executed. Next, 5 seconds from the second second to the seventh second is a selection period A for selecting the effect content in the early stage of the effect content after the big hit, and the effect of accepting the selection of the effect content in the early stage from the player. Is executed.

Similarly, for 5 seconds from the 7th to 12th seconds and 5 seconds from the 12th to 17th seconds, to select the midfield and the final stage of the production contents after the big hit, respectively. In the selection period B and the selection period C, the effects for accepting the selection of the effect contents in the middle game and the end game from the player are executed.

In the next 3 seconds from the 17th to the 20th, the effect of displaying the result selected in the selection period A to the selection period C is executed. In the 3 seconds from the 20th to the 23rd, the introduction effect indicating that the probability variation mode starts is executed. In the five seconds from the 23rd to the 28th, the image display device 5 displays a caution display including a display for preventing forgetting to take out the prepaid card and a display for preventing the player from being absorbed in the game. The company logo showing the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the image display device 5 in 4 seconds from the 28th to the 32nd. In the final 32 seconds to the 34th second of the ending effect time, the probability variation mode entry effect indicating that the probability variation mode is entered is executed in 2 seconds.

FIG. 11-25(B) shows a case where the ending effect of effect pattern A is executed at the time of continuous chanting. At the time of consecutive chanting, the player can select the type of ending effect executed during the ending effect time from the 13th round to the 16th round of a big hit.

When the big hit round ends and the ending effect time starts, first, an introduction effect indicating that the ending effect starts in 2 seconds from 0 seconds to 2 seconds is executed. Next, 10 seconds from the second second to the 12th second is a selection period A for selecting the early stage effect content from the effect content after the big hit, and the effect of accepting the selection of the early stage effect content from the player Is executed.

Similarly, for the 10 seconds from the 12th to the 22nd seconds and the 10 seconds from the 22nd to the 32nd seconds, to select the midfield and the final stage of the production contents after the big hit, respectively. In the selection period B and the selection period C, the effects for accepting the selection of the effect contents in the middle game and the end game from the player are executed.

In the next 5 seconds from the 32nd to the 37th seconds, the effect of displaying the result selected in the selection period A to the selection period C is executed. In the 5 seconds from the 37th to the 42nd, the introduction effect indicating that the probability variation mode starts is executed. The probability variation mode entry effect that indicates entry into the probability variation mode is executed in the final three seconds from the 42nd to the 45th seconds of the ending effect time.

In addition, when the effect pattern E is selected from the effect pattern B, among the ending effects of the effect pattern A shown in FIG. 11-25, the effect of the selection period A to the selection period C and the effect of displaying the selection result are: The effect patterns B to E are changed to different effects. The length of the effect of the part that includes the player's intervention elements included in the effect patterns A to E is different, but the ending effect time is the same as the length at which the big hit symbol is displayed in the probability variation mode entry effect. Is adjusted to.

FIG. 11-26 is a screen transition diagram illustrating the flow of ending effects. With reference to FIG. 11-26, when the effect pattern A is selected, the screen shown in FIG. 11-26(A) is displayed on the image display device 5 in the selection period A. The screen shown in FIG. 11-26(A) includes an image including characters for prompting the selection of the effect contents in the early stage among the effect contents after the big hit and characters for showing options.

After the selection period A, the screens shown in FIGS. 11-26 (B) and (C) are displayed on the image display device 5 in the selection period B and the selection period C, respectively. Each of the screens shown in FIGS. 11-26(B) and (C) includes an image including characters for instructing the selection of the effect contents in the middle and end of the effect contents after the big hit and the characters indicating the options. Be done.

After the selection period C, the screen shown in FIG. 11-26(D) is displayed on the image display device 5 in the selection result display period. The screen shown in FIG. 11-26(D) includes an image including characters indicating the selection result of the early stage, the middle stage, and the final stage of the effect content after the big hit.

The effect pattern B can be output during a high base state after a big hit, by executing a predetermined game (here, the Amida lottery game) that requires a player's operation (here, selecting an option), and depending on the result of the game. It is a production pattern of ending production that changes the number of songs that can be selected by the player among the various songs. When the effect pattern B is selected, instead of the effect of displaying the selection period A to the selection period C shown in FIG. 11-25 and the effect of displaying the selection result, FIG. 11-26(E) and FIG. 11-26(F ), the effect of executing the Amida Lottery game is executed.

On the screen shown in FIG. 11-26(E), an image of the first half of the Amida lottery, characters of choices at the starting point of the Amida lottery, characters prompting the player to select the choices, and characters following the route of the Amida lottery Images are included. After the option is selected by the player and the image of the character starts moving along the route of the Amida lottery from the selected start point, the screen of FIG. 11-26(F) is displayed.

The screen shown in FIG. 11-26(F) includes an image of the second half of the Amida lottery, characters showing the game result of the Amida lottery goal point, and an image of the character who has reached the goal point by following the Amida lottery route. .. Depending on the result of the game, the number of songs that the player can select among the songs that can be output during the high base state after the big hit is changed. For example, as a result of the Amida Lottery game, when the goal point of "add two songs" is reached, two songs are added to the number of songs that the player can select. When the player has reached the “out of bounds” goal point, the number of songs that the player can select is maintained as is.

The total number of songs that can be output during the high base state, which is prestored in the pachinko gaming machine 1, is 10. Two songs can be selected at the first hit. After that, as a result of the effect pattern B being selected in the ending effect period of the jackpot of consecutive chans, the number of pieces of music indicated by the result of the executed game is added. When the number of selectable music pieces reaches the total number of music pieces (here, 10 music pieces), the effect pattern B cannot be selected. After the effect pattern B becomes unselectable, an effect pattern E described later can be selected instead of the effect pattern B.

For the effect pattern C, a predetermined game (here, a trump game) that requires a player's operation (here, selection of an option) is executed, and the ending suggesting the set value shown in the modified example is indicated by the result of the game. It is a production pattern of production. Details regarding the setting values will be described in modification examples regarding the setting illustrated in FIG. As shown in the modified example of setting, it is configured to be able to set to one of the set values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and it is possible to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value In the case of the above configuration, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the set value. Since the player expects to be controlled in an advantageous state, by executing an ending effect that suggests a set value, the player can be made to pay attention to the ending effect. When the effect pattern C is selected, instead of the effect of displaying the selection period A to the effect of the selection period C shown in FIG. 11-25 and the effect of displaying the selection result, FIG. 11-26(G) and FIG. 11-26(H ), the effect of executing the card game is executed.

The screen shown in FIG. 11-26(G) includes an image of options for playing cards and characters for urging the player to select an option. After the option is selected by the player and the operation of turning over the selected playing card is executed, the screen of FIG. 11-26(H) is displayed.

The screen shown in FIG. 11-26(H) includes the image of the options of the non-selected playing card and the image of the playing card in which the image of the contents selected and turned over to suggest the setting value is drawn. .. The setting value is suggested according to the content of the image of the playing card (for example, content of character, type of character). For example, in the case of the character “may be set”, it is suggested that the set value is likely to be a high set value. In addition, it is indicated that the set value is likely to be a high set value in the case of a specific type of character. It should be noted that the effect pattern C cannot be selected during a continuous change when the setting suggestion is executed.

The effect pattern D is a mini game that requires a player's operation, which indicates whether or not there is a pending storage that is determined to be a big hit among the currently stored pending memories (so-called continuous holding). It is a production pattern of an ending production that executes production. When the effect pattern D is selected, the effect of executing the mini game of the effect pattern D is executed instead of the effect of displaying the selection period A to the effect of the selection period C shown in FIG. 11-25. ..

The effect pattern E is a selection pattern that can be selected after all songs can be selected in the effect pattern B, or after the number of consecutive chan reaches a specific number (for example, 15 times), and is operated by the player. This is an ending effect production pattern in which an image that is not normally displayed (for example, a premium image) is displayed when the game is successful as a result of executing a required predetermined mini game. As shown in (A) of FIG. 11-24, the options of the effect pattern E are displayed in the unselectable state, but are displayed in a mode indicating that they are not selectable, and the selectable state. After that, it is displayed in a mode showing that it is selectable.

(Regarding a modified example of the characteristic part 069F)
(1) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-19 to FIG. 11-25, the type of ending effect is before the ending effect during the big hit (for example, 13 rounds to 16 rounds). It was selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of ending effect may be selected during the ending effect.

FIG. 11-27 is a timing chart showing an example of ending effects in the modified example. Referring to FIG. 11-27, in the above-described embodiment, an effect for selecting the effect pattern of the ending effect, which is executed before the ending effect during the big hit, is the 0th second of the ending effect time. To 10 seconds from 10 to 10 seconds. The effect to be executed after that is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 11-25(B).

(2) In this way, in the first half period of the ending effect, the type of the effect executed in the latter half period may be selected as the related effect related to the effect executed in the latter half period.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the related effect, an explanation effect (for example, a description of how to play) of an effect (for example, a mini game effect) that is executed in the latter half period may be executed. You may make it perform the introduction production of the production performed by. Further, in this case, the shorter ending effect time may have only the latter half period without the first half period.

Further, in this case, when the same effect pattern is repeatedly selected in a series of big hits, the first half period may be shortened and the second half period may be lengthened. Further, the first half period may be shortened, the second half period may be the same length, and the effect for time adjustment may be executed in the remaining period. This makes it possible to give the illusion that the ending period has been shortened.

(3) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-5(B), step S269 of FIG. 11-6, step S270, and FIG. A longer time is selected as the fanfare production time than the probability variation big hit or the 6R regular big hit. In addition, the jackpot of consecutive chan is selected to have a long time as a fanfare production time at a higher rate than the jackpot of the first hit. Further, the long time as a fanfare production time is higher in the case of being controlled as a big hit as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol than in the case of being controlled as a big hit as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol. I chose to select.

However, as described above, if the fanfare production time is determined, it may be determined by another method. Here, in the former case, a long time is selected as the fanfare production time at a rate of 0%, and in the latter case, a long time is selected as the fanfare production time at a rate of 100%. However, the ratio is not limited to the above and may be any other ratio as long as the latter ratio is higher than the former ratio.

(4) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 11-5(B), step S366 of FIG. 11-10, step S367, and FIG. 11-11, 16R probability variation big hit is 6R. A longer time is selected as the ending effect time at a higher rate than the probability variation big hit or the 6R regular big hit. In addition, rather than the big hit at the first hit, the long win of the consecutive chan is selected at a high ratio as the ending effect time. In addition, a long time as the ending effect time is higher in the case where the big hit is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol than in the big hit as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol. I chose to select.

However, as described above, if the ending effect time is determined, it may be determined by another method. Here, in the former case, a long time is selected as the ending effect time at a rate of 0%, and in the latter case, a long time is selected as the ending effect time at a rate of 100%. However, the ratio is not limited to the above and may be any other ratio as long as the latter ratio is higher than the former ratio.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, the effect patterns A to E of the ending effect include the intervention elements of the player (for example, effects that cause the player to operate the operation unit). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the effect patterns may not include the player's intervention element. For example, the effect pattern E is an effect pattern that does not include a mini game that requires a player's operation, and is an ending effect in which an image that is not normally displayed (for example, a premium image) is displayed without the player's operation. It may be a production pattern.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, there is no limit to the number of continuous probability variation states. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a limit may be set so that the number of continuous probability change states is the predetermined limit number. In this case, the effect pattern of the ending effect may include an effect pattern including a mini game effect that indicates the remaining number of times of the probability variation state up to the predetermined limit number.

(7) The effect in the high base state after the big hit may be a common effect in which it is difficult or impossible to determine whether the state is the probable variation state or the non-probability variation state. In this case, the ending effect production pattern may include a production pattern including a mini game production that suggests whether or not the probability change state will occur after a big hit.

(8) At the start of the ending effect time, the movable body 32 may be operated to perform an effect of appealing to the player the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit, and then the ending effect described above may be executed. .. As a result, the ending effect can be lengthened by the operation period of the movable body 32.

(9) In a special big hit (for example, a big hit when the number of consecutive chan has reached 20 times), a special video may be displayed without executing the ending effect described above. This special video may be displayed from the start of the big fanfare production period, may be displayed after the end of the fanfare production period, or may be displayed from the start of the ending production period. You may In this way, the ending effect described above may not be executed when a special condition is satisfied.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-11, it is assumed that the 6R normal big hit and the 6R probability variation big hit have the same ending effect time, and as shown in FIG. 11-25. , The ending production with the same time allocation is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the 6R normal big hit, the selection period of the effect after the big hit may not be provided, and the ending effect time may be shorter than the 6R sure variation big hit.

(11) In FIGS. 11-26(A) to (C), the options of the effect contents after the big hit are shown. With regard to this option, the 16R certainty variation jackpot may have more options than the 6R certainty variation jackpot. Further, as the number of consecutive chan is increased, the number of options may be increased. As shown in FIG. 11-25, at the time of 16R probability variation big hit or during continuous chan, the selection period A to the selection period C are lengthened, so even if there are many choices, the player chooses from the choices after the big hit. It becomes easy to select the effect contents.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Characteristic Section 069F)
(1-1-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The end effect selecting unit that selects a longer period in the first advantageous state as a finish effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate than in the second advantageous state ( For example, a game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 11-10, FIG. 11-11),
End time effect executing means capable of executing end time effects (for example, ending effect) during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, FIGS. 11-23 to 11-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 11-19, step in FIG. 11-20, step in FIG. 11-21. S784: The period in which the selection can be accepted may be the first half of the end effect period or the second half of the jackpot round, specifically, the 13R start command is received in the 16R jackpot. It may be a period from when the completion command of 16R is received to when the completion command of 16R is received.).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-1-2) It is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probability change state, a time saving state, a high state). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a base state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Normal state (for example, normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit), and a second disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds of big hits, a normal big hit),
A case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than a case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called big hit big hit) (For example, in the case of a big hit of so-called consecutive chan), an end time effect selecting unit (for example, an end effect selecting unit that selects a long period at a high rate as an end effect time period at the end of the advantageous state (for example, ending effect time)). The game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 11-10, and FIG. 11-11),
End time effect executing means capable of executing end time effects (for example, ending effect) during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, FIGS. 11-23 to 11-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Reception means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting may be used. Step S752A in FIG. 11-19, step in FIG. 11-20, step in FIG. 11-21. S784.) is further provided.

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-1-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as the special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the second special symbol), it is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability changing state, a time saving state, a high base state,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 11-4) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second suspended storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first suspended storage information. End effect selecting means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 11-10, FIG. 11- 11) and
End time effect executing means capable of executing end time effects (for example, ending effect) during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, FIGS. 11-23 to 11-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Reception means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting may be used. Step S752A in FIG. 11-19, step in FIG. 11-20, step in FIG. 11-21. S784.) is further provided.

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-2-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The end advantageous effect selecting means (for example, a game control microcomputer, which selects a long period in which the first advantageous state is longer than the second advantageous state as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous state at a high rate. 100, step S366 of FIG. 11-10, FIG. 11-11),
End effect production means capable of executing the end effect during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, FIG. 11-23 to FIG. 11-26),
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
All of the plurality of types of end effects that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state include player intervention elements (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) (for example, effect patterns. All of A to effect pattern E are effect modes that accept the operation of the player).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Moreover, the player's intervention element is included in the finish production performed in the finish production period longer than the reference period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-2-2) It is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probable variation state, a time saving state, a high state). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a base state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
It is possible to control to at least one of a normal state (for example, a normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state, and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100),
The case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than the case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called first hit big hit) The end effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, which selects a long period at a high rate as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous state) (for example, in the case of a so-called consecutive jackpot) Step S366 of FIG. 11-10, FIG. 11-11),
End effect production means capable of executing the end effect during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, FIG. 11-23 to FIG. 11-26),
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
All of the plurality of types of end effects that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state include player intervention elements (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) (for example, effect patterns. All of A to effect pattern E are effect modes that accept the operation of the player).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Moreover, the player's intervention element is included in the finish production performed in the finish production period longer than the reference period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-2-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the second special symbol), it is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability changing state, a time saving state, a high base state,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, a game state control means capable of controlling at least one of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). When,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second suspended storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first suspended storage information. End effect selecting means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 11-10, FIG. 11-11) that selects a long period at a high rate as the end effect period at the end of
End effect production means capable of executing the end effect during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, FIG. 11-23 to FIG. 11-26),
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
All of the plurality of types of end effects that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state include player intervention elements (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) (for example, effect patterns. All of A to effect pattern E are effect modes that accept the operation of the player).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Moreover, the player's intervention element is included in the finish production performed in the finish production period longer than the reference period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The end advantageous effect selecting means (for example, a game control microcomputer, which selects a long period in which the first advantageous state is longer than the second advantageous state as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous state at a high rate. 100, step S366 of FIG. 11-10, FIG. 11-11),
An end time effect executing means capable of executing an end time effect during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, FIG. 11-23 to FIG. 11-26),
During the selection effect period after the end effect period has been selected, in the end effect period, a selection of the effect contents from a plurality of types of effect contents is received from the player. Means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step 069FS156 to step 069FS159 in FIG. 11-23).
The selection period of the ending production period of the first advantageous state is longer than the selection period of the ending production period of the second advantageous state (for example, 6R as shown in FIG. 11-25). 16R probability variation jackpot is longer than the probability variation jackpot, the production selection period after the jackpot is longer.)

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, by lengthening the selection period of the effect contents after the end effect period, it is easier to recognize the effect contents, but it is difficult to give the player a feeling of delay due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state. can do.

(1-3-2) It is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probable variation state, a time saving state, a high state). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a base state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
It is possible to control at least one of a normal state (for example, a normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state, and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100),
The case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than the case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called first hit big hit) The end effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, which selects a long period at a high rate as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous state) (for example, in the case of a so-called consecutive jackpot) Step S366 of FIG. 11-10, FIG. 11-11),
An end time effect executing means capable of executing an end time effect during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, FIG. 11-23 to FIG. 11-26),
During the selection effect period after the end effect period has been selected, in the end effect period, a selection of the effect contents from a plurality of types of effect contents is received from the player. Means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step 069FS156 to step 069FS159 in FIG. 11-23).
The selection period of the ending production period of the first advantageous state is longer than the selection period of the ending production period of the second advantageous state (for example, 6R as shown in FIG. 11-25). 16R probability variation jackpot is longer than the probability variation jackpot, the production selection period after the jackpot is longer.)

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, by lengthening the selection period of the effect contents after the end effect period, it is easier to recognize the effect contents, but it is difficult to give the player a feeling of delay due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state. can do.

(1-3-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as the special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the second special symbol), it is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability changing state, a time saving state, a high base state,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, a game state control means capable of controlling at least one of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). When,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second suspended storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first suspended storage information. End effect selecting means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 11-10, FIG. 11-11) that selects a long period at a high rate as the end effect period at the end of
An end time effect executing means capable of executing an end time effect during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 11-22, FIG. 11-23 to FIG. 11-26),
During the selection effect period after the end effect period has been selected, in the end effect period, a selection of the effect contents from a plurality of types of effect contents is received from the player. Means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step 069FS156 to step 069FS159 in FIG. 11-23).
The selection period of the ending production period of the first advantageous state is longer than the selection period of the ending production period of the second advantageous state (for example, 6R as shown in FIG. 11-25). 16R probability variation jackpot is longer than the probability variation jackpot, the production selection period after the jackpot is longer.)

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, by lengthening the selection period of the effect contents after the end effect period, it is easier to recognize the effect contents, but it is difficult to give the player a feeling of delay due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state. can do.

(1-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-3-3) above,
An operation detecting means for detecting an operation by the player (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, step 069FS158 of FIG. 11-23) is further provided,
The end time effect executing means executes an effect as an intervention element in an effect mode that requires detection of a motion by the motion detecting means during an execution period, when executing any of a plurality of kinds of end time effects ( For example, all of the effect patterns A to E are effect modes in which the operation of the player is accepted.

According to such a configuration, since there is an intervention element by the player, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of extension.

(1-5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-3-3) above,
An operation detecting means for detecting an operation by the player (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, step 069FS158 of FIG. 11-23) is further provided,
As the intervention element, the end-time effect executing means executes the end-time effect in one of an effect mode that requires detection of an operation by the operation detecting means during an execution period and an effect mode that does not require detection (for example, Any of the effect patterns A to E may be an effect mode in which the player's operation is not accepted).

According to such a configuration, since there is an intervention element by the player, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of extension.

(1-6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-5) above,
(The end time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state, )
(An end-time effect executed by the end-time effect execution means from among a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) that can be executed in the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state. End effect receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation units for setting may be used. Step S752A in FIG. 11-19, FIG. 11-20, further including step S784 of FIG. 11-21.),
A plurality of types of end effects are selected by the end effect reception means a predetermined number of times (for example, once or a plurality of times) until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a so-called continuous channel). (While still ending), it includes an end-time production in which selection cannot be accepted (for example, production pattern B is not selectable during continuous chanting when all songs are released). ..

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(1-7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-5) above,
(The end time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state, )
(End-time production reception that receives from the player the selection of the end-time production executed by the end-time production execution means from among a plurality of types of end-time productions that can be executed in the end production period of the first advantageous state. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 11-19, Step S784 in FIG. 11-20, and Step S784 in FIG. 11-21. .) is further provided,)
For a plurality of types of end effects, when the effect result is a specific result (for example, success), the selection is not accepted until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until so-called consecutive chan ends). It includes an end effect that is disabled (for example, when the setting suggestion is executed, the effect pattern C is not selectable during continuous chanting).

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(1-8) In the gaming machine of (1-6) or (1-7) above,
(The end time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state, )
(End-time production reception that receives from the player the selection of the end-time production executed by the end-time production execution means from among a plurality of types of end-time productions that can be executed in the end production period of the first advantageous state. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 11-19, Step S784 in FIG. 11-20, and Step S784 in FIG. 11-21. .) is further provided,)
The plurality of types of end-time effects include end-time effects that allow new selections instead of end-time effects that make it impossible to accept selections (for example, effect pattern E is effect pattern B or When the effect pattern C is not selectable, it is made selectable).

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(1-9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-8) above,
(The end time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state, )
(End-time production reception that receives from the player the selection of the end-time production executed by the end-time production execution means from among a plurality of types of end-time productions that can be executed in the end production period of the first advantageous state. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 11-19, Step S784 in FIG. 11-20, and Step S784 in FIG. 11-21. .) is further provided,)
It is possible to accept the selection of a plurality of types of end effects, based on the fact that a release condition (for example, a condition that another effect pattern cannot be selected, a condition that a continuous change has been completed) is satisfied. Includes end effects. It should be noted that before or during the selection period in which the selection of the end effect can be accepted is started or during the selection period, the player performs a special operation (for example, a back button operation or command input, specifically, a cross). The release condition may be established according to the operation of the keys in a predetermined order, the continuous push of the push button, the input of the password, etc.).

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(1-10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-9) above,
(The end effect production means can execute any of a plurality of types of end effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E).)
Further comprising setting means (for example, refer to FIG. 12-1 to FIG. 14-3) capable of setting any of the setting values of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player,
The plurality of types of end-time effects include effects that suggest the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-26(H), the effect pattern C suggests a set value). It is a production.)

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(1-11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-10) above,
(The end effect production means can execute any of a plurality of types of end effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E).)
The plurality of types of end effects include end effects having different lengths (for example, effect patterns A to effect patterns E have different lengths),
After the execution of the end production is completed, the next variable is changed so that the period from the execution of the end production by the end production execution means to the start of the next variable display is the same. The period adjustment effect until the display is started is executed (for example, the ending effect period is longer than the effect patterns A to E, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the extra time).

According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to adjust the period from the start of execution of the ending effect to the start of the next variable display, and the game control can be easily executed.

(1-12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-11) above,
The ending production period includes at least a first period and a second period after the first period has elapsed,
In the first period, a related effect (for example, introduction effect, explanation effect, effect mode selection effect) related to the effect executed in the second period is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27, ending. An effect pattern selection period for selecting an effect pattern to be executed thereafter may be provided during the effect time).

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(2-1-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
In the first advantageous state, at the time of starting the effect state at the start of the advantageous state, the start effect selecting unit (at a higher rate) selects a long period as a start effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state ( For example, a game control microcomputer 100, step S269 of FIG. 11-6, FIG. 11-7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 11-16) capable of executing notification effect for notifying the type of the effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 11-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. For a long time),
The notification effect executing means,
In the notification period of the second advantageous state, the player notifies the type of the effect during the advantageous state that can be executed after the end of the start time effect period in a manner that the player cannot select (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17). In the case of 6R normal big hit, and in the case of promotion from 6R normal big hit to 6R probability variation big hit, the notification effect is executed in a mode that the player cannot select.),
In the notification period of the first advantageous state, the player is informed in a manner that the player can select which of the advantageous-state productions to be executed after the end of the start-time production period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 17). In the case of 6R probability variation big hit and in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot, the notification effect for notifying the selected music is executed because the selection of which music of which big hit is output is accepted. ).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-1-2) It is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probable variation state, a time saving state, a high state). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a base state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Normal state (for example, normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit), and a second disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds of big hits, a normal big hit),
A case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than a case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called big hit big hit) (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive jackpot), a start time effect selection unit (for example, a high effect ratio) that selects a long time period as a start time effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state (for example, The game control microcomputer 100, step S269 of FIG. 11-6, and FIG. 11-7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 11-16) capable of executing notification effect for notifying the type of the effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 11-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. For a long time),
The notification effect executing means,
In the notification period of the second advantageous state, the player notifies the type of the effect during the advantageous state that can be executed after the end of the start time effect period in a manner that the player cannot select (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17). In the case of 6R normal big hit, and in the case of promotion from 6R normal big hit to 6R probability variation big hit, the notification effect is executed in a mode that the player cannot select.),
In the notification period of the first advantageous state, the player is informed in a manner that the player can select which of the advantageous-state productions to be executed after the end of the start-time production period (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17). In the case of 6R probability variation big hit and in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot, the notification effect for notifying the selected music is executed because the selection of which music of which big hit is output is accepted. ).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-1-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the second special symbol), it is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability changing state, a time saving state, a high base state,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 11-4) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. Start time effect selection means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S269 in FIG. 11-6, FIG. 11-) that selects a long time period as a start time effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of 7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 11-16) capable of executing notification effect for notifying the type of the effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 11-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. For a long time),
The notification effect executing means,
In the notification period of the second advantageous state, the player notifies the type of the effect during the advantageous state that can be executed after the end of the start time effect period in a manner that the player cannot select (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17). In the case of 6R normal big hit, and in the case of promotion from 6R normal big hit to 6R probability variation big hit, the notification effect is executed in a mode that the player cannot select.),
In the notification period of the first advantageous state, the player is informed in a manner that the player can select which of the advantageous-state productions to be executed after the end of the start-time production period (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17). In the case of 6R probability variation big hit and in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot, the notification effect for notifying the selected music is executed because the selection of which music of which big hit is output is accepted. ).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-2-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
In the first advantageous state, at the time of starting the effect state at the start of the advantageous state, the start effect selecting unit (at a higher rate) selects a long period as a start effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state ( For example, a game control microcomputer 100, step S269 of FIG. 11-6, FIG. 11-7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 11-16) capable of executing notification effect for notifying the type of the effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 11-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. Is a long period of time).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-2-2) It is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, probability variation state, time saving state, high state). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a base state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Normal state (for example, normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit), and a second disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds of big hits, a normal big hit),
A case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than a case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called big hit big hit) (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive jackpot), a start time effect selection unit (for example, a high effect ratio) that selects a long time period as a start time effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state (for example, The game control microcomputer 100, step S269 of FIG. 11-6, and FIG. 11-7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 11-16) capable of executing notification effect for notifying the type of the effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 11-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. Is a long period of time).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-2-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the second special symbol), it is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability changing state, a time saving state, a high base state,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 11-4) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. Start time effect selection means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S269 in FIG. 11-6, FIG. 11-) that selects a long time period as a start time effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of 7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 11-16) capable of executing notification effect for notifying the type of the effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 11-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. Is a long period of time).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1-1) to (2-2-3) above,
The first advantageous state has a larger number of types of effects during the advantageous state that can be executed than the second advantageous state (for example, in the 6R normal big hit, it is possible to output the song at the time of the big hit from three songs And, in the 16R probability variation jackpot, you can select the song at the time of jackpot from 10 songs).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1-1) to (2-4) above,
In the first advantageous state, based on the increase in the number of times that the advantageous state is continuously controlled (for example, the so-called consecutive chan number) while being controlled to the special state, in the first advantageous state, by the advantageous state effect reception means. There are many types of effects during the advantageous state that can accept the selection (for example, selectable jackpot songs are added to each consecutive chan).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1-1) to (2-5) above,
As the first advantageous state, there are a 1A advantageous state (for example, 16 round certainty variation big hit) and a 1B advantageous state (eg, 6 round certainty variation big hit) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the 1A advantageous state,
The notification period of the 1A advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the 1B advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than 6R certainty variation big hit. The period is long.).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1-1) to (2-6) above,
The notification effect execution means, as the notification effect,
In the second advantageous state, as the effect during the advantageous state, the type of effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is advantageous is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, a jackpot type). The notification effect and the round promotion effect are executed as the notification effect.) On the other hand,
In the first advantageous state, notification of the type of music that can be output as the effect during the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, the music selection effect is executed as the notification effect).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1-1) to (2-7) above,
The start-time production period includes an advantageous state type suggestion period (for example, a period of jackpot type suggestion display shown in FIG. 11-17) for executing an effect that suggests the type of the advantageous state,
The advantageous state type suggestion period of the first advantageous state is longer than the advantageous state type suggestion period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-17, the 16R probability variation big hit is Bigger hit type indication period is longer than other big hits.)

With such a configuration, the player is informed of the advantageous state that is more advantageous for the player for a longer period. Therefore, the player can be pleased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modifications regarding settings]
The characteristic unit 207SG shown below is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and it is possible to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set setting value. The configuration related to the configuration can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, problems may occur from the following viewpoints. BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, the fact that the setting state is set is informed only on the liquid crystal screen, so that it is not possible to appropriately inform the setting state. There was a problem. A gaming machine according to invention 207SG that solves such a problem is proposed below. Further, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to appropriately leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the setting state. A gaming machine according to the invention 208SG that solves such a problem is proposed below. Furthermore, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with an information display means capable of displaying predetermined information relating to a given gaming value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a display unit for confirming the set value and an information display unit are provided. However, there is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced if each is separately provided. A gaming machine according to the invention 209SG which solves such a problem is proposed below. In the following, the features of the gaming machines according to the invention 207SG, the invention 208SG, and the invention 209SG will be represented as a characteristic portion 207SG. The characteristic part 207SG is applicable to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to change the jackpot winning probability according to the set value by a setting change operation by a person on the game hall side (a clerk at the game hall, etc.) using operation means such as a predetermined switch. .. For example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a setting change process is executed which allows the jackpot winning probability set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be changed in response to a setting change operation. Thereby, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table according to the set value, the setting change process that allows the jackpot winning probability to be changed is executed. The set value is composed of, for example, 6 stages (a plurality of stages) of 1 to 6, and the winning probability of the jackpot is the winning probability in the order of the set value 1<the set value 2<the set value 3<the set value 4<the set value 5<the set value 6. Get higher That is, when the set value 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the advantage gradually increases in the order of the set value 2 to the set value 6. It should be noted that the set value is not limited to six levels as long as it has a plurality of levels. In this way, the rate of ball output (number of balls per unit time (number of prize balls)) changes according to the fact that the winning probability of the big hit can be changed, so changing the set value changes the ball output rate. It can be said that

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the selection of the set value by the setting changing operation at the time of turning on the power. Of the six setting values, for example, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 are called high setting, which has a high probability of winning the big hit. For example, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 are the big hit values. It is sometimes called a low setting with a low winning probability.

Also, the winning probability of the small hit may be changeable by setting the set value 1 to the set value 6, like the winning probability of the big hit. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the probability variation control is executed, when changing the setting of the jackpot winning probability, both the jackpot winning probability in the low probability state and the jackpot winning probability in the high probability state are set. The values 1 to 6 may be changed (for example, both jackpot winning probabilities may be set value 1<set value 2<set value 3<set value 4<set value 5<set value 6). ..

Also, the selection probability of the type of jackpot may be changeable by setting the setting values 1 to 6 like the winning probability of the jackpot. The selection probability of the variation pattern type may also be changeable by setting the setting values 1 to 6 like the winning probability of the big hit. The selection probability of the variation pattern may also be changeable by setting the setting values 1 to 6 like the winning probability of the big hit.

FIG. 12-1 is a flowchart showing the setting value change processing (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value changing process, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device (207SGSa051), the right-handed lamp and the first hold indicator, the second The hold indicator starts blinking (207SGSa052). Further, the CPU 103 starts the lighting of only one of the segments constituting the round display as a mode (a mode that is neither big hit A, big hit B nor big hit C) according to the setting value change processing (207SGSa052a). ).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any value 1 to 6 is stored as the setting value in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a). ). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the set value in the RAM 102 is “1”. Is set (the set value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any one of the values 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056). If the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 are repeatedly executed, and if the timer has expired (207SGSa056; Y), the power-off detection process is executed. (207 SGSa057).

After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the RAM 102 on the display monitor (207SGSa058), and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061) and determines whether or not the setting switch has been operated (207SGSa062). When the setting change switch is not operated (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065, and when it is (207SGSa062; Y), the contents of the RAM 102 are updated based on the operation of the setting change switch (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor is "1", the RAM 102 is set to "2", which is a set value that is one step more advantageous to the player than "1", as a temporary set value. If the set value stored in the display monitor is “2”, the set value “3”, which is one step more advantageous to the player than “2”, is stored in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value. For example, a value larger than the set value displayed on the display monitor is stored in the RAM 102 as a borrowing setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor is "6", "1" may be stored in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the setting value (temporary setting value) stored in the RAM 102 on the display monitor (207SGSa064) and determines whether the lock switch is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new temporary setting value in the RAM 102, or the setting value stored in the RAM 102. Execute the processing to display on the display monitor.

When the lock switch is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and ends the display of the setting value (or the provisional setting value) on the display monitor. However, (207SGSa067), all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device are turned off (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the first hold indicator and the second hold indicator, and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether a temporary setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069;N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and if it is stored (207SGSa069;Y), the value of the setting value further stored in the RAM 102 and the RAM 102 are stored. It is determined whether or not the value of the provisional set value is different (207SGSa070).

When the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is the same as the value of the temporary set value stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and when they are different (207SGSa070; Y), The temporary setting value stored in the RAM 102 is stored in the RAM 102 as the setting value (207SGSa071), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual setting value.

Moreover, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the setting value change processing.

FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device (207SGSa101), the right-handed lamp and the first hold indicator, the second The hold indicator starts blinking (207SGSa102). Further, the CPU 103 starts the lighting of only one of the segments constituting the round indicator as a mode (a mode that is neither big hit A, big hit B nor big hit C) according to the set value confirmation processing (207SGSa103). ).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa107). If the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer is not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 are repeatedly executed, and if the timer is out (207SGSa107; Y), the power-off detection process is executed. (207SGSa108). The power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value changing process described above.

After the power-off detection process is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the RAM 102 on the display monitor (207SGSa109), and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. When the lock switch is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor is ended (207SGSa112), and all the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device are configured. The segment is turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the first hold indicator, and the second hold indicator and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the setting value confirmation processing.

In this way, the lighting of the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device and the round display from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, and the first hold display device, the second hold display device and By starting the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like is that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the process of changing or confirming the set value from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Can be recognized.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, at the start of the set value changing process or the set value confirming process, one of the segments constituting the round indicator is set as a mode corresponding to the set value changing process or the set value confirming process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segments forming the round display can be any of the big hit A, big hit B, and big hit C. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it is not applicable.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the setting value changing process and the setting value confirming process are started, the segments constituting the round indicator are in the same form as the mode corresponding to the setting value changing process and the setting value confirming process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments that make up the round display can be set at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process. You may light in different modes.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cleared with the lock switch while the gaming machine frame is open. The setting value changing process is executed by turning on the switch.

At this time, in the display monitor, the display (base value display) using the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display unit is terminated by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. To do. That is, the display monitor according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display units when the setting value changing process is executed at the time of startup and when the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the fourth display unit. Then, when the setting changeover switch is operated while the set value is being displayed on the fourth display unit in this way, the display on the fourth display unit is updated. When the lock switch is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit is set as a new set value.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch is turned on (cleared) while the gaming machine frame is open. By setting the switch to OFF), the set value confirmation processing is executed.

At this time, in the display monitor, the display (base value display) using the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display unit is terminated by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. To do. That is, the display monitor according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display units when the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of startup and when the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit is ended when the lock switch is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ready to play.

The invention 207SG has been described above by exemplifying the characteristic portion 207SG. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-1); ,
With game control means capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing),
Equipped with
An information display unit (for example, a game information display unit) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display. Have
A setting state in which the setting value can be set by the setting means when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the clear switch, the lock switch, and the open sensor are ON at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1) (for example, a setting state). , The state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-1),
When in the setting state, the information display unit displays a display that can be recognized as being in the setting state (for example, when the CPU 103 is in the process of changing the setting value, the first special symbol display device and the first special symbol display device). 2 special symbol display device, a portion that lights up all the segments that make up) is described, and according to this feature, variable display that is an important display in the gaming machine is executed. Since the fact that the setting state is set is notified on the display unit, it is possible to perform suitable notification.

Further, the invention 208SG has been described by exemplifying the characteristic portion 207SG. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 208SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-1); ,
With game control means capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing),
Equipped with
An information display unit (for example, a game information display unit) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display. Have
A setting state in which the setting value can be set by the setting means when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the clear switch, the lock switch, and the open sensor are ON at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1) (for example, a setting state). , The state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-1),
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of specifying that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed in the variable display area (for example, when an error more than a set value occurs, A game machine characterized by flashing all segments composing the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device) is described, and according to this feature, an important display in the game machine In the variable display area where the variable display is executed, the display notifies that a predetermined error has occurred even if the specific condition is satisfied. It can be suitably performed.

Further, the invention 209SG has been described by exemplifying the characteristic portion 207SG. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 209SG,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium and capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-1); ,
With game control means capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where prize balls are paid out by doing),
An information display unit (for example, a first display unit to a fourth display unit) capable of displaying predetermined information (for example, a base value) about the game value given by the game value giving unit (for example, a first display unit to a fourth display unit). , Display monitor)
Equipped with
The information display means is capable of displaying setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. X, the pachinko gaming machine 1 If the lock switch and the open sensor are ON and the clear switch is OFF when activating, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state),
The number of the display units used is different when the predetermined information is displayed and when the setting value information is displayed (for example, when the base value is displayed on the display monitor, the first display unit is displayed). , A second display unit, a third display unit, a fourth display unit is used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor, only the fourth display unit is used) According to this feature, since the set value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value, it is not necessary to separately provide a display means for displaying the set value information, and the game is played. Machine cost can be reduced.

The characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention, Included in the invention.

For example, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the embodiment, the game information display unit, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold display device, the second hold display device, the normal symbol display device, the general Although the form composed of the figure hold indicator, the round indicator, the right-handed lamp, the probability variation lamp, and the time saving lamp has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game information display section displays the first special symbol. The device and the second special symbol display device may be included without including.

In the characteristic unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process (setting value changing state) and the setting value checking process is being executed (setting value checking state). The 1 special symbol display device and the 2nd special symbol display device have been illustrated as being in the same mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process. With and when the set value confirmation process is being executed, the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device may be lit or blinked in different modes. By doing this, whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state depending on the lighting mode or blinking mode of the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device. Can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the set value changing state and the set value confirming state, the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device are turned on to turn on the first special symbol display device. Illustrated a mode in which the display mode (lighting mode) of the symbol display device or the second special symbol display device is different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device derives and displays the variable display result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the display mode (lighting mode) of the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, the first special symbol If the display device or the second special symbol display device is different from the display mode when the variable display result is derived and displayed, a part of all the segments configuring the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device It is not necessary to turn on the segment.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-mentioned embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, all segments and round indicators constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device are configured. The mode in which the segments are lit, the right-handed lamp, and all the segments composing the first hold indicator and the second hold indicator are blinked has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is changed. In the state and the set value confirmation state, the lighting of one segment that constitutes the round display, the blinking of the right-handed lamp, and the blinking of all the segments that configure the first hold indicator and the second hold indicator are not executed. Or, you may execute only one part.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value changing state and the set value confirming state, only one of the segments constituting the round display is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and if the combination does not correspond to the jackpot type, there may be a plurality of lit segments constituting the round indicator in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the notification of the setting value abnormality error is executed using the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of this, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be individually provided with an LED for error notification, and the LED may be turned on or blinking to notify that the set value error has occurred.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a display monitor for displaying the base value is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. 1 may not be provided with a display monitor. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with a display monitor as described above, a display means for displaying a set value (or a provisional set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state may be newly provided.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold display device, the second hold display device, the round display device, the right, which constitute the game information display portion. Although the striking lamp and the like are set to be different from those in the game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 notifies the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first holding display device, the second holding display device, the round display device, the right striking lamp, etc., which constitute the game information display unit, are pachinko game machines 1 May be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game as long as it is possible to inform that the set value is changed or the set value is confirmed.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold display device, the second hold display device, the round display device, the right, which constitute the game information display portion. Although the striking lamp and the like are set to be different from those in the game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 notifies the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the “mode different from that during game” may include that the blinking cycle is different, the brightness, the emission color of each segment is different, and the like.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold display device, the second hold display device, the round display device, the right, which constitute the game information display portion. Although the form which notifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state by lighting or blinking the striking lamp has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. When 1 is the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold indicator, the second hold indicator, the round indicator, the right-handed lamp lighting A description that flashing or blinking is executed may be provided at a predetermined location of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position near the game information display unit). By doing so, the clerk of the game hall who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold indicator, the second hold indicator, It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition of lighting or blinking of the round indicator and the right-handed lamp as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main process of the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the RAM clear process is executed when it is determined that the clear switch is ON or after the setting value changing flag is cleared. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing is performed when it is determined that the clear switch is ON or when the set value changing flag is cleared. It may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set, not after.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 10F)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, problems may occur from the following viewpoints. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and that can execute control of an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. there were. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to shift to the next processing only when all the main processings being executed are completed (for example, JP 2010-200902A). reference). However, in the case of a gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is preferably executed. I couldn't. The gaming machines according to the invention 10F, the invention 11F, the invention 12F, and the invention 13F which solve such problems are proposed below. In the following, the features of the gaming machines according to Invention 10F, Invention 11F, Invention 12F, and Invention 13F will be referred to as characteristic unit 10F. The characteristic unit 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added to the above-described set value change process and set value confirmation process. The characteristic unit 10F can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above together with the characteristic unit 207SG.

FIG. 13-1 is a flowchart showing the setting value changing process in the characteristic unit 10F. In FIG. 13A, the same processing as that in FIG. The RAM clearing process was executed before the setting change process was executed. Therefore, at the stage of the setting change process, no information about the game remains in the storage area. However, the RAM clear process may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set. As a result, the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the characteristic unit 10F, description will be made on the assumption that the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the setting value change processing, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start processing (10FS001). Details of the game stop start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 13-3. After the game stop start process, the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device is started (207SGSa051). Then, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 12-1 is executed.

In addition, the CPU 103 executes the game stop ending process after executing the process of clearing the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) (10FS002). Details of the game stop end processing will be described with reference to FIG. 13-4. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value (or the provisional set value) on the display monitor is ended (207SGSa067). Then, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 12-1 is executed.

FIG. 13-2 is a flowchart showing the set value confirmation processing in the characteristic unit 10F. In FIG. 13B, the same processing as that in FIG. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 13-3. This game stop start processing is common to the game stop start processing of FIG. 13-1. After the game stop start process, the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device is started (207SGSa101). After that, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 12-2 is executed.

Further, when the lock switch is turned off in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the CPU 103 executes the game stop ending process (10FS002). Details of the game stop end processing will be described with reference to FIG. 13-4. This game stop end process is the same process as the game stop end process of FIG. 13-1. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value on the display monitor is ended (207SGSa112). After that, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 12-2 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start processing will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers measure time and period relating to the game. When the game is stopped, the CPU 103 stops the counting of these timers. The plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the special winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the special winning opening door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for measuring the interval period between rounds during the big hit game state. The CPU 103 uses the inter-round interval period timer to measure the time from the end of one round to the start of the next round.

The V-lid opening time timer controls the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished to a certain-variable state based on the passage of a certain switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and the certain switch ( It is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid, which is provided in front of a sensor for detecting the V probability change and is controlled to be in an open state and a closed state. In the V-probable variation gaming machine, the V lid is opened in a predetermined round of a plurality of rounds. An area in which the V lid is opened is called a V winning area. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the V lid is opened to when it is closed by the V lid opening time timer. The V passage waiting time timer is a timer for measuring the time of V winning which determines that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 is a game ball that has passed through a predetermined switch after the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state (the player enters the special winning opening near the closing of the special winning opening door and sets the predetermined prize). A game ball that has passed through the switch is also determined as a V winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the valid period of the V winning, in which the V winning is determined to be valid, by the V passage waiting time timer.

The electric-chu open time timer is a timer for measuring the open time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wings, which is the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory), is controlled to be in the open state. .. The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, and the CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state to when it is closed by the electric Chu opening time timer. ..

The special figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The universal figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the ordinary symbols. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal variable time timer.

The fanfare time timer is a timer for measuring a period in which the fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that the big hit is controlled at the start of the big hit. The fanfare period is a period in which the fanfare production as a production operation for notifying the start of the big hit game state is executed after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect by the fanfare time timer.

The ending time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which the ending effect is executed, which is a period for notifying the end of the big hit when the big hit ends. The ending period is a period in which the big hit ending process is executed, and is a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

The CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a general figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like as timers other than the above timers. The special figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The universal figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from when the variable display of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the normal symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is derived and displayed by the universal figure fluctuation stop period timer until the variable display of the next ordinary symbol is started.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start processing in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 13-3 is a flowchart showing the game stop start processing in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop start processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is operating (10FS010). In 10FS010, if the attacker opening time timer is in operation (10FS010; Y), the attacker opening time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not in operation (10FS010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is in operation (10FS011). In 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is in operation (10FS011; Y), the inter-round interval period timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012). In 10FS012, if the V lid opening time timer is in operation (10FS012; Y), the V lid opening time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not in operation (10FS012; N), it is determined whether or not the V passage waiting time timer is in operation (10FS013). In 10FS013, if the V passage waiting time timer is in operation (10FS013; Y), the operating V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is ended.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not in operation (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the power-chu open time timer is in operation (10FS014). In 10FS014, if the power-chu open time timer is operating (10FS014; Y), the power-chu open time timer that is operating is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the power switch opening time timer is not operating (10FS014; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is operating (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS015; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the special figure variation time timer is not in operation (10FS015; N), it is determined whether the general figure variation time timer is in operation (10FS016). In 10FS016, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016; Y), the universal figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the universal figure variation time timer is not operating (10FS016; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017). In 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is in operation (10FS017; Y), the fanfare time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not operating (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is operating (10FS018). In 10FS018, if the ending time timer is in operation (10FS018; Y), the ending time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not in operation (10FS018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is in operation as another timer (10FS019). In 10FS019, if the other timer is in operation (10FS019; Y), the other timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the other timers are not operating (10FS019; N), the other process (10FS021) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process for invalidating the firing of the ball hitting handle 30, a process for invalidating various sensors provided at the starting opening, the general winning opening 10, the out opening, and the passage gate 41, a process for invalidating detection of various errors, The process of invalidating the payout of prize balls is included. By the other process (10FS021), various processes are invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 13-4 is a flowchart showing a game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop ending process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030). In 10FS030, if the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). In 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). In 10FS032, if the V-lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V-lid opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). In 10FS033, if the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V passage waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the power cable open time timer is stopped (10FS034). In 10FS034, if the power-chu open time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the active power-chu open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the electric channel open time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the stopped special figure variation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the special figure variation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether the universal figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS036). In 10FS036, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the suspended universal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the universal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). In 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). In 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (10FS039). In 10FS039, if the other timers are stopped (10FS039; Y), the stopped other timers are activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the other timers are not stopped (10FS039; N), the other processing (10FS041) is executed, and then the processing ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, the process of enabling the firing of the ball hitting handle 30, the process of enabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning opening 10, the out port, and the passage gate 41, the process of enabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing for enabling the payout of prize balls. By the other process (10FS041), various processes are validated and the game is normally executed.

(About the effect of the characteristic part)
As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-4, the CPU 103 controls the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state. Of the attacker release time timer is restarted based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state in the setting confirmed state is subtracted to advance the game. Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the control of the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state is Based on the end, the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the interval period between rounds is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. You can

As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled during the valid period of V winning, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the valid period of the V winning is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 13-1 to FIG. 13-4, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. And stops the clocking of the valid period of the power-chu open time timer based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the enterable state in the setting confirmed state. It is possible to prevent that.

As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-4, the CPU 103 measures the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that the special symbol variable display is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display is being executed. Is stopped, and the measurement of the valid period of the special figure variation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is prevented that the player is disadvantaged because the special symbol variable display is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 13-1 to FIG. 13-4, the CPU 103 measures the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the ordinary symbols is executed. And restarts the measurement of the valid period of the universal figure variable time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the variable display of the normal symbols is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the fanfare production is being executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the measurement of the effective period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fanfare effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. ..

As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-4, the CPU 103 stops counting the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the ending confirmation is controlled in the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed. Based on the completion of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the ending effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. ..

As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-4, the CPU 103 is controlled based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and before the next variable display is started. The clocking of the period of the fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and the clocking of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing this, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game proceeds by subtracting the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state. This can prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Regarding a modified example of the gaming machine related to the characteristic unit 10F)
Although the characteristic portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention. included. Below, the modification of the characteristic part 10F is demonstrated.

The game machine (so-called first-class game machine) that shifts to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of the special pattern and the decorative pattern has been described, but the special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the game area A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on the fact that a game ball has won (V-winning) a special winning port (V winning port) inside, and the first and second types It may be applied to a game machine (one-two-mixer) in which and are combined. When the start winning to the second start winning opening is detected, the big hit determination is executed. When the result of the big hit is determined, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result becomes the big hit game. The game control similar to the jackpot based on the start winning to the first start winning opening, such as being controlled to the state, is executed. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is the small hit, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result becomes the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When the game ball is received by the special variable winning ball device for the small hit in the small hitting game state, and the game ball enters the special winning hole (V area) and is detected by the predetermined switch, the variable for the big hit The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the second-class big hit game control in which the prize winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds and becomes a big hit game state.

In such a one-and-two-mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided for measuring an effective period in which a game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V area) is determined to be effective. The CPU 103 determines that a game ball that has passed a predetermined switch after the special variable winning ball device has passed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer is within the valid period. The CPU 103 uses a small hit time timer to measure a period during which the winning of the special winning opening is effectively determined. Then, the CPU 103 stops measuring the effective period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting check state when in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state. The counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing this, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible for the player to be disadvantaged because the control is executed in the small hitting game state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls are executed in the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-4, the same control may be executed in the setting change state. Good. For example, the CPU 103 stops clocking of various timers based on being controlled to a setting change state when the player is in an advantageous state, etc., and various timers based on the completion of the setting change state. You may make it restart the time measurement of.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result or the off display result. Specifically, if the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result, stop the timekeeping of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended. If the special display variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol is displayed as a result, the special map variable time timer may not be stopped even if the setting confirmation state is controlled. .. In this way, for the big hit display result that is in an advantageous state for the player, the timer is stopped to give a disadvantage to the player, but the timer is stopped because the deviated display result does not cause a disadvantage to the player. You can prevent it from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a big hit display result or a deviant display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, if the setting confirmation is executed during execution of the variable display of the deviation display result, during the execution of the variable display of the deviation display, it is the symbol stop period without stopping the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer. At this time, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

The timer control may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or not. For example, when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is advantageous to the player, various timers are stopped, but when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, various timers are set. It may not be stopped.

The invention 10F has been described above by exemplifying the characteristic portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 10F,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 3) of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to execute)
A state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous for the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player.
A predetermined game execution means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping unit (for example, a CPU 103 which measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable winning apparatus to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 restarts the timekeeping of the period (for example, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state). And restarting the time measurement of the attacker opening time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

The invention 11F has been described by exemplifying the characteristic portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 11F,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 3) of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to execute)
A state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41), the normal identification information (for example, the normal symbol) is variably displayed, and the normal variable display means (for example, the CPU 103) that derives the display result is displayed. ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , A variable winning ball device 6B),
And an ordinary variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 that keeps time with a power-chew opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the ordinary variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award timing means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the valid period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is open) Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantageous because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirmation state. Can be prevented.

The invention 12F has been described by exemplifying the characteristic portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 12F,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player when a specific display is derived as a result,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 3) of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to execute)
A state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
And variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the identification information (for example, a special symbol),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting). Resuming the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

The invention 13F has been described by exemplifying the characteristic portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 13F,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is derived,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 3) of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to execute)
A state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
A normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) and derives a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41).
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of the variable display of the ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 for timing by the universal figure variable time timer),
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being performed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the validity period of the universal figure variable time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable identification information is normally displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 40F)
Next, the characteristic portion 40F will be described. The characteristic unit 40F has a feature regarding the processing of the effect control command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Noise may be generated due to static electricity or the like in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In such a case, the effect control command may be unintentionally transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The processing when such an irregular command is received will be described below.

FIG. 14-1 is a diagram exemplifying an effect control command in the characteristic unit 40F in the present embodiment. The command F1XXH and the command F2XXH are effect control commands indicating the contents of the winning determination results such as the jackpot type determination and the variation pattern type determination at the time of the start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Of these, the command F1XXH is a symbol designating command that indicates whether or not a big hit is included in the winning judgment results, and the judgment result of the type of the big hit. Further, the command F2XXH is a variation type command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the variation pattern type random number value is in the winning determination result.

Various effect control commands shown in FIG. 14A are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 at a predetermined timing by the CPU 103. By receiving various effect control commands, the effect control CPU 120 executes various processes. A part of the various processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the effect control command will be described.

(About processing based on fluctuation pattern designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 on the basis of the reception of the variation pattern designation command to perform the variation display of the decorative pattern to be displayed. In addition, the image display device 5 may be provided with a constant small symbol of a reduced decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing the variation display of the constantly displayed small symbols.

(About processing based on the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command)
As a variable display pattern, a decorative symbol, a special symbol, and a fourth symbol may be provided as a fourth symbol following the ordinary symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first and second special symbols) is changing, for example, it is fluctuated by a certain operation in a mode that is always visible in a display device such as the image display device 5. Is displayed. By the variable display of the fourth symbol, an effect such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears from the screen for a moment is performed, or the movable body covers all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when an effect such as shielding is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display. Based on the reception of the first variation start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to display the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variation start command.

(About processing based on the designated command during the opening of the special winning opening)
During the big hit game, for example, a round game for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state (first state) advantageous to the player is executed 15 times. During the round game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the closed state (second state), which makes it difficult for the gaming ball to win the big winning opening. The effect control CPU 120 controls the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 to the open state based on the reception of the special winning opening opening designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds in the big hit game state by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the special winning opening opening designation command.

(Regarding the processing based on the first start mouth winning designation command and the second start mouth winning designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first start opening winning award designation command, so that the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 stores the first hold information. Display the hold display corresponding to. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 on the basis of the reception of the second start opening winning award designation command, so that the effect control command reception buffer stored in the RAM 122 stores the second value. Display the hold display corresponding to the hold information.

(About processing based on symbol designating command, variation type designating command)
Based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command, the effect control CPU 120 performs a winning flash effect and a winning change change effect. The winning flash effect is an effect of causing a lamp provided around the first starting opening to emit light when a start winning occurs. The effect control CPU 120 performs the lottery for the winning flash effect based on the jackpot expectation based on the hold information by the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command. When the lottery is won, the lamp emits light in a different manner depending on the degree of expectation. Concretely, the production control CPU 120 emits red light for those with a high expectation of big hits, and white light for those with a low expectation of hits. Is controlled so that the lamp does not emit light. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound according to the degree of expectation together with the winning flash effect. In addition, you may control not to output a sound only by light emission.

The winning-time hold change effect is an effect for changing the display mode of the hold display displayed when the start winning occurs to a mode different from the normal mode. The effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery for winning change hold effect based on the jackpot expectation based on the hold information by the symbol designating command or the variation type designating command. When the lottery is won, the hold display at the time of winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Specifically, the hold display is displayed in red, green, and blue in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation, and the hold display is displayed in white as a normal mode in the case of being out of the lottery or out of change without reach. .. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the degree of expectation together with the winning pending change effect. In addition, you may control not to output a sound only by a hold change.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the winning flash effect by controlling the light emission of the lamp based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command, thereby executing the winning-time pending change rendering. It should be noted that only one of the winning flash effect and the winning pending change effect may be executed. Further, at the time of winning the prize, the effect indicating the degree of expectation may be executed only by outputting the sound.

Next, the effect control main process executed in the characteristic unit 40F will be described. FIG. 14-2 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 40F.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command has been received (207SGS411). When the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state, the setting value is changed. A set value related informing process is executed to inform that the operation is in progress (informing that the set value is being changed) or that the setting value is being confirmed (informing that the set value is being confirmed) (207SGS412). In the set value related notification process, a notification image indicating that the setting variable is being updated and a notification image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed.

After the setting value related notification process is executed in 207SGS412, the sub game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop processing, when the production control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the production control CPU 120 stops the game. The process is executed. Details of the sub-side game stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 14-3.

After the sub-side game stop processing is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether or not the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are received (207SGS416; Y). Proceeds to 207 SGS427.

FIG. 14-3 is a flowchart showing the sub-side game stop processing in the characteristic unit 40F executed in 40FS001. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer.

In the sub-side game stop processing, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first variation start command has been received (40FS010). When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. When it is determined that the first variation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The production control CPU 120 discards the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby causing the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS011, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command has been received. When it is determined that the second variation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. When it is determined that the second variation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The production control CPU 120 discards the second variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby displaying the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS012, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS013. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby performing the variation display of the decorative pattern by operating the image display device 5 and the variation display of the constantly small symbols. Can be prevented from running. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS013, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the special winning opening open designation command has been received. If it is determined that the command for opening special winning opening is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS014. When it is determined that the special winning opening open command is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The CPU 120 for effect control updates the display of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the special winning opening opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You can turn it off. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS014, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning opening designation command has been received. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 does not display the hold display of the first hold information by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the first start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can do. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS015, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning opening designation command is received. When it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The production control CPU 120 discards the second start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so that the hold display of the second hold information by operating the image display device 5 is not displayed. can do. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS016, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not a symbol designating command has been received. If it is determined that the symbol designating command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the symbol designating command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can cancel the winning flash effect under the control of causing the lamp to emit light by discarding the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can prevent the winning-change-on-hold change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the symbol designating command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. .. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS017, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the variation type designation command is received. If it is determined that the variation type designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS018. When it is determined that the fluctuation type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can avoid executing the winning flash effect under the control of causing the lamp to emit light by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may not execute the winning-pending change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. it can. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS018, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not a test command has been received. Here, the test command is a command directly transmitted to the production control board 12 from a device for sending a command for confirming the state of the screen and the state of the accessory provided at the time of factory shipment. .. When transmitting the test command, various test commands are transmitted in a state in which a transmission device dedicated to transmitting the test command is connected to the effect control board 12.

If it is determined in 40FS018 that the test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. When it is determined that the test command is received, the control according to the test command is executed even in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to perform a predetermined operation based on the reception of a test command for checking the liquid crystal of the image display device 5 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Display the check screen. In this way, the processing based on the reception of the test command is executed even in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS019, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not a command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, the commands shown in FIG. 14-1. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the processing ends. When it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from performing an effect by discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, the process ends.

(About the effect of the characteristic part)
As shown in FIG. 14C, since the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even when the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled to the setting change state, the variation pattern designation command Do not perform control based on reception. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 14C, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled to the setting confirmation state. Do not perform control based on reception. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 14-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received, the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 14-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received, the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 14-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening opening specifying command even if the special winning opening opening specifying command is received while being controlled to the setting change state. The control based on the reception of the special winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 14-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening opening designation command even if the special winning opening opening designation command is received while being controlled to the setting confirmation state. The control based on the reception of the special winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 14-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if the first start winning prize designation command and the second starting winning prize designation command are received, the first starting winning prize. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first starting winning opening designation command and the second starting winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 14-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if the first start winning prize designation command and the second starting winning prize designation command are received, the first starting winning prize. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first starting winning opening designation command and the second starting winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 14-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designating command and the variation type command while being controlled to the setting change state, and therefore, is based on the receipt of the symbol designating command and the variation type command. Do not execute control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 14-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designating command and the variation type command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state, and therefore, is based on the receipt of the symbol designating command and the variation type command. Do not execute control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 14-3, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but thereafter discards the received command as in 40FS021. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, since the received command is discarded and no information remains, even if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state ends, no erroneous command remains and no malfunction is executed.

As shown in FIG. 14B, based on the reception of the setting value change start notification command, the setting for displaying the image notifying that the setting change state is set, and the reception of the setting value confirmation start notification command Based on the above, the setting for displaying the image notifying that the setting confirmation state is set is made. By doing so, it is possible to indicate that the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and even if the irregular display command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the image display device 5 or the like. It is possible to prevent the predetermined rendering means from malfunctioning.

As indicated by 40FS020 in FIG. 14C, the control according to the test command is executed even when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. With this configuration, even when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, it is possible to execute the operation of the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command.

(Regarding the modified example of the characteristic part)
The characteristic portion 40F has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention. included. Below, the modification of the characteristic part 40F is demonstrated.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the analysis of the effect control command receiving buffer for each command transmitted while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, instead of sequentially analyzing the commands and discarding them one by one, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the CPU 103 may send an initialization command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 based on the end of the setting change state. Then, based on the reception of the initialization command, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded. Further, even in the setting confirmation state, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded based on the reception of the predetermined command.

In the embodiment described above, when the control based on the effect control command is not executed even when the effect control command other than the command related to the setting change or the setting check is received while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. explained. However, the processing based on the reception of the effect control command while the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be internally executed. Even in such a case, the control executed when being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has a higher priority than the control based on the reception of the other effect control command. On the screen of the image display device 5, an image according to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is visually displayed. Regarding the sound, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, channels other than the channel outputting the notification sound during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be muted.

In the above-described embodiment, the process of analyzing the command received when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled is executed. However, when the command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the analysis may not be performed even if the command is received.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 and the lamp at the time of winning the prize have been described as the predetermined effect means operated by the effect control CPU 120 when the effect control command is received. However, the predetermined effect means may be any one as long as the effect control means 120 is executed based on the reception of the command. For example, the operation means operated by the player or a movable member provided in the game machine may be used as the predetermined effect means. In such a case, when the operation means vibrates or the movable member operates due to the reception of a predetermined command, commands for executing these operations are received during the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Even if it is done, the control for discarding the command may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, a command other than the command for ending the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, such as the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command, is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You may control not to do it.

In the above-described embodiment, a lamp provided in the gaming machine may be caused to emit light or sound may be output from a speaker together with the control for operating the image display device 5. In such a case, the command may be discarded when a command related to the lamp or the speaker is received so that the effect means does not operate during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the notice production based on the reception of the symbol designating command or the variation type command is executed. However, the notice effect to be executed may be executed by receiving one of the commands, and when the command related to the variation pattern command is transmitted due to the occurrence of the start winning, the command related to the variation pattern is executed. You may make it perform a notice production based on. In such a case, even if a command related to the variation pattern is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command may be discarded.

In the above-described embodiment, the advance notice lottery to be executed may be executed based on the symbol designating command or the variation type command being received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, various types of advance notice may not be executed by determining that the advance notice is not executable at the timing of determining whether or not the advance notice is actually executable. Also, when executing the pre-reading notice effect in continuous variable display other than when winning, the notice lottery is executed based on receipt of the symbol designating command or variation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is finished at the timing of actually starting the advance notice, the advance notice may be executed based on the received command.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the command received in the processing of 40FS021 in 40FS001 is discarded has been described. However, the timing of discarding the received command may be the timing after it is determined that the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; Y). By doing this, when a plurality of irregular commands are received, the commands can be discarded at once.

In the above-described embodiment, when an irregular command is received once during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, a restriction may be applied so that another irregular command is not received thereafter. Good.

(Explanation regarding the association of the characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic part may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic part. The feature parts combined in this way or the individual feature parts that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the respective configurations relating to the other feature parts.

The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9... Frame LED
10 General prize hole 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 LED control board 15 Relay board 17 Special variable winning ball device 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start Mouth switch 23... First count switch 24... Second count switch 30... Hitting ball operation handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 41... Passage gate 100... Game control microcomputer 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Specific identification information variable display means capable of concurrently performing variable display of the first specific identification information and variable display of the second specific identification information;
A decoration identification information variable display means capable of executing a variable display of decoration identification information corresponding to either one of the variable display of the first specific identification information and the variable display of the second specific identification information according to the gaming state.
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information and the variable display of the second specific identification information, the decoration identification is performed when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the variable display of the decoration identification information. And a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying a variable display result of information,
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information and the variable display of the second specific identification information, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information, the notification effect Without executing
further,
As the advantageous state, a game state control means capable of controlling at least one of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
End effect selecting means for selecting a longer period as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous condition at a higher rate in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state,
And a finish production execution means capable of executing a finish production in the finish production period,
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing any one of a plurality of kinds of end time effects during the end time effect period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect execution means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Further comprising reception means,
A gaming machine characterized by that. A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Specific identification information variable display means capable of concurrently performing variable display of the first specific identification information and variable display of the second specific identification information;
A decoration identification information variable display means capable of executing a variable display of decoration identification information corresponding to either one of the variable display of the first specific identification information and the variable display of the second specific identification information according to the gaming state.
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information and the variable display of the second specific identification information, the decoration identification is performed when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the variable display of the decoration identification information. And a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying a variable display result of information,
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information and the variable display of the second specific identification information, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information, the notification effect Without executing
further,
At least one of a normal state, a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state, a first advantageous state as the advantageous state, and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means that can be controlled to
Compared to the case of controlling to the advantageous state when controlled to the normal state, the case of controlling to the advantageous state when controlled to the special state is at the end of the advantageous state. End effect selecting means for selecting a long period at a high rate as the end effect period,
And a finish production execution means capable of executing a finish production in the finish production period,
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing any one of a plurality of kinds of end time effects during the end time effect period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect execution means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Further comprising reception means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.